The Project Gutenberg eBook of The reader's guide to the Encyclopaedia Britannica

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: The reader's guide to the Encyclopaedia Britannica

A handbook containing sixty-six courses of systematic study or occasional reading

Creator: Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica

Release date: July 14, 2024 [eBook #74039]

Language: English

Original publication: London: Encyclopaedia Britannica

Credits: Richard Tonsing and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE READER'S GUIDE TO THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA ***

Transcriber’s Note:

New original cover art included with this eBook is granted to the public domain.

THE READER’S GUIDE
TO THE
ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA

A HANDBOOK CONTAINING SIXTY-SIX COURSES OF SYSTEMATIC STUDY OR OCCASIONAL READING
THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA COMPANY, Limited
London
THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA COMPANY
New York
Copyright in the United States of America, 1913,
by
The Encyclopaedia Britannica Company
i

INTRODUCTION

In your ordinary use of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, you give your attention to the one article that will answer the one question you have in your mind. The aim of this Guide is to enable you to use the Britannica for an altogether different purpose, namely, for systematic study or occasional reading on any subject.

The volumes of the Encyclopaedia Britannica contain forty-four million words—as much matter as 440 books of the ordinary octavo size. And the subjects treated—in other words, the whole sum of human knowledge—may be divided into 289 separate classes, each one completely covering the field of some one art, science, industry or other department of knowledge. By the mere use of scissors and paste the alphabetical arrangement of the articles could be done away with, and the Britannica could be reshaped into 289 different books containing, on the average, about half as much again as an ordinary octavo volume. It would misrepresent the Britannica to say that you would then have 289 text-books, because there is an essential difference in tone and purpose. A text-book is really a book intended to be used under the direction and with the assistance of a teacher, who explains it and comments upon it. The Britannica, on the other hand, owes the position it has enjoyed since the first edition appeared in 1768 to the fact that it has succeeded, as no other book has succeeded, in teaching without the interposition of a teacher.

It is not, of course, claimed that the idea of reading certain groups of Britannica articles in the order in which they will combine themselves into complete books is a novel invention. Thousands of men owe the greater part of their educational equipment to a previous edition of the Britannica. And not only did they lay out their own courses of reading without the aid of such a Guide as this, but the material at their disposal was by no means so complete as is the 11th Edition. Every edition of the Britannica before this one, and every other book of comparable size previously published, appeared volume by volume. In the case of the last complete edition before the present, no less than 14 years elapsed between the publication of the first volume and the last. It is obvious that when editors have to deal with one volume at a time, and are unable to deal with the work as a whole, there cannot be that exact fitting of the edges of one article to the edges of another which is so conspicuously a merit of the 11th iiEdition. All the articles in this edition were completed before a single volume was printed, and the work stood, at one stage of its preparation, in precisely the form which, as has already been said, might be given to it by merely rearranging the articles according to their subjects.

In this Guide, the principal articles dealing with the subject of each chapter are named in the order in which you may most profitably study them, and the summaries of the larger articles afford such a preliminary survey as may assist you in making your choice among the courses. Besides, where it seems necessary, there is added to the chapter a fairly complete list of all articles in the Britannica on the subject, so that the reader may make his study exhaustive.

A brief review of the six parts into which the Guide is divided will show the general features of its plan, of which a more detailed analysis is given in the Table of Contents.

Part 1 contains 30 chapters, each designed for readers engaged in, or preparing for, some specific occupation. To the beginner, who still has everything to learn, the advantages derived from such a course of study may well be so great as to make the difference between success and failure in life, and to those who have already overcome the first difficulties, to whom the only question is how marked a success awaits them, the Britannica can render invaluable service of another kind. No amount of technical training and of actual experience will lead a man of sound judgment to believe that he alone knows everything that all his competitors put together know; or that his knowledge and theirs is all that ever will be known. The 1500 contributors in 21 different countries who wrote the articles in the Britannica include the men who have made the latest advances in every department of knowledge, and who can forecast most authoritatively the results to be expected from the new methods which are now being experimentally applied in every field of activity. The experienced merchant, manufacturer, or engineer, or the man who is already firmly established in any other profession or business, will naturally find in some of the articles facts and figures which are not new to him, but he can profit by the opportunity to review, confirm, reconsider and “brush up” his previous knowledge.

Part 2 contains 30 chapters, each devoted to a course of systematic study designed to supplement, or to take the place of, some part of the usual school and college curriculum. The educational articles in the Britannica are the work of 704 professors in 146 universities and iiicolleges in 21 different countries. No institution of learning in the world has a faculty so numerous, so authoritative, or so highly specialized. Nor has any system of home study ever been devised by which the student is brought into contact with teachers so trustworthy and so stimulating. The fascination of first-hand knowledge and the pleasure of studying pages intended not for reluctant drudges submitting themselves to a routine, but for students eager to make rapid progress, are factors in the educational value of the Britannica that cannot be overestimated, and the elasticity with which any selected course of study can be enlarged and varied is in full accordance with the modern theories of higher education.

Part 3 is devoted to the interests of children. The first of its chapters describes Britannica articles of the utmost practical value to parents, dealing with the care of children’s health, with their mental and bodily training, and with the intelligent direction of their pastimes. The second chapter indicates varied readings in the Britannica for children themselves, showing how their work at school can be made more interesting and profitable to them by entertaining reading on subjects allied to those included in their studies. The third chapter in this Part gives a number of specific questions such as children are prone to ask, as well as questions which may be put to them in order to guide their natural inquisitiveness to good purpose. The references to pages in the Britannica show where these questions are clearly and instructively answered.

Part 4 suggests readings on questions of the day which relate to American citizenship and to current politics. A study of the articles indicated in this section of the Guide will aid the reader not only to form sound opinions for himself, but also to exercise in private or public life the influence for good which arises from a clear view of the arguments on both sides of controverted questions. It is no exaggeration to say that the Britannica is the only existing work in which such subjects as tariffs, trusts, immigration, labour and the relation between legislative and judiciary powers are treated without partisan bias and with adequate fulness.

Part 5, especially for women, deals with their legal and political status in various parts of the world, their achievements in scholarship, art and science, as well as with home-making, domestic science and kindred subjects. The important part which women, both among the contributors and on the editorial staff of the Britannica, took in the preparation of the work sufficiently indicates that the editor-in-chief made ample provision for the subjects peculiarly within their sphere.

ivPart 6 is an analysis of the many departments of the Britannica which relate to recreation and vacations, travel at home and abroad, photography, motoring, out-door and indoor games and other forms of relaxation and of exercise. The extent to which the work can be used in planning motoring tours, and the superiority, in such a connection, of its articles to the scant information found in ordinary guide books, are shown in the extracts, included in this Part 6, relating to a trip from New York through the Berkshire Hills to the White Mountains.

It will be seen from this brief survey of the field covered by the Guide that provision has been made for every purpose which can dictate the choice of a course of reading. But as you proceed to examine its contents for yourself, you should remember that the lists it gives name only a fraction of the articles in the Britannica, and that for a fuller summary of the work as a whole you should turn to the Table on pp. 881–947 of Vol. 29.

Finally, the form in which this Guide is printed may call for a word of justification. It is inevitable that chapters, of an analytical character, bespattered with references to the numbers of volumes and of pages, and terminating with lists of the titles of articles, should bear a certain air of formality. There is no danger that the possessor of the Britannica, familiar with the fascination of its pages and the beauty of the illustrations which enhance their charm would permit his impression of the work itself to be affected by the bleak appearance of the Guide. But he may feel that because a list has a forbidding aspect the pleasure he has derived from browsing at will in the Britannica would give place to a sense of constraint if he rigidly pursued a course of reading. It may easily be shown that such a fear would be groundless, for the Britannica articles are all the better reading when one carries forward the interest which one of them has excited to others of related attraction. But to anyone who is firmly determined that he shall not be persuaded to read systematically, the Guide will none the less be useful, for he may flit from one chapter to another, selecting here and there an article merely because the account which is given of it pleases him. Or, better yet, he may find, in one portion only of a selected course, a series of only three or four articles which will, in combination, make the best of occasional reading.

THE EDITORS.
v

Table of Contents

Part I
         
Courses of Reading Especially Useful to Those Engaged in Certain Occupations, or Preparing for Them
      Page
Chapter 1. For Farmers 3
2. For Stock-Raisers 10
3. For Dairy Farmers 14
4. For Merchants and Manufacturers, General and Introductory 19
5.   Textiles 21
6.   Machinery 28
7.   Metals, Hardware, Glass and China 33
8.   Furniture 39
9.   Leather and Leather Goods 44
10.   Jewelry, Clocks and Watches 48
11.   Electrical Machinery and Supplies 55
12.   Chemicals and Drugs 58
13.   Food Products 63
14. For Insurance Men 69
15. For Architects 71
16. For Builders and Contractors 79
17. For Decorators and Designers 83
18. For Railroad Men 90
19. For Marine Transportation Men 94
20. For Engineers 100
21. For Printers, Binders, Paper-makers and All who Love Books 109
22. For Journalists and Authors 117
23. For Teachers 122
24. For Ministers 127
25. For Physicians, Surgeons and Dentists 135
26. For Lawyers 143
27. For Bankers and Financiers 151
28. For Civil Service Men 156
29. For Army Officers 158
30. For Naval Officers 168
vi         
         
Part II
         
Courses of Educational Reading to Supplement or Take the Place of School or University Studies
         
Chapter 31. Music 175
32. The Fine Arts, Introductory and General 187
33. Painting, Drawing, Etc. 189
34. Sculpture 198
35. Language and Writing 207
36. Literature, Introductory and General 214
37.   American 218
38.   English 224
39.   German 230
40.   Greek 234
41. Bible Study 237
42. History, Introductory and General 246
43.   American 248
44.   Canadian 270
45.   English, Scotch and Irish 272
46.   French 278
47.   The Far East: India, China, Japan 281
48. Economics and Social Science 288
49. Health and Disease 294
50. Geography and Exploration 300
51. Anthropology and Ethnology 308
52. Mathematics 316
53. Astronomy 322
54. Physics 329
55. Chemistry 334
56. Geology 338
57. Biology, General and Introductory 344
58.   Botany 347
59.   Zoology 353
60. Philosophy and Psychology 361
         
         
Part III
         
Devoted to the Interests of Children
         
Chapter 61. Readings for Parents 371
62. Readings for School Children 379
63. Questions Children sometimes ask, and Some Questions to ask Children 387
vii         
         
Part IV
         
Readings on Questions of the Day
         
Chapter 64.     393
    Education, Training of Defectives, Psychology  
    Crime, Juvenile Courts, Alcoholism  
    Heredity and Eugenics  
    Wages and Labour, Labour Organization  
    Immigration, The Negro Problem  
    Trusts, Finance, Tariff, Banking, Insurance  
    Socialism and its Tendencies  
    Initiative, Referendum and Recall, Government by Commission  
    Suffrage and the Suffrage Question  
    International Relations, Peace Arbitration  
    The Greater United States  
         
         
Part V
         
For Women
         
Chapter 65.     411
    The many subjects on which Women contributed to the Britannica  
    Accomplishments of Women in Scholarship, Art and Science  
    Women’s Legal Position in the United States and elsewhere  
    Their Disabilities in Great Britain  
    Home-making, Domestic Science, the Table  
    Food Preservation and Food Values  
    Costume and Ornament  
    Women famous in History and Literature, and on the Stage  
         
         
Part VI
         
Readings for Recreation and Vacation
         
Chapter 66.     425
    Motoring, a Specimen Trip: New York to the White Mountains  
    Photography  
    Out-door Games and Athletic Sports  
    Hunting, Fishing and Taxidermy  
    Sailing, Canoeing and Boating  
    Mountaineering and Winter Sports  
    Driving, Riding, Polo and Horse-racing  
    Gardening and Plants  
    In-door Games and Pastimes, Bridge, Needlework  
    Dancing, the Stage  
    Travel at Home and Abroad  

Part I
Courses of Reading Especially Useful to Those Engaged In Certain Occupations or Preparing for Them

3

CHAPTER I
FOR FARMERS

SEE ALSO CHAPTER II, FOR STOCK-RAISERS, CHAPTER III, FOR DAIRY FARMERS

Every farmer in the United States knows that farming is to-day an industry which calls for study of the world’s agricultural products, processes, and markets as well as for scientific knowledge of soils, crops, and animals. Fifty years ago the farmer sold for consumption in his immediate neighborhood the small surplus of his crops that was not needed for his own household and live stock. To-day he competes, in all the world’s great markets, with all the world’s farmers, and is the chief among American exporters. The Russian wheat fields and the Argentine cattle ranches are really nearer to him than a farm in the next township was to his grandfather. He lives better, does more for his children and pays higher wages than do farmers in other parts of the world, and yet he can successfully compete with them, because, as the article on Agriculture in the Encyclopædia Britannica says, in speaking of the United States, “there is no other considerable country where as much mental activity and alertness has been applied to the cultivation of the soil as to trade and manufactures.” American farmers “have been the same kind of men, out of precisely the same houses, generally with the same training, as those who filled the learned professions or who were engaged in manufacturing or commercial pursuits”; and their competitors abroad have been, for the most part, ignorant peasants. The course of reading indicated here is designed for wide-awake farmers who intend to be large farmers—by whom the latest information and the broadest outlook are recognized as essential to their calling. If you think the articles named here cover a great deal of ground, remember that the Massachusetts Agricultural College provides no less than sixty-four distinct courses of instruction, and that the subjects included in all the sixty-four are treated in the Britannica.

GETTING “GROUNDWORK” KNOWLEDGE

You may think, as you look at the titles of articles mentioned in these pages, that there are some which you need not read because you have already read bulletins of the United States Department of Agriculture or of your State Experiment Station. These official publications are most valuable, but naturally, they do not attempt to cover the whole range of agricultural subjects as the Britannica does—they are not intended for that purpose. Their arrangement and the way in which they are issued shows that they are designed to meet only certain special needs, not to give a general view of all the branches of farming. One subject may for example be discussed in three different bulletins, published in three different years, and the first may be out of print before the third appears. In the Britannica you get information that forms the very foundation of a thorough knowledge of farming and that also extends over the widest field. Of course it would be absurd to say that merely reading these articles will make 4any man a successful farmer as to say that a medical student who works hard at his books will always develop the tact and the sound judgment that a doctor needs. But unless the medical student has studied those text books he will never make a successful doctor; and similarly the information in the Britannica will give the farmer new advantages, no matter how much practical experience and special training he has had.

Scope of the Articles

There are in the Encyclopædia Britannica 1,186 articles dealing with animal and vegetable life; and among the 11,341 geographical articles a great many give important information about the production, distribution and consumption of farm products. Those upon continents, countries, states and provinces describe the local crops and any local methods of farming that are of special interest. There are some 600 articles on individual plants, of which a list will be found on pp. 889 and 890 of Vol. 29 (the index volume). If any one of these thousands of articles were not in the Britannica, it would not be quite so valuable as it is to you, for you may, any day, want to find out about any plant that grows, or about farming in any part of the world. A professor in an agricultural college would of course be glad to study the whole series. But in this Course of Reading only the articles which are of most immediate use to all practical farmers are mentioned, and the contents of each of these is described, so that you can omit any article that goes into details which you think you do not want. If you do skip any of them, it will, however, be a good plan to mark their titles in this list, for you may like to come back to them later when you realize how practical and understandable all the Britannica articles are—even those with dullsounding names.

Of course you will begin by reading the article Agriculture (Vol. 1, p. 338), by Dr. Fream and Roland Truslove, which is the key to the whole subject. And remember that this chapter of the Readers’ Guide mentions only those subjects that are treated more fully in other parts of the Britannica than in that article, so that the chapter does not attempt to tell the whole story.

Soil and Subsoil

The first thing a farmer has to deal with is the ground from which his crops are to come. The whole surface of the earth was originally hard rock. The article on Petrology, the science of rocks (Vol. 21, p. 323), by J. S. Flett, and the second part (Vol. 11, p. 659) of the article Geology, by Sir Archibald Geikie, deal with the “weathering” of rock, which has in great part broken it down into the small particles of stone that, mixed with decayed roots and plants, form the soil or subsoil. It may seem that it is going very far back into the origin of things for a farmer to read about the sources from which soil comes, but the nature of the mineral substances in it has a great deal to do with its power to nourish plants, and you cannot know too much about the material on which your principal work is done. The article which should next be read, Soil (Vol. 25, p. 345), continues the story of these particles of rock and shows how sand and clay must be combined with decaying vegetable or animal matter in order to make the best soil. This mixture is in turn “weathered” by air, heat, frost, and moisture; and not only the size of the grains in which it lies, but also their shape—which makes them pack more or less tightly—affect the pores, or spaces between the grains, through which the roots of the plants must push their way, and through which air and water must reach these roots. The article Earthworm (Vol. 8, p. 825) describes the useful part that worms play in stirring the mixture, while the natural and artificial fertilizers, which supply 5whatever ingredients the soil lacks, are discussed in the article Manures and Manuring (Vol. 17, p. 610). An important part of this article deals with the best methods of keeping farm yard manure in such a way that it does not lose its value before it is spread over the fields, and with the use, in this connection, of the liquid-manure tank. The microbes in the soil render the farmer an enormous service by changing crude nitrogen, which plants cannot digest, into the forms in which it is indispensable to them, and this process is described in the article Bacteriology (Vol. 3, p. 164), by Professor Marshall Ward, Professor Blackman, and Professor Muir.

Sunlight and Shade, Heat and Cold, Water Enough—and Not too Much

The action of light, the supply of which is just as necessary in causing growth as the warmth the sun gives, and the action of water and of heat and cold, are explained in the section “Physiology” (Vol. 21, p. 745) of the article on Plants. The proper method of working each farm, with a view to using these four in the right proportions, is influenced by the latitude in which it lies, its height above sea level, the protection that mountains give it, the slope at which the fields face the sun or turn away from it, the rain-fall, the relative dampness or dryness of the air when it is not raining, and the moisture of the soil. Every one of these subjects is vital to the farmer, and the Britannica brings to its readers the latest information regarding them in articles written by the leaders of progress. You will find the latest scientific guidance, in the most practical shape, in the articles Climate (Vol. 6, p. 509), by Professor R. de C. Ward, of Harvard, Meteorology (Vol. 18, p. 264), by Professor Cleveland Abbe, of the United States Weather Bureau, and Acclimatization (Vol. 1, p. 114). The distribution of heat in the soil is described in the article Conduction of Heat (Vol. 6, p. 893), where the diagram showing variations of temperature at different depths in the soil should be carefully studied.

Drainage and Irrigation

The brackish water that troubles farmers near tidal creeks, the alkali water that often occurs West of the Mississippi, and the stagnant water that never does the farm any good, are all as bad in their way as the river-floods or the merely sodden soil in which nothing will grow but coarse grass that is always unsafe pasturage. Drains and embankments need very careful planning, and sound information will be found in the articles Drainage of Land (Vol. 8, p. 471), Reclamation of Land (Vol. 22, p. 954), and River Engineering (Vol. 23, p. 374), the latter by Professor L. F. Vernon H. Harcourt, the leading authority on such subjects the world over.

The saving of water and the method of bringing it to the farm and distributing it over the fields are authoritatively discussed in the articles Irrigation (Vol. 14, p. 841), Water Supply (Vol. 28, p. 387), by G. F. Deacon, Windmill (Vol. 28, p. 710), Pump (Vol. 22, p. 645), and in the section headed “Utility of Forests” (Vol. 10, p. 646) of the article Forests and Forestry, by Gifford Pinchot, formerly U. S. Chief Forester. The other parts of this article, dealing with the timber industry, are of course important to farmers whose land includes any lumber. Water Rights (Vol. 28, p. 385) explains the laws which regulate the taking of water from streams and lakes, and the article Lake (Vol. 16, p. 86) is also of interest in connection with irrigation.

Farm Buildings and Fences

When the farmer, who has to be everything by turns, has been an engineer long enough to get the water off his farm or on his farm—and perhaps he has to do both in different parts of the 6same farm—he must next take on the builder’s job. He will be reminded of a good many precautions and economies that are often overlooked, and may find, too, some hints that are quite new to him, in the excellent series of articles, all by experts in the building trade: Farm Buildings (Vol. 10, p. 180), Building (Vol. 4, p. 762), Foundations (Vol. 10, p. 738), Brickwork (Vol. 4, p. 521), Stone (Vol. 25, p. 958), Masonry (Vol. 17, p. 841), Timber (Vol. 26, p. 978), Carpentry (Vol. 5, p. 386), and Roofs (Vol. 23, p. 697). The use of concrete for buildings, tanks, irrigation works, etc., has proved so successful, and is so rapidly increasing, that you will be especially interested by the article Concrete (Vol. 6, p. 835). Barbed Wire (Vol. 3, p. 384), in which the meshed field fencing, of late increasing in favor, is also dealt with, is another practical article.

Agricultural Machines

Advertisers no doubt supply you with more literature about farm machinery than you find time to read, but that makes it all the more essential to get sound information that has no trade bias. The Britannica goes into the principles of construction and helps you to see the good and bad points in the new models you are constantly offered. You can learn a great deal from the articles Plough (Vol. 21, p. 850), Harrow (Vol. 13, p. 27), Cultivator (Vol. 7, p. 618), Hoe (Vol. 13, p. 559), and the sections on machines in the articles Hay (Vol. 13, p. 106), Reaping (Vol. 22, p. 944), Sowing (Vol. 25, p. 523) and Thrashing (Vol. 26, p. 887). Oil Engine (Vol. 20, p. 35), Water Motors (Vol. 28, p. 382) and Traction (Vol. 27, p. 118) are also of importance.

Farm horses and the other live-stock required in general farming fall under Chapter II of this Guide.

Farm Finance

You cannot read the articles already mentioned, and consider all that has to be done in merely getting a farm ready to be worked, without realizing how grossly unfair it is that the American farmer should be hampered, as he is, by the want of proper banking facilities when he is making a start. And after he has bought and prepared his land and equipped and stocked his farm he needs, each year, money to finance his crops. For any loan used in the purchase of land and in permanent improvements such as buildings, drainage, irrigation, a mortgage is the natural security; but the short-term farm mortgages—five years at most—customary in the United States, do not give the farmer as much time as he needs for repayment, no matter how successful he may be. The average farm offers quite as good a certainty of continued earning power as does the average railroad, and farm mortgages should be—in fairness—regarded not as opportunities for short loans, but as sound standing investments, just as suitable as railroad bonds for conservative investors. The farmer’s position is even worse when he needs a short loan that he will be able to repay as soon as his crops have been sold, for he is then expected either to give a mortgage as security or to pay exorbitant interest.

Notwithstanding the prosperous conditions of farming in the United States, the country as a whole produces only half as much grain for every acre of farm land as is produced in Europe, and the only reason is that most of our farmers lack the capital needed in order to get the fullest yield from their land. In the chief European countries, the system of banking facilities for farmers, described in the article Co-operation (Vol. 7, p. 86), by Aneurin Williams, shows what can be done, and sooner or later will be done, in the United States. This article fully describes the admirable 7Raiffeisen banks in Germany, which are based upon the idea that a society of farmers (restricted to the neighborhood, so that each member’s honesty and capability are known to the other members) make themselves jointly responsible for loans to the members. A promissory note is the only security required. The French, Italian, Austrian, and other systems are also discussed in the Britannica, but the German plan is that which offers the best example to America.

Plants and Crops

This course of reading has now covered the conditions and the material required for farming, and it is time to get down to something that grows. In the old books everything about the life of a plant was treated as a part of the science of botany, and if you remember the botany you were taught at school, you remember a string of long names and very little else. There is of course an article on botany in the Britannica, but it deals chiefly with the history of botanical science, and the life of the plant is treated under another heading, and in a novel, interesting, and practical way. The article Plants (Vol. 21, p. 728) is indeed one of the most important and unusual in the Encyclopædia, giving the results of recent investigation which you could not find in any other book. It is written by eight contributors, all men who have done a great deal of original work. The section on classes of plants is by Dr. Rendle, that on the anatomy of plants by A. G. Tansley, that on the healthy life of plants by Professor J. Reynolds Green, that on their diseases by Professor H. Marshall Ward, that on the relation between plants and their surroundings by Dr. C. E. Moss, that on plant cells by Harold Wager, that on the forms and organs of plants by Professor S. H. Vines, and that on the distribution of plants in various parts of the world by Sir. W. Thiselton-Dyer. Special accounts of the chief parts of the plant are given in the articles Leaf (Vol. 16, p. 322), Stem (Vol. 25, p. 875), and Root (Vol. 23, p. 712). The success of artificial fertilization or impregnation is explained (Vol. 13, p. 744) in the article Horticulture.

Apart from the diseases described in the section, already mentioned, of the article Plants, the greatest danger to which crops are exposed is that of insect pests, and the special article Economic Entomology, dealing with them (Vol. 8, p. 896), gives a full account of each of the remedies that have proved useful. The cotton boll weevil is the subject of a most interesting section of the article Cotton (Vol. 7, p. 261). Separate articles are devoted to individual pests, such as Locust (Vol. 16, p. 857), and—turning to a larger enemy—Rabbit (Vol. 22, p. 767). There is no bird that troubles the farmer, or helps him by killing insects, upon which there is not an article, for more than 200 distinct bird articles are listed under the heading “Birds” on p. 891 of Vol. 29 (the index volume), in addition to the information in the article Bird (Vol. 3, p. 959), and the article on families of birds (Vol. 20, p. 299).

The crops of all climates are treated in general in the article Agriculture, and in particular under their individual names, all of which are so familiar, and indeed so fully listed on p. 889 of Vol. 29 (the index volume), that they need not be repeated here. Naturally you will include in this course of reading the crops with which you are personally concerned, and in any case you ought to read Grass and Grassland (Vol. 12, p. 367), and Grasses (Vol. 12, p. 369).

Wheat

The article Wheat (Vol. 28, p. 576) deals with one of the chief products of “the greatest cereal producing region of the world.” It begins the story of a wheat crop with the burning of the old straw of the previous year, then takes up ploughing, harrowing, 8seeding, thrashing, labor in connection with all these operations, and transportation and marketing. At this point, the article Flour and Flour Manufacture (Vol. 10, p. 548), by G. F. Zimmer, takes up the later history of wheat. It may surprise you to learn from the Britannica that wheat first found its way to America through a few grains being accidentally mixed with some rice. Barley (Vol. 3, p. 405) is an interesting article on the grain that is the oldest cereal food of the human race, and that is also remarkable for its power to grow over a greater range of latitude than any other grain. Cotton (Vol. 7, p. 256), by Professor Chapman, is an article of which the vast importance may be judged by the following table taken from page 261:

PRODUCTS FROM A TON OF COTTON SEED

Every one of the other cereal and general crops produced in any part of the world is treated in the Britannica with the same fullness of information and with the same practical detail which characterizes these articles on wheat, barley and cotton.

Some of the principal articles on the routine of farming such as sowing, reaping, and the like, have already been mentioned in connection with agricultural machinery. The articles on individual countries contain sections on the crops of each of them, and you will find Canada (Vol. 5, p. 152), and Germany (Vol. 11, p. 810), of special interest. The special features of tropical farming are described in the articles on tropical crops.

Fruit and Flower Growing

The article Fruit and Flower Farming (Vol. 11, p. 260) covers fruit culture in general, and, in the section of it which deals with the United States (Vol. 11, p. 268), the American fruit crops. This section describes the wonderful development of the fruit industry since cold transportation and cold storage enabled consumers in every part of the 9country, and in Europe as well, to purchase fruit grown in whatever state most advantageously produces any one variety. You should select, from the twenty separate articles on individual fruits, not only those on the varieties which you are already growing, but those on any others that are possible in the part of the country where your land lies. The section on fruit in the article on Horticulture (Vol. 13, p. 775) is devoted to growing on a smaller scale, in gardens. It contains (Vol. 13, p. 780) a practical calendar to show each month’s work.

Flower culture is the subject of special sections in both the articles above named and there is a descriptive list (Vol. 13, p. 766) of more than three hundred hardy annuals, biennials, and perennials, full of practical information. The calendar already mentioned indicates the dates for indoor and out-door operations. From the many articles on individual flower plants listed at the end of Part 3 of this chapter you can make your own choice.

Poultry and Bees

Poultry and their rearing are dealt with in the articles Poultry and Poultry Farming (Vol. 22, p. 213), Fowl (Vol. 10, p. 760), Turkey (Vol. 27, p. 467), Guinea Fowl (Vol. 12, p. 697), Duck (Vol. 8, p. 630), Goose (Vol. 12, p. 241), and Incubation and Incubators (Vol. 14, p. 359). Bee-keeping and the honey industry are treated in the articles Bee (Vol. 3, p. 625) and Honey (Vol. 13, p. 653). Truck farming is treated in the section dealing with vegetables (Vol. 13, p. 776), of the article Horticulture. Apart from the law as to water rights already mentioned the legal doctrine most particularly affecting farmers is that of Emblements (Vol. 9, p. 308). Grain Trade (Vol. 12, p. 322), and Granaries (Vol. 12, p. 336), the latter describing the latest type of grain elevators, are articles of great interest to farmers who specialize in cereal crops.

The new system of purchase of grain by the government, which is working admirably in Western Canada, protects the farmer against the speculators who buy standing crops for less than a fair price, and it is to be hoped that some similar plan may be adopted in the United States.

Economics (Vol. 8, p. 899), by Professor Hewins, Co-operation (Vol. 7, p. 82), and Tariff (Vol. 26, p. 422), deal with topics related to the marketing of all agricultural products. The articles on learned societies have an extensive section (Vol. 25, p. 317) on the agricultural societies of all countries.

The History of Farming

Agricultural history is, naturally, based upon the history of vegetable life, and the fossil plants described in the article Palæobotany (Vol. 20, p. 524), long as their appearance preceded that of man, greatly affected the nature of the earth’s crust which he was to occupy.

The earliest of all known writings, the Code of Khammurabi, described in the article on Babylonian Law, shows (Vol. 3, p. 117) that agriculture was the subject of careful legislation under the oldest government of which a contemporary record has survived; and the provisions as to the working of land on the “metayer” system, under which the landowner received from the landholder a share of the crops, and as to irrigation, are most explicit and practical. Ancient Egyptian implements of agriculture are fully described (Vol. 9, p. 69) in the article Egypt, and pictures of them appear on page 72 of the same volume. If the ancient history of farming interests you, it is only necessary for you to turn to the heading “Agriculture,” in the Index (Vol. 29), where you will find references to a number of other articles on the early civilizations.

From these articles, as from the historical section of the guiding article Agriculture, and the passages relating 10to agriculture in many of the 6,292 articles on the histories of races and countries, the reader may learn that agriculture has been the key to all history. The earliest migrations of the human race, as definitely as the comparatively recent development of America, Australasia and the interior of Africa, were based upon an agricultural impetus. And his reading upon other subjects in the Encyclopædia Britannica will often remind him that the wool and cotton and linen and leather that we wear, the carpets and blankets and sheets in our houses, all originated in farming of one kind or another; while every food that nourishes us, save fish and game, is directly an agricultural product. All the bustle of the great cities, all the wheels that turn in the mills, all the intricate mechanism of industry and commerce, all the world’s work and thought and happiness, depend upon the mysterious and inimitable processes by which the brown soil yields green growth. For all the progress science has made, we are no nearer to replacing these processes by any short cut of chemistry than were the first farmers whose husbandry is recorded in history. If all the little roots ceased for one year to do their work in the dark, the human race would hopelessly starve to death.

The alphabetical list of articles at the end of Chapter III of this Guide will make it easy for you to add to this course of reading, choosing for yourself the line that will be most attractive to you. In making your choice, do not forget that plant-life is a subject you cannot study too closely. No matter what crop you make your specialty, you have to educate the plants that produce it to do their work, just as carefully as a teacher trains children. Another fact to keep in mind is that just as a doctor is dealing with organs in the human body which he cannot see, so you are particularly concerned with the roots down in the soil, and the more you know about the way they eat and drink, the better for your farm.

The names of many of the writers of these articles are given in the table of the 1,500 Contributors to the Britannica, beginning at page 949 of Vol. 29 (the index volume); a glance will show you what authoritative positions they occupy and how thoroughly they command your confidence.

[See list of articles on subjects connected with farming, at the end of Chapter III of this Guide.]

CHAPTER II
FOR STOCK-RAISERS

Stock-raising in the United States was, until quite recent years, under the evil influence of the careless methods which had been handed down from the old days of the range-cattle industry. Chicago men still tell the story of the Chicago banker, afterwards Secretary of the Treasury, who declared, in reply to a request for a loan on the security of range-cattle, that he “would as soon lend money on a shoal of mackerel in the Atlantic Ocean.” The vague possession and the vague methods of breeding and marketing which suggested this comparison did not form the habits of close observation and incessant care which became necessary when land and food began to cost money. The lesson has been learned, and the present conditions of the industry are infinitely better for the country at large. It has been proved that fattening as well as breeding can be successfully undertaken in almost every part of the United 11States. Even in the North West, the tendency to-day is to turn from exclusive grain growing to a combination of cropping and feeding. Cattle, and also work horses of the right type, for which the demand is always greater than the supply, are yielding fair profits on many of the New England farms which had been neglected for years.

Staying on the Land

One of the most encouraging features of the present situation is that the broader distribution of the live-stock industry encourages farm-bred boys to remain at home. It has long been a popular belief that the attraction of the cities lies largely in the facilities for amusement which they offer; but the best class of young men who have left the farms have done so because they did not believe that plowing and sowing and reaping gave enough scope for their intelligence and their initiative. When stock-raising is combined with tillage, there is not only a greater interest in farm life and a greater chance to make general knowledge effective, but there are also better opportunities for a young man to make a small venture of his own while he is still a farm hand. It is certainly true that stock-raising needs the young man who is determined to know something about everything and all there is to know about one thing. To him the articles in the Britannica which are indicated in this chapter should be of the greatest value, for they cover a broad range, and they are written by specialists of the highest authority. They do not profess to teach what can only be learnt in the course of practical experience, but they will make each day’s work more interesting and more effective.

Cattle

You cannot do better than to begin your reading with the article (Vol. 4, p. 337) on the family of animals to which cattle belong, a family so varied that it includes so small a creature as the hare, and so large a one as the rhinoceros. The article Cattle (Vol. 5, p. 359), by Professor Wallace and Dr. Fream, begins by reminding you that the idea of cattle owning has always been so closely associated with the idea of wealth that the two words “capital” and “cattle” have the same root, and that our word “pecuniary” is taken from the Latin term for cattle. This article, illustrated with photographs of the best specimens of bulls and cows of different breeds, deals with Shorthorns, Herefords, Devons, Holsteins, Dutch Belteds, Sussexes, Longhorns, Aberdeen-Angus, Red Polleds, Galloways, Highlands, Kerry’s, Dexters, Jerseys and Guernseys, and has a section on the rearing of calves. Ox (Vol. 20, p. 398) is chiefly about the origin of domestic cattle. Agriculture (Vol. 1, p. 388) contains information of a more general kind as to practical stock-raising. The best methods of mating are described fully in Breeds and Breeding (Vol. 4, p. 487), Variation and Selection (Vol. 27, p. 906), and Heredity (Vol. 13, p. 350), by Dr. Chalmers Mitchell. Mendelism (Vol. 18, p. 115) will tell you all about the theory which is nowadays the great subject of discussion among experts in breeding. Embryology (Vol. 9, p. 314), by Dr. Hans Driesch, and Reproduction (Vol. 23, p. 116), by Professor Vines, contain the results of the latest investigations, and the article Sex (Vol. 24, p. 747) describes the recent experiments undertaken with the hope that breeders may at some future time be enabled to vary at will the proportion of males and females. Telegony (Vol. 26, p. 509) gives you the evidence for and against the belief that offspring are influenced by a previous mate of the dam. Food Preservation (Vol. 10, p. 612) and Refrigerating (Vol. 23, p. 30) cover the cold shipping and cold storage of beef. Leather (Vol. 16, p. 330), by Dr. J. G. Parker, one of the foremost 12technical experts on this subject, follows hides through the market to their final distribution and industrial uses.

Horses and Mules

Notwithstanding the harm that trolley cars and automobiles and mechanically propelled agricultural machines have done to important branches of the horse business, and notwithstanding the competition which American exporters find in Europe from the Argentine ranches, there is still an active market for farm horses and for stock suited to trucking and light delivery work in cities. You no doubt find, in whatever part of the United States your interests lie, that you need to watch the market very closely, and that you must always be ready to change your plans at short notice. But it is to the quick-witted man who is always prepared to vary his methods that the Britannica offers the greatest practical services. The article on the horse family in general (Vol. 9, p. 720) is very interesting, but you will give more time to the elaborate article Horse (Vol. 13, p. 712), by Richard Lyddeker, E. D. Brickwood, Sir William Flower, and Professor Wallace. The illustrations are unusually valuable, for instead of following the usual custom of making all the photographs the same size, the Editors of the Britannica showed good sense and originality by making each one to scale. The breeds are separately described, and the sections on feeding and breaking are full of useful hints. The history of the thoroughbred strain is carefully traced, the pedigree of one famous type being shown in a table naming more than one hundred ancestors. The article Horse-Racing (Vol. 13, p. 726), by Alfred Watson, shows how the sport has influenced breeding, and the description of American trotting goes back to the day when “Boston Blue,” in 1818, trotted a mile in three minutes, “a feat deemed impossible” at that period! The English race meetings, in which American owners and jockeys now play so conspicuous a part, are described in special sections, as well as the training at Newmarket. Riding (Vol. 23, p. 317), and Driving (Vol. 8, p. 585), are by practical experts, and Traction (Vol. 27, p. 118) contains an interesting table analyzing the draft power of the horse. The section on Arab horses in the article Arabia (Vol. 2, p. 261) should be read, for it adds to the information, in the articles already named, on the breed that has influenced every variety of horse. Mule (Vol. 18, p. 959) will tell you about the varieties not only in the United States and Mexico, but also in France, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Asia Minor, Syria, Egypt, Algeria and North China. The section on Hybrids (Vol. 13, p. 713) of the article Horse deals with all the attempts that have been made to get a perfect type of mule by introducing various strains of blood.

Sheep and the Wool Market

Sheep (Vol. 24, p. 817) contains separate descriptions of the 28 best breeds, discussing their values both for wool and for the meat trade. Breeding, feeding, dipping and lambing are fully treated. Sheepdogs and other breeds useful to the stock-raiser fall under the article Dog (Vol. 8, p. 374). Wool (Vol. 28, p. 805), by Professor Aldred Barker, is an article in which you will at once be impressed by the splendid thoroughness that is characteristic of the Britannica. It goes to the very foundation of the subject by giving you microscopic photographs, on a scale of 320 to 1, of each of the six great varieties of wool, and explaining the structure of the fibres. The article Fibres (Vol. 10, p. 309) will enable you to compare another microscopic photograph of wool fibre with similar pictures of silk, flax, cotton, jute, and other textile materials. The article wool deals next with wool-yolk and wool-fat, and then goes on to show why greasy wool is better than 13wool washed before shearing. Wool classing and sorting are next described, and then scouring. From this point the treatment of wool hardly comes within the jurisdiction of the sheep-man, although he cannot know too much about the qualities of the yarns obtained from different kinds of wool. It is interesting to note in this article that the first fulling mill in America was built at Rowley, Mass., in 1643, only thirty-four years after the first sheep was brought to America, and only twenty-three years after the Pilgrims landed on Plymouth Rock.

Pigs and Pork

The article Swine (Vol. 26, p. 236) deals with the swine family in general, and the article Pig (Vol. 21, p. 594), containing a fine full-page plate, gives a detailed account of the breeds most profitable on the farm, including the Poland-China, the Berkshire, the Duroc, and the Chester White. Eleven breeds in all are particularized. The breeding and fattening of hogs, although it is now successfully followed as a distinct branch of the live-stock industry, must always remain in great part a mere branch of general farming; for the pig’s power of thriving on many kinds of food, enables the farmer to utilize produce that cannot advantageously be shipped, and to keep his pigs following his cattle over the fields. Much information will be found all through the article Agriculture (Vol. 1, p. 388). Trichinosis (Vol. 27, p. 266) deals with a disease that has sometimes seriously affected the pork market, and been made the excuse, too, for some very harsh restrictions on American exportation.

Diseases and Parasites of Live-stock

You will find in the Britannica (Vol. 28, p. 6) a very full and clear account of the diseases of all domestic animals, by Dr. Fleming and Professor McQueen, with special sections on the maladies of the horse, of cattle, of sheep, and of pigs, and on the parasites that infest them. Tuberculosis (Vol. 27, p. 354) calls for special study, for it is a “disease of civilization” almost unknown among wild animals in their natural state and among the uncivilized races of mankind. The connection between the disease in cattle and its spread among human beings is fully explained in this article. Pleuro Pneumonia (Vol. 21, p. 838) deals with the lung disease from which cattle are the only sufferers, Rinderpest (Vol. 23, p. 348), with the infectious fever which affects both cattle and sheep, and Anthrax (Vol. 2, p. 106), with the terribly infectious carbuncles communicated from cattle and sheep to man by the microbes carried in wool and hides. Glanders (Vol. 12, p. 76) describes the form in which this disease of horses and mules afflicts human beings, the symptoms and course of which, in the animals themselves, fall under the subject of horse diseases (Vol. 28, p. 8). The microbe by which this disease is carried is shown in the plate facing one of the pages (Vol. 20, p. 770) of the article Parasitic Diseases. Foot and Mouth Disease (Vol. 10, p. 617) afflicts cattle, sheep, and pigs, and occasionally human beings.

Among the articles on continents and countries which contain special information on stock-raising, you should not miss the interesting general review of the European live-stock industry in the article Europe (Vol. 9, p. 914), the section on live-stock in Canada (Vol. 5, p. 153), that in Argentina (Vol. 2, p. 465), in Australia (Vol. 2, p. 950), and in New Zealand (Vol. 19, p. 627) The history of stock-raising is fully treated at the beginning of the article Agriculture (Vol. 1, p. 388).

How to “Even Up”

When you have read the articles mentioned in the three parts of this chapter on Farming, do not turn away with the idea that you have got from the 14Britannica all that it can give you to help you in your business. Remember that you have to judge men, as well as live-stock, in order to succeed, and that general knowledge is of the greatest use in doing that. The one sure sign of the kind of man you cannot rely upon is that he talks confidently about subjects of which he really knows little, and the more you yourself know, the more readily you can detect the pretentious people who might make you think too well of them.

If you turn over the pages of this guide, and ask yourself, as you glance at the chapters, in what departments of general knowledge you are weakest, you will see what courses of reading will do most to make you an “evened up” man, without any weak threads in your intellectual texture. And, whatever you read, do not forget that the Britannica is a book of reference as well as for reading: that you are debasing your mind every time you leave unanswered any question that comes up in the course of the day’s work or talk, or while you are reading your newspaper. A vigorous mind wants an answer whenever it becomes conscious of a question or of a doubt, and if you fail to feed it with the information it asks for, it loses health. Now that you have the Britannica, the food is in the store-room, do not leave it there!

[See list of articles on subjects connected with stock-raising and other branches of farming, at the end of Chapter III of this Guide.]

CHAPTER III
FOR DAIRY FARMERS

SEE ALSO CHAPTER I, FOR FARMERS, AND CHAPTER II, FOR STOCK-RAISERS

The admirable set of rules for dairy farmers issued by the United States Department of Agriculture begins by telling you to “read current literature and keep posted on new ideas.” And you can easily see that the information on dairy-farming and the many subjects connected with it, supplied by the Britannica, must cover a much broader field of new ideas than can be included in any periodical or dairying manual. The branches of science in which the greatest advance has been made since the beginning of the present century happen to be those that have most to do with dairying; and the industry itself has been completely revolutionized since the days when cities got their milk from ramshackle cow-sheds in their suburbs, and when butter-making was regarded as one of the “chores” to be done at odd times.

The key article in the Britannica, Dairy and Dairy Farming (Vol. 7, p. 737), deals with the best milking breeds, the installation, equipment, and management of a dairy farm, the values of various kinds of pasturage and fodder; with the milk trade, with butter-making and cheese-making, with condensed milk, skim milk, and milk powder and with the organization and operation of creameries, cheeseries, and dairy factories in general. Such subjects as soil, grass, hay and other fodder crops fall under Part I of this chapter, and the articles dealing with the breeding and rearing of dairy cattle are mentioned in Part II, “For Stock-Raisers.”

Dairy-Herd Diseases

15Cattle diseases in general are also covered by the course of reading suggested in Part II; but the dairy farmer has a special interest in contagious mammitis, milk fever, contagious abortion, and cowpox, all of which are described (Vol. 28, p. 10) in the article on Veterinary Science. You cannot study too carefully the article on Tuberculosis (Vol. 27, p. 354), for this terrible infection is not only a standing danger to your herd, but also affects the transportation and marketing of milk. Dr. Hennessy, who wrote the article, is an expert of the first rank and, like most other great authorities, is not inclined to encourage the popular exaggeration of the dangers for which newspaper “sensations” are responsible.

Milk and the Milk Market

You get to the very foundation of the supply of milk in Professor Parson’s and Dr. Edmund Owen’s article Mammary Gland (Vol. 17, p. 528), in which the comparative anatomy of the milk yielding organ is fully treated. The article Milk (Vol. 18, p. 451) discusses the chemistry of many kinds of milk and the diseases carried by milk, and deals with the gravest problems of the industry: the difficulty of sterilizing milk, so that tuberculosis and typhoid cannot be carried by it, and the difficulty of sterilizing cream, so that butter may be quite safe, without making the milk less nutritious and the butter less delicate in flavor. The article Bacteriology (Vol. 3, p. 156), by Professor H. Marshall Ward and Professor Blackman, goes to the root of this whole question of infection. Milk is, on the other hand, used to convey into the human system the “friendly microbes,” and the use of soured milk and cheese for this purpose is explained in the articles Therapeutics (Vol. 26, p. 800) and Longevity (Vol. 16, p. 977), which deal with Metchnikoff’s system of treatment. Pepsin (Vol. 21, p. 130) describes the process by which milk is rendered more digestible, and Infancy (Vol. 14, p. 513) deals with the preparation of milk to be sold for the use of young children. There is so general a demand for prepared milk which is from every point of view wholesome that you will find it worth while to read, in this connection, Food (Vol. 10, p. 611), Nutrition (Vol. 19, p. 920) and Dietetics (Vol. 8, p. 214).

Products and Marketing

Butter (Vol. 4, p. 889,) and Cheese (Vol. 6, p. 22) are brief articles which you should not overlook, although they refer you to the key and article on dairying for details; and Oils contains (Vol. 20, p. 47) an interesting analytical table in which butter is compared with other animal fats. Food Preservation (Vol. 10, p. 612) deals with the cold storage of butter, cheese, condensed milk and milk powder; and Refrigerating (Vol. 23, p. 30) with the processes and machinery employed. Koumiss (Vol. 15, p. 920) describes the milk-wine or milk-brandy prepared by fermenting mare’s milk, and the similar product “kerif” made from cow’s milk. Although the special developments of dairying in various parts of the world are discussed in the article Dairy and Dairy-Farming, the articles on individual countries also contain information of value. The section on dairying (Vol. 5, p. 154) in the article Canada, and the account of co-operative dairying (Vol. 7, p. 87) in Denmark should not be overlooked.

In reading these articles in Britannica, and thinking of the present conditions of this great business, you will be reminded that dairying is an industry of peculiar importance to the whole people of the United States, not only because of the money made out of it, and not only because it gives hundreds of thousands of men employment on the land instead of in crowded cities, but also because it 16promises to develop the co-operative action which harmonizes with the best ideals of democracy. The co-operative plants which are beginning to be established by dairy farmers are the only institutions our modern civilization has created in which you find the neighborly spirit that the first American settlers showed in the days when they joined to defend themselves against the Indians. At political meetings, in machine shops and cotton mills and shoe factories, you hear unhappy talk about the relations of capital and labor, about strikes and trusts, about the man on top and the man underneath. But where the farmer’s wagons clatter up to the separator platform, there is combination in the best sense of the word. The Britannica article on co-operation says that the word “in its widest usage, means the creed that life may best be ordered not by the competition of individuals, where each seeks the interest of himself and his family, but by mutual help, by each individual consciously striving for the good of the social body of which he forms part, and the social body in return caring for each individual; ‘each for all, and all for each’ is its accepted motto. Thus it proposes to replace among rational and moral things the struggle for existence by voluntary combination for life.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE BRITANNICA ON SUBJECTS CONNECTED WITH FARMING, STOCK-RAISING AND DAIRYING

(The more important articles have already been mentioned in the preceding pages, but the following list includes many others in which valuable information will be found.)
19

CHAPTER IV
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS: GENERAL AND INTRODUCTORY

Technical Education for Manufacturer and Merchant

The article on Technical Education in the new (Eleventh) Edition of the Encyclopædia Britannica (Vol. 26, p. 487), written by Philip Magnus, one of the greatest educational authorities in the world, says that:

“The widespread appreciation of the advantages of the higher education among all classes of the American people, and the general recognition among manufacturers, engineers and employers of labour, of the value to them in their own work, of the services of college-trained men, has largely helped to increase the number of students in attendance at the universities and technical institutions.”

A still broader truth is that the men who have learned to think clearly, by whatever study or reading they may have developed that power, possess the greatest of all advantages. As the Britannica article on Education indicates, the true value of education (not simply school education, but all education) lies as much in the influence which intelligently directed study exerts upon the mind as in the immediate usefulness of the information acquired, and the articles in the Britannica not only supply the most recent and authoritative information, but are so logically arranged, one dove-tailing into another, that they give the reader precisely that orderly view of knowledge which is the foundation of all mental training.

Since all of the series of chapters which immediately follow and which are intended for merchants and manufacturers, deal with commerce and manufactures, it will be for the reader’s convenience to begin by dealing with those two subjects in general. But certain branches of industrial and manufacturing knowledge are dealt with in special chapters. The articles on banking and finance are described fully in this Guide in the chapter For Bankers and Financiers, those on insurance in the chapter For Insurance Men, and those on law in the chapter For Lawyers. Three of the legal articles should, however, be mentioned here, as they are on especially important subjects: Sale of Goods (Vol. 24, p. 63), Company (Vol. 6, p. 795), which deals with the laws in various countries regulating corporations, and Employers’ Liability (Vol. 9, p. 356), on this topic so important in modern industrial law and in the relations between capital and labour.

Practical Economics for Practical Men

The broad questions of commercial and industrial policy are discussed in Economics (Vol. 8, p. 899), by Prof. Hewins; Commerce (Vol. 6, p. 766); Trusts (Vol. 27, p. 334); Monopoly (Vol. 18, p. 733), and Trade Organization (Vol. 27, p. 335), which describes commercial associations in the United States, the work of the consular service, and the organizations in Germany, France, Great 20Britain and other countries. Book-keeping (Vol. 4, p. 225), with its up-to-date account of modern accounting methods, card ledgers and loose leaf systems; Advertisement (Vol. 1, p. 235), and Mercantile Agencies (Vol. 18, p. 148) may be named as specimens of the many practical articles on business methods which need not all be enumerated here.

Imports and Exports

Much of what you read and hear about the tariff systems of the United States and various other countries and about their influence upon trade is so vague and confusing that you will be delighted with the group of clear, common-sense articles in the Britannica. Tariff (Vol. 26, p. 422) is by one of the most famous American economists, Prof. Taussig of Harvard, and is a very full and fair discussion of the points in controversy. Protection (Vol. 22, p. 464) is by Prof. James of the University of Illinois, and Free Trade (Vol. 11, p. 89) by William Cunningham. You should read with care Customs Duties (Vol. 7, p. 669); Free Ports (Vol. 11, p. 88), and Bounty (Vol. 4, p. 324). Balance of Trade (Vol. 3, p. 235) and Taxation (Vol. 26, p. 458) are both by Sir Robert Giffen. Exchange (Vol. 10, p. 50), by E. M. Harvey, a partner in one of the largest firms of bullion brokers in the world, deals with the movement of gold. Commercial Treaties (Vol. 6, p. 771) is by Sir C. M. Kennedy. Freights are discussed in Affreightment (Vol. 1, p. 302) by Sir Joseph Walton. Lien (Vol. 16, p. 594), with its section on “Stoppage in transitu,” is by F. W. Raikes; Salvage (Vol. 24, p. 97), by T. G. Carver, and Blockade (Vol. 4, p. 72), by Sir Thomas Barclay, the great international lawyer in Paris. Marine insurance, indemnity, Lloyds, and other insurance subjects fall under the chapter of this Guide For Insurance Men to which you should refer. Cargo-carrying and merchant shipping are further covered by Shipping (Vol. 24, p. 983). This article is by Douglas Owen, honorary secretary and treasurer of the Society of National Research, and author of Ports and Docks; it contains information about the great freight carrying lines of the world that can be found in no other book. Railroad freighting is covered by the article Railways (Vol. 22, p. 819), in which there is a special section (p. 854b) on the new models of American freight cars.

Manufacturing and Consuming Nations

In the article United States, which contains more matter than a whole book of ordinary size and more information than a dozen ordinary books, the sections (Vol. 27, p. 639) on manufactures and on foreign and domestic commerce, are by F. S. Philbrick, Ph.D. The internal commerce of the United States, as this article states, is in itself greater than the total international commerce of the world, and is so far from exhausting the country’s power of production and consumption, that even when coastwise traffic is disregarded, New York is the most active port in the world. A section (Vol. 9, p. 916) of the article Europe deals with European commerce in general. The articles on the great manufacturing towns of Europe contain much information as to industries. Great Britain’s industries are dealt with in the article United Kingdom (Vol. 27, p. 691). The industries of England alone are separately treated in a section (Vol. 9, p. 426) of the article England. Germany’s industries are the subject of sections (Vol. 11, p. 811) of the article Germany; and it is interesting to note that although Germany has outranked France in cotton manufactures since Mülhausen, Colmar and other important milling centres of Alsace became German, France has retorted by 21overtaking and passing Germany in the production of linen. The sections (Vol. 10, p. 785) on foreign commerce in the article France show her position as in the main a self-supporting country, though only a fourth of the cargoes loaded and discharged in French ports are carried under the French flag. It would be a waste of space to enumerate here the articles on Belgium, Switzerland, Italy and other countries, which you will consult in relation to those of their exports in which you are especially interested; but you should not overlook the article on Japan. The Britannica has done commerce a great service in giving to the world at last a good account of this extraordinary country.

The body of the article Japan (Vol. 15, p. 156) is by Capt. Brinkley, long editor of the Japan Mail, whose opportunities of seeing Japanese life from the inside have been greater than those of any other foreign observer. Baron Dairoku Kikuchi, President of the Imperial University of Kyoto, a statesman of great experience and authority, contributes to the article a section (Vol. 15, p. 273) dealing with Japan’s international position. His remarks upon the commercial morality of the Japanese are so ingenuous and so candid that an extract from them cannot be omitted:

Now when foreign trade was first opened, it was naturally not firms with long-established credit and methods that first ventured upon the new field of business—some few that did failed owing to their want of experience—it was rather enterprising and adventurous spirits with little capital or credit who eagerly flocked to the newly opened ports to try their fortune. It was not to be expected that all or most of those should be very scrupulous in their dealings with the foreigners; the majority of those adventurers failed, while a few of the abler men, generally those who believed in and practised honesty as the best policy, succeeded and came to occupy an honourable position as business men.... Commerce and trade are now regarded as highly honourable professions, merchants and business men occupy the highest social positions, several of them having been lately raised to the peerage, and are as honourable a set of men as can be met anywhere. It is, however, to be regretted that in introducing Western business methods, it has not been quite possible to exclude some of their evils, such as promotion of swindling companies, tampering with members of legislature, and so forth.

The account (Vol. 15, p. 201) by Capt. Brinkley of the curious system of creating branches of Japanese business houses is another part of this article which should not be overlooked.

Mill Labour

The proportion of labour cost to the total cost of production is in most industries so great that you cannot study too carefully every aspect of the labour question. The chief articles are Labour Legislation (Vol. 16, p. 7), jointly written by the late Dr. Carroll D. Wright, the great American authority on the subject, and Miss A. M. Anderson, Principal Lady Inspector of Factories to the British government; Trades Union (Vol. 27, p. 140); Strikes and Lockouts (Vol. 25, p. 1024); Wages (Vol. 28, p. 229), by Prof. J. S. Nicholson; Profit Sharing (Vol. 22, p. 423), by Aneurin Williams and Apprenticeship (Vol. 2, p. 228), by J. S. Ballin. The article Employers’ Liability (Vol. 9, p. 356), has already been mentioned.

22

CHAPTER V
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF TEXTILES

Practical Men Among the Contributors

The Course of Reading outlined in this chapter will help anyone who has to do with the making or with the buying and selling of textiles, in three ways, at least, each of the greatest importance to him—and possibly in many more. Taking up these three:—In the first place, it will teach him many facts about manufacturing and merchandizing in general, and about dry goods in particular, that he could learn nowhere else, because the scope of the Britannica is broader than that of any other book—or, for that matter, than the scope of any collegiate course can well be. In the second place, the number of distinguished men who have devoted their exclusive attention to the subjects upon which they write, and have given to the Britannica the results of their research and of their experience as practical experts—in many cases, indeed, as successful business men—is far greater than the number of men who form the faculty of any university in the world. The fifteen hundred contributors in fact include no less than 704 connected with the staffs of 151 different universities, technological and commercial institutes and colleges in twenty countries. The reader thus gets the benefit of contact with the thought of many, of varied, and always of authoritative, personalities. In the third place, the textile trade is peculiarly an international trade, the raw materials often traveling from one end of the world to the other before manufacture, and making as long a journey in the finished form, before they reach the consumer, and the international character of the Britannica gives equal weight to the articles which deal with the textiles and with the markets of all countries—a statement which it would certainly not be safe to make about any other book.

Textile Fibres and their Treatment

The article Fibers (Vol. 10, p. 309), by C. F. Cross, whose name has been much before the public in connection with the recent scientific investigation of the subject, compares the fibres yielded by all the vegetable and animal substances used in textiles. The 18 microscopic photographs on the full page plates (facing pp. 310 and 311) and the table of vegetable fibres (p. 311) should be carefully studied. Cellulose (Vol. 5, p. 606) deals with the “body” of cotton, flax, hemp and jute fibres. Carding (Vol. 5, p. 324) deals with the brushing and combing of fibres. Spinning (Vol. 25, p. 685) covers both cotton and linen, and it is curious to note from this article that in preparing yarns for the exquisite Dacca muslins one pound of cotton has been spun into a thread 252 miles long; while the article Dacca says that a piece 15 feet by 3 was once woven that weighed only 900 grains. Yarn (Vol. 28, p. 906) deals with cotton, 23woollen and silk yarns. Weaving (Vol. 28, p. 440), by Prof. T. W. Fox, author of Mechanics of Weaving, and Alan Cole, is the first article you should read in a group dealing with processes applied to more than one material. The first section is on the various combinations of warp and weft, and contains 23 illustrations showing the chief weaving “schemes.” A section on weaving machinery follows, and then one on weaving as an art, illustrated with a number of reproductions of famous specimens of hand-loom work. The whole article is full of practical every-day information of the kind the merchant and manufacturer wants to know. Bleaching (Vol. 4, p. 49) describes the chemical processes which have expedited the bleaching of cotton, wool, linen and silk, which it used to take all summer to complete. Dyeing (Vol. 8, p. 744), by Prof. Hummel, author of The Dyeing of Textile Fabrics, and Prof. Knecht, author of A Manual of Dyeing, is another of the thorough articles which entitle the Britannica to rank as a great original work on textiles. Every dye is separately treated, and the latest models of dyeing machinery are carefully described. Finishing (Vol. 10, p. 378) deals with the processes used for cotton, woollens, worsteds, pile fabrics, silks and yarns. Textile-Printing (Vol. 26, p. 694) is by Prof. Knecht and Alan Cole, author of Ornament in European Silks, and not only describes all the styles of printing, but gives sixty recipes for various shades of colour. The full page plates reproduce fine specimens of early printing. The art of textile-printing “is very ancient, probably originating in the East. It has been practised in China and India from time immemorial, and the Chinese, at least, are known to have made use of engraved wood-blocks many centuries before any kind of printing was known in Europe.”

Cotton and Cotton Fabrics

The elaborate article Cotton (Vol. 7, p. 256) begins by discussing the peculiar twist of the hairs on the cotton seed which by facilitating spinning gives cotton its predominant position as a textile material. The section on cultivation, by W. G. Freeman, deals with the soils, bedding, planting, hoeing and picking, then with ginning and baling. A section on diseases and pests of the cotton plant follows, then a discussion of the improvement of yield by seed selection. The section on marketing and supply is by Prof. Chapman, and his practical study of “futures,” “options,” and “straddles” shows how greatly the movement of prices is affected by speculation and often by artificial manipulation.

Cotton Manufacturing (Vol. 7, p. 281) describes the industry in England, that of the United States, with a special section on the recent developments in the two Carolinas, Georgia and Alabama, and also the mills in Germany, France, Russia, Switzerland, Italy and in other countries, including India, China and Japan. It is interesting to note (p. 293) that “Americans were making vast strides in industrial efficiency even before the period when American theories and American enterprise were monopolizing in a wonderful degree the attention of the business world” abroad. As far back as 1875 progress in the United States was so rapid that the production for each operative had increased during the ten years 1865–75, by 100% in Massachusetts as against only 23% in England. One explanation of American success is that the American employer “tries to save in labour but not in wages, if a generalization may be ventured. The good workman gets high pay, but he is kept at tasks requiring his powers and is not suffered to waste his time doing the work of unskilled or boy labour.”

Cotton Spinning Machinery (Vol. 7, p. 301) describes all the machines in great detail and contains a number of 24full-page plates and other illustrations. Mercerizing (Vol. 18, p. 150) is another important article.

Wool, Linen and Silk

Wool, Worsted and Woollen Manufactures (Vol. 28, p. 805) is by Prof. Aldred F. Barker. The development in wool production of various countries is first described and then the wool fibre is studied and microscopic photographs reproduced to show the structure of different varieties. A diagram of a fleece shows the qualities obtained from various parts of the animal, ranging from the shoulders, where the finest is found, to the hind quarters. Lamb, hogg and wether wools are compared and the article discusses shearing, classing, sorting, scouring, drying, teasing, burring, mule spinning, combing, drawing and spinning. The centres of the industry are then compared, with details as to the special products of each. The article contains illustrations of a number of machines. Articles dealing with certain sources of wool or of the wool-like hair used in textiles, and with the finished products, are: Alpaca (Vol. 1, p. 721), the history of its manufacture being “one of the romances of commerce;” Mohair (Vol. 18, p. 647), which deals with the hair of the Angora goat, familiar from discussions of the Underwood Tariff bill, and dealing with its weaving and the imitations of the cloth; Llama (Vol. 16, p. 827); and the articles Guanaco (Vol. 12, p. 649) and Vicugna (Vol. 28, p. 47), on the two wild animals from whose hair high priced materials, extraordinarily warm and light, are woven.

Flax (Vol. 10, p. 484) describes the cultivation of the crops which are harvested by being “pulled,” roots and all, instead of being cut, the process of separating the capsules from the branches, and the subsequent stages of preparation. Linen and Linen Manufactures (Vol. 16, p. 724), by Thomas Woodhouse, takes up the story where the flax fibre is ready for market and carries it to the point where the yarn is delivered for weaving. The winding, warping, dressing and beaming, and the looms employed, are virtually the same processes and machines that are used for cotton. The article states that the finest linen threads used for lace are produced by Belgian hand spinners who can only get the desired results by working in damp cellars, the spinner being guided by touch alone, as the filament is too fine for him to see. This thread is said to have been sold for as much as $72 an ounce.

Jute (Vol. 15, p. 603) deals with the vegetable fibre which ranks, in its industrial importance, next after cotton and flax and with the processes employed in its manufacture.

Silk (Vol. 25, p. 96) contains illustrations of cocoons and worms, microscopic photographs of fibre, and pictures of the moths which produce wild silk. The section on the fibre and its production and preparation is by Frank Warner, president of the Silk Association of Great Britain and Ireland; and that on the silk trade by Arthur Mellor, a well known manufacturer of Macclesfield, the great British center. The degree of fineness to which silk thread can be spun is stated (Vol. 28, p. 906) to be such that 450,000 yards of thread have been produced from one pound of silk, and this is slightly in excess of the fineness of the Dacca cotton thread already mentioned as producing 252 miles for a pound. But at Cambrai the lace maker’s linen thread already described has been made as fine as 272 miles to the pound, and the drawing of platinum wire to the fifty-thousandth part of an inch in thickness (Vol. 28, p. 738) seems hardly more wonderful than this. Spider silk is as valuable as the best qualities of the silkworm product, but spiders are such fierce cannibals that it is necessary to keep each one in a separate cage, and the cost of doing this has prevented the fibre from being 25generally used (Vol. 25, p. 664). Artificial or “viscose” silk is described in the article Cellulose (Vol. 5, p. 609), and is a textile of which the importance is rapidly increasing.

Felting is an even older textile process than weaving, just as weaving, which no doubt originated in basket making (Vol. 3, p. 481) is older than spinning. The article Felt (Vol. 10, p. 245) deals with asphalted felts used for roofing as well as with the hat felts; and the article Hat (Vol. 13, p. 60) gives further details as to both woollen and fur felts and describes the machinery for hatmaking, which originated in the United States.

Save that gold, silver and other metals are occasionally used in cloth or gauze, Asbestos (Vol. 2, p. 714) is the only mineral employed in textiles, and its value for jacketing steam pipes and boilers and for insulating fabrics and fireproofing gives it great importance. Ramie (Vol. 22, p. 875) is not so largely used in textiles, but experiments in the production of better fibre are being made.

Shoddy (Vol. 24, p. 992) is an article which shows how unfair it is to treat the re-manufacture of “devilled” fabric as an illegitimate if not absolutely fraudulent branch of the textile industry, for really serviceable cloths are woven from it, and masses of poor people who would otherwise be in rags are thus comfortably clad. “Mungo,” another re-manufactured cloth, is described (Vol. 28, p. 906) in the article Yarn. Pine-apple fibre is described (Vol. 10, p. 311) as of exceptional fineness and is used in yarn cloths of the best quality. The article Pine-apple (Vol. 21, p. 625) describes its culture. Sisal Hemp (Vol. 25, p. 158) is used in bagging as well as cordage, and the same is true of Phormium (Vol. 21, p. 471), sometimes called New Zealand flax. Paper pulp yields a yarn which is used in some cheap fabrics as described (Vol. 5, p. 609) in the article Cellulose already mentioned.

Textile Merchandise

The many varieties of woven cloths are described in the articles already mentioned in the manufacture of cotton, linen, wool, and silk, and in articles on special fabrics. Hosiery (Vol. 13, p. 788) covers the textiles that are produced by knitting or looping, and gives an account, with illustrations, of the machinery employed. Net (Vol. 19, p. 412) covers the textiles of which the mesh is knotted.

Lace (Vol. 16, p. 37), by Alan Cole, contains some of the most beautiful full-page plates and other illustrations to be found in the Britannica, and is a very full treatise on the history and the present state of the lacemaking art.

Flannel (Vol. 10, p. 480) describes the true flannels made from wool, and Flannelette (Vol. 10, p. 481) the cotton imitations and the new fire-resisting fabrics of this class. Drill (Vol. 8, p. 580) covers both the cotton and linen tissues sold under this name. Crepe (Vol. 7, p. 379) mentions the curious fact that the Chinese and Japanese makers of soft crepe guard their secret processes, which are still unknown to western manufacturers, so carefully that the different stages of their production are carried on in towns far distant from one another.

Carpet (Vol. 5, p. 392) contains full-page plates of rare specimens and describes pile carpets, flat-surfaced carpets and the printed carpetings.

Tapestry (Vol. 26, p. 403) deals with another luxurious branch of the textile industry, and is illustrated with photographs of the finest specimens and with pictures showing the methods of weaving. Brocade (Vol. 4, p. 620) describes and illustrates this stately class of fabrics. Embroidery (Vol. 9, p. 309) with six full-page plates and Shawl (Vol. 24, p. 814) deal with other art textiles.

Tartan (Vol. 26, p. 431) describes the colours and patterns of all Scottish 26clan tartans. Damask (Vol. 7, p. 785) discusses this fine class of fabrics, the weaving of which is the subject of a special section (Vol. 28, p. 454) of the article Weaving. The enormous consumption of coarse bags for the packing of raw cotton and of sugar gives importance to the articles Bagging (Vol. 3, p. 200) and Sacking and Sack Manufacture (Vol. 23, p. 975). Canvas (Vol. 5, p. 223) discusses sail cloth and artists’ canvas, and Tarpaulin (Vol. 26, p. 430) deals with waterproof covers.

The Seventy Articles on Special Fabrics

It is unnecessary to describe one by one the seventy articles on other fabrics and tissues, ranging through the alphabet from Alpaca to Velveteen; but they are all included in the list at the end of this chapter, and all are fully described in the Britannica. Costume (Vol. 7, p. 224) is a long and important article, with a full page plate and many other illustrations. The section on dress in general is by T. A. Joyce, of the British Museum staff, that on ancient costumes by H. S. Jones, director of the British School at Rome, and that on modern costume by Oswald Barron, editor of The Ancestor. The account of underclothing is of especial interest, as most books on costume altogether neglect this branch of the subject. Another section of this article is on national and official costumes by W. Alison Phillips, principal assistant editor of the Britannica. The study of ceremonial robes is carried into further detail by the article Robe (Vol. 23, p. 408), with its five richly colored plates, in one of which the judicial robes of the U. S. Supreme Court Justices are shown. Liturgical vestments are dealt with in Vestments (Vol. 28, p. 27) and in a series of articles such as Dalmatic (Vol. 7, p. 776) and Alb (Vol. 1, p. 497).

Inventors of Textile Machinery and Great Textile Merchants

Among the biographies which are of interest in connection with textiles are those of Arkwright, Richard (Vol. 2, p. 556), the barber who invented the spinning frame; Cartwright, Edmund, (Vol. 5, p. 425), inventor of the power loom; Crompton, Samuel (Vol. 7, p. 486), inventor of the spinning mule; Salt, Titus (Vol. 23, p. 87), who created the alpaca industry; Strutt, Jedediah (Vol. 25, p. 1044), who did much to perfect the manufacture of cotton; and of Whitney, Eli (Vol. 28, p. 611), who went from Yale to Savannah to secure a position as school teacher and then, being disappointed, turned his attention to a device for separating the cotton fibre from the seeds and refuse, and invented the gin which has “profoundly influenced American industrial economic and social history.” Another name of a great American inventor who individually rendered great services to the textile industry is that of Howe, Elias (Vol. 13, p. 835), who invented the sewing machine. You will also be interested in the lives of successful merchants such as Canynges, William (Vol. 5, p. 223), the great 15th Century cloth manufacturer who became a clergyman after making a large fortune; Mackintosh, Charles (Vol. 17, p. 250), who introduced lightweight waterproof garments; Wanamaker, John (Vol. 28, p. 302), who began life as an errand boy in a book store; Field, Marshall (Vol. 10, p. 322), who when Chicago was a comparatively unimportant city founded there what has become the finest dry goods store in the world; Stewart, A. T. (Vol. 25, p. 912), who after studying for the ministry in Dublin, immigrated to New York and gradually built up the largest retail store in the city; Pease, Edward (Vol. 21, p. 31), founder of a famous Quaker family of textile manufacturers in England; and Claflin, H. B. (Vol. 6, p. 418), who came from Worcester, Mass., to New York where he for years controlled “the greatest mercantile business in the world.” 27If you turn to the Article Worcester (Vol. 28, p. 823) you will note the associations of the locality with Elias Howe, Eli Whitney, Samuel Crompton, already mentioned, L. J. Knowles, another inventor who helped to perfect the power loom, and Erastus Bigelow, who invented the carpet-weaving machine (Vol. 6, p. 530) and was one of the incorporators of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Other lives of successful textile makers and dealers are those of Rylands, John (Vol. 23, p. 950), founder of the largest cotton mills in Lancashire; Dexter, Timothy (Vol. 8, p. 141), the eccentric New England merchant of the 18th Century who beat his wife for not weeping heartily enough at the rehearsal of his funeral; Horrocks, John (Vol. 13, p. 712), the great English cotton manufacturer who was far ahead of his time and died of brain fever produced by overwork in 1804; Worth, C. F. (Vol. 28, p. 834), the famous Paris dressmaker who began life as a London draper’s apprentice; Whitely, William (Vol. 28, p. 605), “the Universal Provider,” of London; and Tata, J. N. (Vol. 26, p. 448), the great Parsee textile manufacturer.

A LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL ARTICLES IN THE BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF TEXTILE GOODS

28

CHAPTER VI
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF MACHINERY

A Change in Public Opinion

An appreciation of the science of mechanical engineering is so indispensable to the manufacture and sale of machinery that the reader of this Guide might simply have been referred to the chapter For Engineers as covering the industry, if it were not that the Britannica contains (as the list at the end of this chapter shows) a great number of articles dealing with individual machines. The amount of space which the new Britannica devotes to mechanical subjects, and the great number of expert contributors whose collaboration was enlisted in this connection, are significant from more than one point of view. All other general encyclopaedias, including earlier editions of the Britannica itself, seem to have been influenced by the old-fashioned fetish of “pure” scholarship and “pure” science, treating theory as a subject of study much more dignified than the application of knowledge to the practical affairs of life. Until recent days the great universities of such important manufacturing countries as England, Germany and France were almost exclusively devoted to the teaching of philosophy, history, Greek and Latin, mathematics and pure or natural science. The older universities of the United States, too, were for a long time reluctant to recognize the growing importance of technical education, and the necessity, apart from technical education, of giving the general student some knowledge of mechanics. And it is a significant fact that the Britannica, the first encyclopaedia that has ever been published by a university, should be, although it comes from one of the oldest of all universities, the first to give full recognition to the importance of this department of knowledge.

Men in the machinery trade will welcome this change of attitude in the Britannica, not because they crave a public acknowledgment of the great share of the world’s work that they are doing, but because public ignorance of mechanical subjects results in the abuse of machines and in unreasonable complaints against manufacturers when improperly used machinery fails to do its work. A curious illustration of the general disregard of the subject is supplied by the fact—as true of the United States as of England, Germany or France—that representative government is, in practice, chiefly government by lawyers, and that in this age of machinery it is the exception to find in the cabinet which directs the affairs of any country, a single member who has any knowledge of mechanics. The same ignorance is conspicuous in newspaper offices. Even the most dignified dailies seem unable to deal with any news that has to do with machinery without making ridiculous blunders.

Influence of Automobiles

Fortunately, the automobile is beginning to stimulate interest in practical mechanics, for no one can attempt to drive his own car, or even to obtain proper service from his chauffeur and from garage workmen, without realizing that he failed, at school, to learn some of the most useful of lessons. Before long the 29authorities responsible for our public schools may realize that it is absolute barbarism to neglect mechanical teaching as they do; and the new Britannica is already doing good service in stimulating public interest in the subject.

An examination of the articles mentioned in detail in the following summary, and a glance at the long list of articles at the end of the chapter, will show the comprehensiveness with which the Britannica treats all types of machinery. The materials employed are, logically, the first subjects upon which information will be desired.

Iron and Steel (Vol. 14, p. 801), by Professor H. M. Howe of Columbia University, is a mine of information about the properties and uses of the different varieties of the indispensable metal of which 50,000,000 tons per annum are employed. In the manufacture of electrical apparatus Copper (Vol. 7, p. 102) is largely employed, and for this reason alone the article has great value for the manufacturer. Almost as important is Alloys (Vol. 1, p. 704). Its chief author, Sir William Chandler Roberts-Austen, is the greatest living authority on alloys, and it is full of interesting facts about new admixtures.

The processes of Annealing, Hardening and Tempering are described in J. G. Horner’s article under that title (Vol. 2, p. 70). This authority explains clearly the difference between hardening and tempering and gives valuable advice as to the most efficient methods of hardening. Founding (Vol. 10, p. 743), also by J. G. Horner, is fully illustrated, and the question of the highest economies of machine moulding are among the practical matters considered. Forging (Vol. 10, p. 663), with 19 illustrations, discusses fullering, swaging, upsetting, bending, welding, pinching, cutting-off, and die-forging. There is also a separate article, Welding (Vol. 28), in which the section on Electric Welding is written by Elihu Thomson, who invented the process. A table of energy used in electric welding is added. See also Brazing and Soldering (Vol. 4, p. 463).

Manufacturing Methods

The designer of machinery will find much practical information in Drawing, Drawing Office Work (Vol. 8, p. 556), and Sun-Copying (Vol. 26, p. 93). It is a remarkable fact that prints identical in scale with the originals are now made up to a length of 22 feet.

Bearings (Vol. 3, p. 578), illustrated, is written by Professor Dalby of the South Kensington Central Technical College. The article Tool (Vol. 27, p. 14), by J. G. Horner, is 33 pages in length and has 79 illustrations. The whole subject is completely covered. In the section on Machine Tools are discussed turning lathes, reciprocating machines, machines with drill and bore holes, milling machines, machines for cutting the teeth of gear wheels, grinding machinery, sawing machines, shearing and punching machines, hammers and presses, portable tools, appliances, wood-working machines, and measurement. In regard to the last subject great advances have lately been made. A thousandth of an inch is now considered a coarse dimension in the machine shop, where gauges within one five-thousandth of an inch are often used. This article is an invaluable manual for the machine-shop, and supplies many hints which should be given to workmen, for, to use the author’s words, “a clumsy workman is as much out of place in a modern machine-shop as he would be in a watch-factory.” Another article useful to the mechanic is Screw (Vol. 24, p. 477), with 10 illustrations, by J. G. Horner, with a section on the Errors of Screws, by the late Henry A. Rowland, the American physicist, whose skill, shown in the construction of dividing engines of extraordinary precision and delicacy, made him famous the world over. See also Graduation (Vol. 12, p. 312).

Engines and Motors

30The articles on the prime-movers are an important and noteworthy part of the new Britannica. Professor Ewing, of Cambridge University, contributes Air Engine (Vol. 1, p. 443) and Steam Engine (Vol. 25, p. 818), both fully illustrated. The latter has a most interesting preliminary historical account of engines from the aeolipile of Hero of Alexandria (about 130 B.C.) to the steam-turbine, the most modern type of all. The newest forms of internal combustion motors, Oil Engine (Vol. 20, p. 35) and Gas Engine (Vol. 11, p. 495), are described by Dugald Clerk, inventor of the Clerk cycle gas engine, and the articles are fully illustrated. Under Hydraulics (Vol. 14, p. 91) will be found complete information as to the construction of water-pressure engines, water-wheels, turbines, and also pumps. The article is written by Professor W. C. Unwin, and has been universally declared to be the best treatise on the subject that has yet appeared. There is a separate illustrated article Water-Motors (Vol. 28, p. 382), by Professor Beare of Edinburgh University. See also Windmill (Vol. 28, p. 710).

Designers and constructors of electrical machinery will be greatly interested in C. C. Hawkins’ illustrated article Dynamo (Vol. 8, p. 764), which explains fully how the dynamo is constructed and gives its history from Faraday’s discovery of the principle in 1831. Dr. Louis Bell, of the General Electric Co., writes on Motors, Electric (Vol. 18, p. 910).

Machinery for Special Purposes

In hundreds of articles on manufacturing and manufactured products there are excellent descriptions of the machinery employed. Cotton-Spinning Machinery (Vol. 7, p. 301), by Professor Fox, of Manchester University, gives details, with illustrations, of the modern systems of spinning, all founded on the inventions of Paul, Arkwright, Hargreaves and Crompton, while an historical account of primitive machines as well as much practical information, will be found under Spinning (Vol. 25, p. 685). Weaving has a section Weaving Machinery (Vol. 28, p. 443). An account of the special machinery and appliances used in the manufacture of woollens is included in Professor Barker’s illustrated article Wool, Worsted and Woollen Manufactures (Vol. 28, p. 805). In Hosiery (Vol. 13, p. 788) we learn about framework knitting and warp-knitting machines. It is recorded that up to the middle of the 19th century only a flat web could be knitted, and that a circular knitting machine of American origin is the type of machine on which is produced the seamless hosiery of to-day. This was introduced by J. W. Lamb in 1863. Rope and Rope Making (Vol. 23, p. 713), by Thomas Woodhouse, of the Dundee Technical College, is richly illustrated with pictures of the most modern type of machinery for the manufacture of fibre and wire ropes. The various machines and apparatus for sugar making are carefully described in Sugar, Sugar Manufacture (Vol. 26, p. 35). For milling machinery see Flour and Flour Manufacture (Vol. 10, p. 548), by George F. Zimmer, author of Mechanical Handling of Material. The latest designs in agricultural machines, with illustrations, as well as a history of their development, will be found under Plough and Ploughing (Vol. 21, p. 850), Sowing (Vol. 25, p. 523), Harrow (Vol. 13, p. 27), Reaping (Vol. 22, p. 944), Thrashing (Vol. 26, p. 887), etc. It is a matter of interest that the first successful reaping-machine was invented by a Scotch clergyman in 1826. For machinery used in the modern dairy see Dairy and Dairy Products (Vol. 7, p. 750). The germ of the sewing machine dates back to 1755, and the whole story of its development is told in Sewing Machines (Vol. 24, p. 744). |A Vast Encyclopaedia of Machinery| The descriptions of machinery of various kinds are continued 31under such headings as Brewing, Brewing Operations (Vol. 4, p. 506), illustrated; Bellows and Blowing Machines (Vol. 3, p. 705), illustrated; Pin (Vol. 21, p. 615); Needle (Vol. 19, p. 338); Typography, Modern Practical Typography (Vol. 27, p. 542), illustrated; Printing (Vol. 22, p. 350), illustrated; Bookbinding, Modern Methods (Vol. 4, p. 218), illustrated; Textile Printing (Vol. 26, p. 694); Alkali Manufacture (Vol. 1, p. 674), illustrated; Refrigerating and Ice Making (Vol. 23, p. 30); Silk, Silk Manufacture (Vol. 25, p. 102); Lace, Machine-made Lace (Vol. 16, p. 44), illustrated; Carpet, Modern Machinery (Vol. 5, p. 396); Leather (Vol. 16, p. 330), illustrated; Bicycle (Vol. 3, p. 913), illustrated; Typewriter (Vol. 27, p. 501), illustrated; Dredge and Dredging (Vol. 8, p. 562), illustrated; and Paper, Paper Manufacture (Vol. 20, p. 727), illustrated.

Biographies of many inventors, designers and builders of machines are included in the list of articles at the end of the chapter For Engineers in this Guide, and are therefore omitted in the following alphabetical summary.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL MACHINES AND APPLIANCES DESCRIBED IN THE BRITANNICA AND GENERAL SUBJECTS AND ARTICLES ON MACHINERY

33

CHAPTER VII
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF METALS, HARDWARE, GLASS AND CHINA

Elisée Reclus, the great French student of the origins of civilization, says, in the Britannica article Fire (Vol. 10, p. 399), that “human culture may be said to have begun with fire, of which the uses increased in the same ratio as culture itself.” The industries grouped in the present chapter all depend upon the curiously diverse effects of heat; the softening and tempering of metals, the hardening of clay and the changes by which sand becomes glass. It is for the reader himself to decide whether he wishes to begin his course of reading by a study of the article Heat (Vol. 13, p. 135), and the allied articles to which it refers, and thus to understand how temperature plays its dominant part in the most useful of manufacturing processes.

Knowledge in “Layers”

It is, indeed, one of the most attractive features of the Britannica that it presents knowledge in layers. In text-books, the theoretical and practical aspects of an industry are so interwoven that you cannot separate them. But in the Britannica, if you desire only to examine the finished products of any branch of industry, as you might see them and hear them described at an exhibition or in a manufacturer’s sample room, you can turn to articles and sections of articles in which critical comment and elaborate illustrations put clearly before you the varieties of, for example, plated ware, china or glass. Proceeding to the next “layer,” you find technical information about the manufacture of these and all other goods; you have been permitted to pass from the sample room into the factory, which is not usually so easy of access. And in the scientific articles you arrive at the very substratum and foundation of knowledge; you have what the experts in the factory could not give you if they would: the clear teaching that only the great masters of science can supply.

The manufacturer, of course, absolutely needs to know all that can be learned about the origin of his materials and the principles upon which his processes are based. But the dealer, in his turn, will be a shrewder buyer, a more convincing salesman and a better manager of the salesmen under him, if he knows the whole history of his wares, of the ingredients that enter into their composition and of their manufacture. Factory experience is hardly more universal among wholesale men, most of whom begin as clerks, than among retailers, and it is impossible for a business man who has got his foot fairly on the ladder to drop his work and go through an apprenticeship or take a thorough course at a technical college. If, however, he will for a few months devote his spare time to the studies he can pursue, unaided, in the Britannica, the insight he obtains 34will give a new value to all the knowledge he picks up in the course of his business.

Physics and Chemistry
Some of the Authorities

The departments of physics and physical chemistry are of course those in which the Britannica’s scientific contents especially interest those to whom this chapter is addressed, and the authority of the Britannica in those departments of knowledge is shown by a very striking fact. You may remember that Alfred Nobel, the great Swedish chemist, who made a fortune by the invention and manufacture of dynamite, devoted $9,000,000 to the establishment of the annual Nobel prizes, to be awarded, irrespective of nationality, for eminence in scientific research and in the cause of peace. In physics and chemistry, Britannica contributors have won, in eleven years, seven of these prizes, these winners being: in 1901, Prof. J. H. van’t Hoff, of the University of Berlin; in 1902, Prof. Lorentz, of the University of Leiden; in 1904, Lord Rayleigh, Chancellor of the University of Cambridge; in 1906, Sir J. J. Thomson, of the University of Cambridge; in 1909, Prof. Ostwald, of the University of Leipzig; in 1911, Prof. Van der Waals, of the University of Amsterdam. In other words, you find that the scientific committee who award the Nobel prizes select for these unique distinctions the same men whom the editor of the Britannica selected as contributors. Now apply another test, in connection with the subject matter of this chapter. What is, by general consent, the most exquisitely finished product of any of the industries under discussion in the present section? To this question there can be but one answer: Optical glass. Where is the best glass made? At the Zeiss Works in Jena, Germany. Very well, Dr. Otto Henker and Dr. Eppenstein, both of the scientific staff of the Zeiss Works, wrote the optical articles in the Britannica which deal with the lens and with aberration in lenses. You should therefore remember, in reading the Britannica, that whether you are only going as far as the uppermost layer of knowledge, or reaching down to the very foundations of science, the men whose articles you are reading command the respect that you can pay to them by giving your very closest attention. Do not imagine that because the book contains forty-four million words, it is made to be skimmed; every article in it is condensed; and you cannot derive the fullest benefit from your reading unless you feel, as you would feel if you were fortunate enough to be brought into personal contact with any of these great men, that you have a privilege of which you must make the most.

Metals

Other chapters of this Guide also deal in detail with the scientific side of the industries mentioned here; and in examining the groups of industrial articles, those dealing with metals claim first consideration. The article Metal (Vol. 18, p. 198) is devoted to classification only, and would not occupy more than ten pages of this Guide. It contains information as to the physical properties of the metals, including a table in which the specific gravity of each of 42 metals is stated, a table of comparative ductility under the hammer, for rolling and for wire drawing, a table of elasticities, and other tables showing the ratio of expansion under heat, the melting and boiling points, and the relative thermic and electric conductivity. A section is devoted to the action of chemical agents upon the simple metals.

Metallurgy (Vol. 18, p. 203), and Electrometallurgy (Vol. 9, p. 232), by W. G. McMillan, lecturer on metallurgy at Mason College, Birmingham, deal with all the methods of smelting ores. Your next reading should be the great article Iron and Steel (Vol. 14, p. 801), by Prof. H. M. Howe, of Columbia University, 35containing as much matter as would fill 110 pages of this Guide. At the beginning of this article Prof. Howe disposes of the much discussed question as to the true distinction between iron and steel, as to which there has been great confusion. Before 1860, the word “steel” was never applied to a metal that could not be hardened by tempering. But when the invention of the Bessemer and open-hearth processes introduced a new class of iron, “which lacked the essential property of steel, the hardening power, yet differed from the existing forms of wrought iron in freedom from slag,” the men interested in the new product did not like to call it “wrought iron,” which is what it really is, because that name would confuse it with a lower-priced grade of metal. They ought to have coined a new word for it, but they appropriated the name of steel—so that to-day “steel” means either true steel or the low-carbon, slagless variety of malleable iron. The article is divided into 133 sections, so that to analyze its contents would swamp this chapter of the Guide, but the reader will find in it the clearest and most authoritative account of the industry which has yet been published.

Among articles on the commercial metals are Copper (Vol. 7, p. 102), Lead (Vol. 16, p. 314), Tin (Vol. 26, p. 995), Zinc (Vol. 28, p. 981), Aluminium (Vol. 1, p. 767), Nickel (Vol. 19, p. 658), Antimony (Vol. 2, p. 127), and, on the precious metals, Gold (Vol. 12, p. 192), Silver (Vol. 25, p. 112), and Platinum (Vol. 21, p. 805).

The article Alloys, of which Sir W. C. Roberts-Austen, long chemist of the London Mint, is the chief contributor, with its photomicrographic illustrations, contains not only an account of the alloys already generally used in the metal industries, but also practical information as to the experiments which have been made recently with some of the newly discovered rare earths. In the article Metallography (Vol. 18, p. 202), by the same specialist, the microscopic examination and photography of metals and alloys is described.

Among articles on the metallic compounds are Brass (Vol. 4, p. 433), in which “Dutch metal,” “Mannheim gold,” “similor” and “pinchbeck” are described; Bronze (Vol. 4, p. 639), which deals with steel bronze, phosphor bronze, and other combinations; Fusible Metal (Vol. 11, p. 369) is an important compound. Pewter (Vol. 21, p. 338), by Malcolm Bell, author of Pewter Plate, etc., is of historical interest, and of value to the dealer or collector, while he who wishes to distinguish between the older and the more modern electroplated ware is referred to the article Sheffield Plate (Vol. 24, p. 824), also by Malcolm Bell. Electroplating (Vol. 9, p. 237) describes the art that put an end to the Sheffield plate industry. Other methods of coating metals are given under Galvanized Iron (Vol. 11, p. 428), Tin Plate and Terne Plate (Vol. 26, p. 1000), and Gilding (Vol. 12, p. 13). The art of making gold-leaf is described in Goldbeating (Vol. 12, p. 202).

In regard to manufacturing processes there are the separate articles: Forging (Vol. 10, p. 663), with 19 illustrations; Founding (Vol. 10, p. 743), with 11 illustrations; Annealing, Hardening and Tempering (Vol. 2, p. 70), and Brazing and Soldering (Vol. 4, p. 463). These four articles are by J. G. Horner. And see Welding (Vol. 28, p. 500), also by Mr. Horner, with a section on Electro-Welding, by Elihu Thomson, inventor of the process of electric welding and expert for the General Electric Co. The article Tool (Vol. 27, p. 14), another of Mr. Horner’s valuable contributions, has 79 illustrations and possesses special interest for the manufacturer of metal-ware as well as the dealer in hardware.

Metal-Ware

Coming now to the production of metal wares, the article Metal-Work (Vol. 18, p. 205), beautifully illustrated, is the work of three noted experts. The late 36J. H. Middleton, Slade Professor of Fine Art, Cambridge University, writes on Methods of Manipulation in Metal Work and tells of the metal work of Greece, Italy, Spain, Germany, France, England, Persia and Damascus. J. S. Gardner, an expert metal worker, deals with Modern Art Metal Work, and J. G. Horner contributes the section on Industrial Metal Working, in which he deals with Plater’s Work, Coppersmith’s Work, Raised Work, Cast Work, Methods of Union and Protection of Surfaces. In connection with the last mentioned subject, see also Japanning (Vol. 15, p. 275), Lacquer (Vol. 16, p. 53), and Painter-Work (Vol. 20, p. 457). Further information about lacquering, with valuable formulas, will be found in the article Japan (Vol. 15, p. 188). Some of the ornamental forms of metal work are described in Repoussé (Vol. 23, p. 108), by M. H. Spielmann, formerly editor of The Magazine of Art; Inlaying (Vol. 14, p. 574), and Damascening (Vol. 7, p. 783). See also Grille (Vol. 12, p. 596).

Plate (Vol. 21, p. 789), an article by H. R. Hall, of the British Museum, H. Stuart Jones, director of the British School at Rome, and E. A. Jones, author of Old English Gold Plate, etc., is a concise, complete hand-book on work in silver and gold of any class other than those of personal ornaments and coins. It is profusely illustrated with plates and text-cuts, showing many exquisite models; and the reader can master the details of style in different periods and countries. The subjects of the assay of gold and silver plate and hall-marks are discussed, the former being treated more fully in Assaying (Vol. 2, p. 776), by A. A. Blair, chief chemist of the U. S. Geological Survey. The article Roman Art, by H. Stuart Jones, has a section devoted to Work in Precious Metals (Vol. 23, p. 483).

Cutlery (Vol. 7, p. 671) is one of the articles pertaining specifically to hardware manufacture and trade, in which general processes of manufacture are described; and of allied interest are Knife (Vol. 15, p. 850), Fork (Vol. 10, p. 666), Spoon (Vol. 25, p. 733), Scissors (Vol. 24, p. 407), Shears (Vol. 24, p. 815), Razor (Vol. 22, p. 937), Chafing-Dish (Vol. 5, p. 800), Nail (Vol. 19, p. 153), Axe (Vol. 3, p. 67), Hammer (Vol. 12, p. 897), Chisel (Vol. 6, p. 247), Wire (Vol. 28, p. 738), and Barbed Wire (Vol. 3, p. 384). Articles describing all forms of agricultural implements will be found under their respective headings.

Glassware

Glass (Vol. 12, p. 86) is most complete in its consideration of the entire subject. The introductory section by H. J. Powell, of the Whitefriars Glass Works, London, author of Glass Making, and W. Rosenhain, of the National Physical Laboratory, London, deals with the manufacture of optical glass, blown glass and mechanically-pressed glass. The necessary qualities of each kind are stated and the newest processes of manufacture described, with full information about materials. The second part of the article is devoted to the History of Glass Manufacture, by Mr. Powell and Alexander Nesbitt, who wrote the well-known Introduction to the South Kensington Museum Catalogue of Glass Vessels. Egyptian, Assyrian, Roman, Venetian, Bohemian and Oriental glass, as well as the modern types, are exhaustively described. The article is splendidly illustrated. Drinking Vessels (Vol. 8, p. 580), by Dr. Charles H. Read, of the British Museum, describes old forms of glass cups and goblets. It is most valuable for its information in regard to styles of different countries and periods, and the illustrations show many types.

Stained glass is the subject of the separate article Glass, Stained (Vol. 12, p. 105), illustrated, by the late Lewis F. Day, author of Windows, a Book about Stained Glass. It is both historical and descriptive in its nature, deals with 37painted and stained glass, contains a table of examples of important historical stained glass, and treats of the latest progress in the art, including the productions of La Farge and L. C. Tiffany in this country. The art of fitting and setting of glass is described in Glazing (Vol. 12, p. 116), illustrated, by James Bartlett. Here we learn about the setting of window glass, the use of glass in decoration, systems of roof glazing and the use of wire glass.

Full information about glass for optical purposes will be found under Lens (Vol. 16, p. 421), illustrated, by Dr. Otto Henker, of the Carl Zeiss Factory, Jena, Germany; Lighthouse, Optical Apparatus (Vol. 16, p. 633), illustrated, by W. T. Douglass, who erected the Eddystone and Bishop Rock lighthouses, and Nicholas G. Gedye, chief engineer to the Tyne Improvement Commission; Telescope, Instruments (Vol. 26, p. 561), illustrated, by H. Dennis Taylor and Sir David Gill; Photography, Photographic Objectives or Lenses (Vol. 21, p. 507), illustrated, by James Waterhouse; Spectacles (Vol. 25, p. 617).

Chinaware, Pottery and Porcelain

To those engaged in the china ware, pottery or porcelain manufacture and trade, the great article Ceramics (Vol. 5, p. 703) will prove a revelation. It is the joint product of a number of experts, both practical and artistic, including William Burton, chairman, Joint Committee of Pottery Manufacturers of Great Britain, Henry R. H. Hall and Robert Lockhart Hobson, both of the British Museum, and A. Van de Put and Bernard Rackham, both of the Victoria and Albert Museum. It is 85,000 words in length and contains over a hundred beautiful illustrations, including six plates in colour. It deals fully with the artistic and economic phases of the subject, the methods of manufacture, the different varieties of ceramics, their history, decoration, etc. Japanese ceramics are treated separately in Japan, Ceramics (Vol. 15, p. 183), illustrated, by the late Capt. Frank Brinkley.

Clay (Vol. 6, p. 472), by Dr. J. S. Flett, describes the occurrence, composition and properties of the various clays used in ceramics.

Terracotta (Vol. 26, p. 653), illustrated, by William Burton and H. B. Walters, of the British Museum, deals with the artistic use to which baked clay is put, while Tile (Vol. 26, p. 971), illustrated, also by William Burton, has great practical value for the present-day manufacturer.

Kaolin (Vol. 15, p. 672), by F. W. Rudler, of the Museum of Practical Geology, London, deals specifically with china clay and its preparation for the market. Gilding (Vol. 12, p. 13) contains material on the subject of the gilding of pottery and porcelain, and Painting has a section Painting with Coloured Vitreous Pastes (Vol. 20, p. 484), by Prof. G. B. Brown, of Edinburgh University, which describes the use of these pastes in ceramics. Enamel (Vol. 9, p. 362), illustrated, by Alexander Fisher, yields equally valuable information for those concerned with the decoration of china.

In Mural Decoration, by Walter Crane and William Morris, there is a section devoted to Wall-Linings of Glazed Brick or Tiles (Vol. 19, p. 17). Material of great archaeological interest relating to earthenware, etc., will be found in such articles as Aegean Civilization (Vol. 1, p. 245), illustrated, by D. G. Hogarth, of the Ashmolean Museum, Oxford; Crete, Archaeology (Vol. 7, p. 421), illustrated, by Arthur J. Evans, the famous Cretan explorer, and Greek Art (Vol. 12, p. 470), illustrated, by Percy Gardner, the classical archaeologist.

The following is a partial list in alphabetical order of articles and subjects in this field treated in the Britannica.

38

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES AND SUBJECTS IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO THOSE IN METAL, HARDWARE, GLASS AND CHINA MANUFACTURE AND TRADE

CHAPTER VIII
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF FURNITURE

Art and Industry

When you think of your home, making a picture in your mind of the familiar surroundings associated in your memory with your greatest pleasures, you are really thinking of furniture. Tradition makes the dwelling itself the tangible symbol of home, because when a primitive tribe ceased to be wanderers, the walls that excluded wild beasts and inclement weather and gave privacy were conspicuous evidences of a change for the better. But in our higher civilization our way of thinking has changed. Nothing seems to us more desolate than the bleak surfaces and harsh angles of an unfurnished house. Colour and softness and the curved lines which we instinctively love because they suggest softness come into the dwelling with furniture, and culture has progressed so far that the chair or bed must be a delight to the eye as well as to the weary limbs, that the dinner table and the bookcase must be so designed as to enhance the satisfaction we find in refreshing body and mind. You would not get so much pleasure as you do from your Encyclopaedia Britannica if its paper and print and pictures and the colour and texture of the bindings did not make it one of the chief adornments of your home; the volumes might be just as useful in a less pleasing guise, but you would not feel the same affection for the book.

Form and Embellishment

To satisfy the spirit of home-love and house-pride in the making of furniture is an art, and the idea that furniture can only be artistic when it is made by hand, from a design that is to be used but once, is as nonsensical as it would be to say that a beautiful etching is not true art because a press produces it and others like it. “Fine art is everything which man does or makes in one way rather than another ... in order to express and arouse emotion ... with results independent of direct utility.” These words from Sir Sidney Colvin’s delightful Britannica article Fine Arts (Vol. 10, p. 361), and another passage (p. 370), in which he speaks of “the artificers who produce wares primarily for use, in a form, or with embellishments, that have the secondary virtue of giving pleasure,” might well be quoted to the supercilious and superficial critic who condemns every product which machinery has brought within the reach of the less fortunately situated. Furniture, made in one form rather than another, because that one form gives greater pleasure, is artistic furniture whether it is made of machined pine chemically stained or of handworked and hand-polished rosewood. The manufacturer and dealer who ingeniously minimize the cost of production and distribution are benefiting the public just as truly as did Thomas Chippendale, “at once an artist and a prosperous man of business,” or Thomas Sheraton, “the great artistic genius who 40lived in chronic poverty.” The adaptation and variation of their ideas, under modern conditions of manufacture, have given pleasure to tens of thousands for every one whose home was enriched by the original products.

Related Subjects

We have, then, in the furniture business, the combination of an art with an industry of the most practical and useful kind, and this art is one which does more than any other to “express and arouse” the home-cherishing emotions which solidify family life. The principles which underlie architecture, sculpture, painting, metal work, embroidery and the weaving of patterns all affect the design of furniture, since its contours and surfaces are obtained by the application of the structural and decorative laws of all of them, and it might therefore be said that the only course of reading in the Britannica which could fully justify the title of this chapter would be one which covered all these diverse fields. The reader can, however, with the assistance of other chapters of this Guide, easily find his way to the Britannica’s articles on each of these allied subjects, and an indication of the articles dealing specifically with furniture will at any rate serve his primary purpose.

“Art Nouveau” School

The keystone article Furniture (Vol. 11, p. 363) is by James Penderel-Brodhurst, one of the greatest of living authorities, to whom many of the subsidiary articles are also due. The 37 illustrations on plate paper include two large views of the most famous and resplendent piece of furniture ever constructed, the cylinder desk, now in the Louvre Museum in Paris, made for Louis XV by a number of “artist-artificers,” the chief among them Oeben and Riesener, with bronze mounts by Duplessis, Winant and Hervieux. The article explains the scanty attention paid to furniture in ancient Egypt, Rome and Greece, and throughout the Middle Ages in Western Europe, as due to the routine of life in centuries during which people spent their days in the open air, and went to bed as soon as it was dark, therefore needing but few household appliances. The Renaissance was the first era of sumptuous and elaborately varied furniture; and it was not until the 18th century that the art of the cabinet-maker was fully developed. The English periods of Queen Anne and early Georgian craftsmanship and the reigns of Louis XV and Louis XVI brought the development to its high-water-mark. Since then, there has been no really new departure except the “art nouveau” school, which professed to be free from all traditions and to seek inspiration from nature alone. The revolution which was thus attempted was not successful, and the permanent influence of the movement will, in all probability, be less notable for its effect upon style than for the very great service it rendered in reviving the use of oak. Lightly polished, fumed or waxed, this wood, which was so long neglected, is the most effective that can be employed at moderate cost.

Beds

The oldest and most indispensable of all furnishings is treated in the article Bed (Vol. 3, p. 612). The Egyptians had high bedsteads to which they ascended by steps, and the Assyrians, Medes and Persians followed the same custom. The Greek bed had a wooden frame, with a board at the head, and bands of hide laced across, upon which skins were laid. At a later period, as vase-paintings show, the Greeks used folding beds. Another ancient application of an idea commonly supposed to be of modern origin is found in the Roman use of bronze beds, and metal is so much more sanitary than wood for this purpose that it seems strange it was afterwards discarded for many centuries. The bed of the Emperor Eliogabalus was of solid silver, 41with counterpane and hangings of purple embroidered in gold. In Pompeii wall-niches for beds, like those still used in Holland, are found, and were apparently closed by sliding partitions as well as by curtains. To our modern ideas, this arrangement seems to have been disgustingly devoid of ventilation, but the four-poster, with its “tester” roof and its curtains, which was widely used until the middle of the 19th century, was not much better. Mattresses developed very slowly, for in the 18th century pea-shucks and straw were the stuffing materials employed in houses of prosperous people, and hair had not come into use. The article gives a full and interesting account of the quaint custom, instituted by Louis XI of France, and followed by many of his royal successors, of a sovereign remaining in bed while he received the visits of his ministers and courtiers.

Chests and Chairs

The chair, to us the commonest of objects, did not come into general use until, as the articles Bench (Vol. 3, p. 715) and Stool (Vol. 25, p. 967) indicate, these two had long been the usual seats. The Chest (Vol. 6, p. 106) was also used as a seat, and was the original form of wardrobe before hanging space and drawers were provided. The ecclesiastical chests, of great length in order that they might contain, without folding, church vestments stiff with embroidery, are the most ornate of all the models of furniture which have been preserved from the 13th and 14th centuries. The article Chair (Vol. 5, p. 801) shows that chairs were everywhere uncommon until the middle of the 16th century; and it was not until the 17th was well advanced that upholstery began to be employed for them. The typical Louis XVI chair, with its oval back and ample seat, descending arms, round-reeded legs and gay tapestry was the most beautiful and elaborate model that has ever been devised. But it was the original Chippendale design and the still lighter patterns of Hepplewhite, Sheraton and Adam that gave us the slender, compact and easily moved chairs which will always be the more numerous. It is interesting to observe that the revolving chair, commonly regarded as an office convenience of modern origin, has a pedigree of no less than four centuries.

Bookcases and Desks

It would seem that the old English makers of furniture went somewhat astray when they gave themselves the general designation, still surviving, of “cabinet-makers”; for we learn from the article Cabinet (Vol. 4, p. 918) that the elaborate cabinets which have come down to us from the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries are almost invariably of Italian, Dutch and French origin, and it was in other branches of work that the English were most successful. The Cupboard (Vol. 7, p. 634) was used to contain books long before the Bookcase (Vol. 4, p. 221) had assumed a distinct form, and in the earlier bookcases the volumes were either placed on their sides, or, if upright, were ranged with their backs to the wall and their edges outwards. Until printing had cheapened books, it was not the custom to mark the title on the back, and the band of leather which closed the volume, like the strap on an old-fashioned wallet, bore the inscription. Sheraton’s satinwood bookcases were among the most elegant of all his pieces. The Desk (Vol. 8, p. 95) about the year 1750 had assumed the form which is now described as a library table—a flat top with a set of drawers on each side of the writer’s knees, when its vogue was interrupted by the invention of the cylinder-top desk. At first the cover was a solid piece of curved wood, but the “tambour,” or series of slats mounted on canvas proved more serviceable; and the American roll-top desk is now exported to all parts of the world. Other articles dealing with individual pieces of furniture 42are Wardrobe (Vol. 28, p. 323), Sideboard (Vol. 25, p. 38), Dresser (Vol. 8, p. 577), Cheffonier (Vol. 6, p. 22), Cradle (Vol. 7, p. 360), Buffet (Vol. 4, p. 757), and Mirror (Vol. 18, p. 575).

Technical Articles

Of the more technical articles Timber (Vol. 26, p. 978) shows the comparative advantages of all the varieties of wood used for furniture; and, as the list at the end of this chapter shows, there is a separate article on each kind. Tool (Vol. 27, p. 14), by J. G. Horner, is of great importance. It would fill 75 pages of this Guide, and contains 79 illustrations. The furniture maker will find in it complete information about all the hand tools and machine tools used in the industry. Joinery (Vol. 15, p. 476), by James Bartlett, describes, with practical diagrams, every variety of joint and dovetail. Sound guidance for the workshop will be found in Glue (Vol. 12, p. 143), Painter-Work (Vol. 20, p. 457), Lac (Vol. 16, p. 35), Lacquer (Vol. 16, p. 53), in regard to which there is also information in the article Japan (Vol. 15, p. 188), French Polish (Vol. 11, p. 154), Weaving, Industrial Technology (Vol. 28, p. 440), Dyeing (Vol. 8, p. 744), by Profs. J. J. Hummel and Edmund Knecht; Rep (Vol. 23, p. 105), Tapestry (Vol. 26, p. 403), with numerous illustrations, by A. S. Cole; Silk, Manufacture (Vol. 25, p. 102); Plush (Vol. 21, p. 857), Velvet (Vol. 27, p. 979), Marble (Vol. 17, p. 676), by J. S. Flett; Onyx (Vol. 20, p. 118); and Alabaster (Vol. 1, p. 466).

Decoration and Ornament
Biographical Articles

Although wood, ivory, precious stones, bronze, silver and gold have been used from antiquity for the decorations of furniture, the modern maker will be more concerned with Wood-Carving (Vol. 28, p. 791), illustrated, by F. A. Crallan, author of Gothic Wood-carving. In this article materials and methods are described, and there is much information as to the domestic use of wood-carving. The article will be most valuable to manufacturers and dealers who have to do with church fittings. Gilding (Vol. 12, p. 13) and Carving and Gilding (Vol. 5, p. 438) impart knowledge of a practical nature as to these processes. The art of inlaying is described in Marquetry (Vol. 17, p. 751) and Bombay Furniture (Vol. 4, p. 185); see also Veneer (Vol. 27, p. 982). Materials other than wood used for inlaying are described, as, for example, Pearl (Vol. 21, p. 25) for pearl and mother of pearl; Ivory (Vol. 15, p. 92), Lapis Lazuli (Vol. 16, p. 199), Tortoiseshell (Vol. 27, p. 71), Brass (Vol. 4, p. 433), etc. The mention of the last two materials naturally suggests the name of Boulle and the Britannica’s biography of that artist. Such biographies, as anyone interested in the subject knows, are most difficult to find, and they are included in much detail in the new Britannica. Boulle (Vol. 4, p. 321) was the most distinguished of modern cabinet-makers before the middle of the 18th century; and, beginning with that date, both France and England produced a number of men whose renown is scarcely less than that of the great painters, sculptors, architects or musicians of the period. The Britannica’s accounts of their lives, ideas and work will be of much value and interest to those who make or deal in furniture. For the French schools we get the essential facts about, for example, Oeben (Vol. 20, p. 11), to whom Louis XV’s famous desk owes its general plan; Riesener (Vol. 23, p. 324), his more celebrated pupil, who completed the desk; Röntgen, David (Vol. 23, p. 693), the maker of “harlequin furniture,” several of whose ingenious mechanical devices are described; and Gouthière (Vol. 12, p. 291), the metal-worker whose furniture mounts are among the most noted art products of the Louis XV and XVI periods. Chippendale (Vol. 6, p. 237), 43with whom arose the marvellously brilliant school of English cabinet-makers, is the subject of a biography describing fully the characteristics of his designs; and the history of this school is continued under such headings as Hepplewhite (Vol. 13, p. 305), whose taste at its best “was so fine and so full of distinction, so simple, modest and sufficient that it amounted to genius”; Adam, Robert (Vol. 1, p. 172), who left so deep and enduring a mark upon English furniture, and Sheraton (Vol. 24, p. 841), “the most remarkable man in the history of English furniture,” whose extravagant creations marked the end of the great school. Many other biographies are included in the list appended.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES, INCLUDING BIOGRAPHIES, IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA WHICH ARE OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO FURNITURE MANUFACTURERS AND DEALERS

44

CHAPTER IX
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF LEATHER AND LEATHER GOODS

The purpose of the department of the Guide in which this chapter appears, addressed to persons engaged in certain important occupations, is not only to show them how Britannica-reading will enlarge their knowledge of some aspects and relations of their business, but also to show how Britannica-reading will help them to realize the importance of educating the general public in regard to that business. This education of the public is not necessarily confined to advertising, although the best form of advertising that can be used by anyone who sells a good article, or an article that is good at its price, is probably to tell the public what it really is and how it is really made. In the direct personal intercourse between salesman and purchaser there is opportunity for the imparting of information which, if it possesses genuine interest, will be gladly received and will stimulate trade. Mere praise of an article is uninteresting and unconvincing; while facts that explain why that article is adapted to a particular use, and why it is better than another article sold at a lower price will always receive attention.

About Selling Leather Goods

All this is especially true of leather goods, for the public ignorance on the subject of leather is abysmal. Nothing is more universally used, yet ninety-nine out of a hundred who use it not only do not know what lies beneath the surface of it, but do not know that there is any difference in value between a natural grain surface and a mechanically grained false surface, and it is quite certain that nearly all the men and women who walk out of a store after buying skiver would be nonplussed if they were asked whether the upper or lower part of a split skin was the best.

Both the leather merchant and the public would be delighted to hear some of the curious things that the Britannica tells about leather, which is, from any point of view, one of the most interesting of all commodities; although few of those who use it, and perhaps as few of those who deal in it, ever stop to think how curious a relation there is between the original nature of the material and the qualities of the finished product. In cattle and sheep, the hide is a garment that covers every part of the body but the feet. Adapted to our own use, its most important service as a garment is to cover our feet. It is so far a natural product that no imitation of it possesses any of its chief merits, and yet so far an artificial product that when the hide has been removed from an animal, it requires treatment in order that it may not lose the flexibility which makes it, for a thousand purposes, more valuable than wood or metal, and in order that it may not decay.

What Skin Is

Skin is waterproof because its surface consists of scales, and although in most quadrupeds, as in man, these scales are so small as to be invisible, they will so resist the entrance of any tan liquor or other preservative fluid that they must be scraped away before the skin can be treated. Under these horny scales there is a layer of soft cells, and under this a membrane which makes the natural grain surface of leather. Under this, again, lies the “true” skin, in 45In the upper of these two, the white fibres lie parallel with the grain. In the lower, the white fibres, which are here coarser, lie in bundles, bound together by yellow fibres, so that this layer is really a woven fabric. The spaces in the weave are filled with a soft jelly, and the fibres do not multiply among themselves, as cells do, but are developed, as they are needed, from this jelly. Tan liquor has the peculiar property of converting this jelly into a “leathery” substance, which although it does not then assume the shape of fibres, becomes nearly as tough as the fibres themselves, and thus makes leather more solid and stronger than the original skin; and the virtue of leather depends largely on the presence of this jelly. |Naturally Woven Fibres| two layers. The body of an old bull will have absorbed it, just as fat is absorbed in old age, so that the spaces in the weave of the fibre are left vacant, and (as the scaly outer surface of the skin has been scraped away to admit the tan liquor) any water with which the hide comes into contact will be soaked up. That is why old bull leather is not waterproof and is lacking in substance. Again, the weave of this innermost layer of skin, lying next to the flesh, varies in different animals. In sheepskin the fibres are very loosely woven, and for this reason great care is needed in preparing the leather, and when the skin is split, the under half is only fit for the light usage to which “chamois” leather is restricted. But however the quality, surface or thickness of the skin may differ, its true structure is the same in all animals used for leather, save the horse, which is exceptional in possessing, over the loins, a third skin, very closely woven and very greasy, which makes horsehide taken from this part of the body peculiarly waterproof, pliable and durable.

As you are in the leather business, you probably knew all these facts already, but perhaps they were not arranged in your mind in a form in which you could explain them to others as clearly as you will be able to do after reading the articles in the Britannica from which this general statement is summarized. And when you are reading about any other business, or about any other subject of any kind, you will find that the Britannica goes to the root of the subject in the same thorough way in which it deals with the fibres and the jelly that make up the substance of leather. Now for the articles in detail—or the principal ones; the others are sufficiently indicated by the list at the end of this chapter.

Skin (Vol. 25, p. 188), by Dr. F. G. Parsons, vice-president of the Anatomical Society of Great Britain and Ireland, with illustrations from microscopic enlargements, covers the comparative anatomy of the skin in all groups of animals, and the process of skin development in the embryo. The articles mentioned in the chapter For Stock-Raisers tell you about the domestic animals whose hides are chiefly used for leather. The chapter on Zoology in this Guide gives a list of the articles on the other animals whose skins are tanned for fancy leathers. The main article Leather (Vol. 16, p. 330), equivalent to 50 pages of this Guide, is by Dr. James G. Parker, principal of the Leathersellers’ Technical College, London, and author of Principles of Tanning and other standard trade text-books. After explaining the distinctions between tanned, tawed, and chamoised leathers, it takes up the subject of sources and qualities of hides and skins, and describes the structure of skin in relation to the finished product. The characteristics and peculiarities of hides and skins from different parts of the world are thoroughly explained. We learn why hides from animals bred in mountainous districts are the best, and where the finest sheep- and goat-skins come from.

Processes of Tanning

Tanning Materials is the subject of the next section. These are classified into pyrogallols, catechols, and subsidiary materials; 46and the article describes their composition and preparation by grinding, with explicit directions for their testing, including the latest official method of the International Association of Leather Trades Chemists. The processes of making heavy leathers are next discussed. We learn the many ways of cleaning, softening, depilating, and fellmongering (or dewooling) by liming, rounding and scudding, and finally the process of actual tanning in its three steps of colouring, handling, and laying away. In connection with depilation, it is interesting to note that it has been discovered that it is not the lime but the action of bacteria in the lime which causes the hair to fall out. The finishing of sole leather, harness leather and other grades is explained, also the theory of the formation of the “bloom” and its removal, as well as the process of “scouring.” The art of Currying has a section to itself, and the preparations for tanning or dressing hides for trunks and suit cases by bating, puering, scudding, plumping, drenching and splitting, receive detailed attention. The tanning of light leathers, and all the varieties of basils, skivers, Russia leather, seal, alligator, snake, frog and kangaroo leathers, Japan and enamel leathers are fully treated. Tawing, Wooling, Dressing, Chrome Tanning, Combination Tannages, Oil Tanning (Chamoising), Preller’s Helvetia or Crown Leather, Transparent Leather, Parchment, Tar and Peat Tanning, Dyeing, Staining and Finishing, Glove Leathers, and Bookbinding Leathers are some of the other sections of this excellent treatise. Leather, Artificial (Vol. 16, p. 345) is a separate article.

Chemistry of Leather Manufacture

Tannin, or Tannic Acid (Vol. 26, p. 399) is a general account of the vegetable products which have the property of converting raw hide into leather. Specific information about the materials from which the pyrogallol tannins are obtained will be found under Myrobalans (Vol. 19, p. 114), Chestnut (Vol. 6, p. 112), Dividivi (Vol. 8, p. 332), Sumach (Vol. 26, p. 70), Oak (Vol. 19, p. 931), Galls (Vol. 11, p. 422) a full and interesting account of the insect produced vegetable excrescence which yields a high percentage of tannin, by Francis H. Butler, of the Royal School of Mines; and Willow (Vol. 28, p. 688). For the catechol tannins see Hemlock (Vol. 13, p. 262), Catechu (Vol. 5, p. 507), Mangrove (Vol. 17, p. 572), Mimosa (Vol. 18, p. 500), Larch (Vol. 16, p. 211), Birch (Vol. 3, p. 958), which yields the empyreumatic oil used in the preparation of Russia leather, to which the pleasant odor is due.

There are numerous articles in the Britannica on the chemicals used in the process of tawing, chrome tanning, etc., such as Alum (Vol. 1, p. 766), Acetic Acid (Vol. 1, p. 135), Glauber’s Salt (Vol. 12, p. 114), Bichromates and Chromates (Vol. 3, p. 912).

Dyeing

The chief classes of dyes used for leather are the acid; basic, or tannic; direct, or cotton; and mordant dyes, and these are described at great length in a valuable article Dyeing (Vol. 8, p. 744), equivalent to 20 pages of this Guide, by the late J. J. Hummel, professor of Dyeing, University of Leeds, and Dr. Edmund Knecht, professor of Technological Chemistry, University of Manchester. The section on the Theory of Dyeing shows how the dyeing property of a substance depends upon its chemical composition. Separate articles go more deeply into the chemistry of dyeing materials used with leather, and some of the more important of these are Sulphonic Acids (Vol. 26, p. 60), Sulphuric Acid (Vol. 26, p. 65), Formic Acid (Vol. 10, p. 668), Antimony (Vol. 2, p. 127), Titanium (Vol. 26, p. 1017), Iron (Vol. 14, p. 796), Logwood (Vol. 16, p. 922), Fustic (Vol. 11, p. 375), Brazil Wood (Vol. 4, p. 463), 47and Tumeric (Vol. 27, p. 474). Comparatively few of the coal-tar colours have as yet been adapted to leather manufacture, but their characteristics are discussed in such articles as Azo-Compounds (Vol. 3, p. 81), Aniline (Vol. 2, p. 47), Indulines (Vol. 14, p. 507), Fuchsine (Vol. 11, p. 273), and Safranine (Vol. 23, p. 1000).

Special Leathers

Parchment (Vol. 20, p. 798), by Sir E. Maunde Thompson, Principal Librarian, British Museum, is an interesting historical account of the skins and their preparation. Their use as writing material was widespread at a very early period. “The Jews made use of them,” says the article “for their sacred books, and it may be presumed for other literature also; and the old tradition has been maintained down to our own day, requiring the Synagogue rolls to be inscribed on this time-honoured material.” The difference between parchment and vellum is explained. Shagreen (Vol. 24, p. 769) tells about a species of untanned leather used for ornamental purposes. It is a curious fact that the addition of the word “chagrin,” for anxiety or annoyance, to the English language was due to the unpleasant sensation that came from touching the rasping surface of this leather. Stamped leather for wall hangings is described in the section Stamped Leather of the article Mural Decoration (Vol. 19, p. 19), by William Morris and Walter Crane. Shoe (Vol. 24, p. 992) contains an illustrated section on the Manufacture of Leather Shoes. Saddlery and Harness (Vol. 23, p. 988), by Cecil Weatherly, and Glove (Vol. 12, p. 135) are treated both from an historical and a practical point of view. Bookbinding (Vol. 4, p. 216), illustrated, by C. J. H. Davenport, of the British Museum, has a great deal of interesting information about the leathers used in this art. The flexible binding, which has been applied for the first time on a large scale in the new Britannica, originated when vellum instead of paper was used for books, and it possesses the great advantage that a volume sewed in this way can be opened flat, and lies flat without being held.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES AND OF SUBJECTS IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO THOSE IN THE MANUFACTURE AND SALE OF LEATHER AND LEATHER GOODS

CHAPTER X
FOR JEWELLERS, CLOCK AND WATCH MAKERS AND MERCHANTS

By long established custom, watches and the higher grade of clocks form part of the jeweller’s stock, and he sells a few other articles of utility, such as purses and bags, but to all intents and purposes he shares with the artist and art-dealer the distinction of making a living by adding pleasure to the lives of others. The very word “jewelry” carries, in its root form, the idea of joy; and when a Senwosri princess, 43 centuries ago, smiled happily as she raised her brown arms to fasten the clasp of a new necklace, the jeweller of Memphis on the Nile no doubt took his little profit, as the jeweller of Memphis on the Mississippi takes his to-day, all the more gladly for being, in the oriental phrase, a “Distributor of delights.” Sour philosophers have always sneered at women for loving jewels, and most of all for piercing their ears and noses to vary its display, but the nose-ring that overhangs a thick Nubian lip is an expression of the same charming instinct that makes a child diversify the arrangement of her daisychains. And jewelry plays its part in the higher emotions as well as in the pretty vanities; witness the engagement ring, the marriage ring and all the uses, described in the Britannica, of jewels as religious symbols.

Specimens Reproduced

The article Jewelry (Vol. 15, p. 364), by A. H. Smith, the official in charge of the great jewel collection in the British Museum, contains nearly a hundred illustrations, half of them on plate paper, which include examples of every period and every variety of the jeweller’s art, and these, with the illustrations in other articles mentioned in this chapter, are so full of interest to the jeweller’s customers that he ought really to keep his Britannica at his place of business rather than at his house. It is, at any rate, amusing to recall that in a speech made by the Editor-in-chief of the Britannica, on the occasion of a banquet given to celebrate the completion of the new edition, he remarked that when he had chanced to 49take home the proof sheets of this article, to read them at night, he carefully kept them out of his wife’s sight lest they might suggest too tempting possibilities. The article divides modern jewelry into three classes:

(1) objects in which gems and stones form the principal portions, and in which the work in silver, platinum or gold is really only a means for carrying out the design by fixing the gems or stones in the position arranged by the designer, the metal employed being visible only as a setting;

(2) when gold work plays an important part in the development of the design, being itself ornamented by engraving (now rarely used) or enamelling or both, the stones and gems being arranged in subordination to the gold work in such positions as to give a decorative effect to the whole;

(3) when gold or other metal is alone used, the design being wrought out by hammering in repoussé, casting, engraving, chasing or by the addition of filigree work, or when the surfaces are left absolutely plain but polished and highly finished.

The “Personal Art” Movement

The second of these three classes includes the work which has completely revolutionized the theory of design, so far as the best class of trade is concerned, since the Paris International Exposition of 1900 first drew general attention to the exquisite creations of Lalique and his school. L. C. Tiffany, in the United States, and Philippe Wolfers, in Belgium, have done more than any designers other than the French to extend this new movement; but in England, Germany, Austria, Russia and Switzerland there has been a notable increase of individual effort and purpose, and a recognition of the possibilities of personal art as at any rate an important factor in the business. Side by side with this development new standards have been established in mechanical work. “Nearly every kind of gold chain now made is manufactured by machinery, and nothing like the beauty of design or perfection of workmanship could be obtained by hand at, probably, any cost.” The article, equivalent in length to about 35 pages of this Guide, contains a full review, amplified by the results of the most recent excavations (some of them undertaken expressly for the archaeological purposes of this edition of the Britannica) of the history of jewelry, Egyptian, Assyrian, Mycenean, Greek, Etruscan, Roman, Merovingian, Oriental and Renaissance.

Rings for Love and Murder

Ring (Vol. 23, p. 349), of which Prof. Middleton, long art director of the South Kensington Museum, is the chief contributor, is another copiously illustrated article. Among the curious items of information it contains, there is the unromantic origin of the engagement ring (which may be cited by the jeweller to prove that it should always be a costly one), the ancient Romans regarding it as a pledge to assure the donor’s fulfilment of his promise; the fact that the modern rheumatism ring had its medieval forerunner in the rings, blessed by the sovereign, which were worn as a preservative against cramp; and the description of the old poison rings, which were of two kinds: those merely affording, in the bezel, a secret receptacle so that the poison might be always at hand for suicide, and those provided with a hollow point to which, on touching a spring, the venom ran as in a snake’s fang, so that the murderer could give a fatal scratch while shaking hands with his victim. Brooch (Vol. 4, p. 641) traces, with many illustrations of typical specimens, the “fibula” or safety pin from its origin in Central Europe during the Bronze Age, through the modifications which introduced the bow shape, providing space for thicker folds of cloth, to the modern ornament. The long brooch is not a new fashion, for silver brooches no less than 15 inches in length have been found in Viking hoards of the 7th, 8th and 9th centuries. Ear-ring (Vol. 8, p. 798) describes ear “ornaments” of the most grotesque size. In Borneo the hole in the ear lobe is stretched to a calibre of 3¾ inches, but the Masai 50tribes in equatorial Africa far outdo this, stretching the lobes, year after year, until they can wear stone ear-plugs weighing 2 lbs. 14 ozs. each, with a diameter of 4½ inches; and they thus achieve the supreme elegance of making the two long flaps of flesh meet above their heads. It is also curious to note the custom of some oriental tribes of wearing one ear-ring only. Bracelet (Vol. 4, p. 359) describes the three distinct models worn by the Israelites, all of which the Authorized Version calls “bracelet,” although the original Hebrew has separate names for them. Armlets have always been conspicuous in the regalia of Eastern kings, and the pair captured at Delhi and taken to Persia by Nadir Shah in 1739 contain jewels valued at more than $5,000,000, including the famous “Sea of Light” diamond, which, although it weighs only 186 carats as against the 516½ of the largest fraction into which the Cullinan stone was cut, is unique as possessing the finest lustre of any known specimen. The 24 plate illustrations in the article Scandinavian Civilization (Vol. 24, p. 287), by Miss B. S. Phillpotts, show some exquisite designs of clasps, collars and pins exhumed in Denmark, Norway and Sweden, and supposed by some authorities to antedate the oldest Egyptian jewelry.

Precious Metals

The article Gold (Vol. 12, p. 192) is a thorough workshop treatise, as well as a detailed study of existing mines and of the influence their production exerts upon the “price,” if it can be so called, of a metal which is its own standard of value. Silver (Vol. 25, p. 112) and Platinum (Vol. 21, p. 805) are treated with similar comprehensiveness. The articles Alloys (Vol. 1, p. 704), Assaying (Vol. 2, p. 776), Metal (Vol. 18, p. 198), Metallography (Vol. 18, p. 202), and Metallurgy (Vol. 18, p. 203), all by noted authorities, are full of information useful to the jeweller. Metal-Work (Vol. 18, p. 205), fully illustrated, incidentally touches upon the art of the silver- and gold-smith; and this branch of the subject is also treated in such articles as Plate (Vol. 21, p. 789), with over 30 typical illustrations—a most interesting historical account, by several well-known experts, of works in gold and silver which belong to any class other than those of personal ornament and coins; and Drinking Vessels (Vol. 8, p. 580), illustrated, by Dr. Charles H. Read of the British Museum, which discusses gold and silver cups. Mention must also be made of the description of American work in precious metals before the time of Christopher Columbus, in the section Archaeology of the article America (Vol. 1, p. 812), by the late Dr. O. T. Mason, of the National Museum, Washington; also of Mexico, Ancient Civilization (Vol. 18, p. 335), by the famous ethnologists, Dr. E. B. Tylor of Oxford and Dr. Walter Lehmann, of the Royal Ethnographical Museum, Munich; Egypt, Ancient Art (Vol. 9, p. 73), by W. M. Flinders Petrie; Greek Art (Vol. 12, p. 470), illustrated, by Dr. Percy Gardner, of Oxford; Roman Art, Work in Precious Metals (Vol. 23, p. 483), illustrated, by H. Stuart Jones, director of the British School at Rome; Japan, Art, Sculpture and Carving (Vol. 15, p. 176), by Capt. Frank Brinkley, author of A History of the Japanese People; and China, Bronzes (Vol. 6, p. 215), by C. J. Holmes, formerly Slade professor of fine art at Oxford.

Filigree (Vol. 10, p. 343) describes the delicate jewel work of twisted gold and silver threads, and also the “granulated” work which consists of minute globules of gold soldered to form patterns on a metal surface. In India the filigree worker has retained the patterns used by the ancient Greeks and works in the same way they did. Wandering workmen are given so much gold, coined or rough. This is weighed, heated and beaten into wire, and worked in the courtyard or on the verandah of the customer’s house. The worker reweighs the 51complete work when finished and is paid at a specified rate for his labor. Repoussé (Vol. 23, p. 108), by M. H. Spielmann, editor Magazine of Art; Chasing (Vol. 5, p. 956) and Inlaying (Vol. 14, p. 574) are other articles dealing with certain processes in jewel work. The jeweller also must not overlook two superb articles, Medal (Vol. 18, p. 1), illustrated, by M. H. Spielmann, and Numismatics (Vol. 19, p. 869), which is by three specialists, and is most fully illustrated by designs inviting practical use. Enamel (Vol. 9, p. 362), illustrated, by Alexander Fisher, author of The Art of Enamelling on Metals, goes very fully and practically into this interesting subject, which is further discussed in Japan, Cloisonné Enamel (Vol. 15, p. 189). Mosaic (Vol. 18, p. 883), illustrated, by Professor Middleton and H. Stuart Jones, deals in part with the ornamentation of jewelry by this method. In Brazing and Soldering (Vol. 4, p. 463) the composition of silver solder used for jewelry is described, and in Cement there is an account of Jeweller’s or Armenian Cement (Vol. 5, p. 659).

Precious Stones

The article Gem treats the subject in two sections, of which the first (Vol. 11, p. 560), by F. W. Rudler, of the Museum of Practical Geology, London, deals with Mineralogy and General Properties. Here are discussed hardness, specific gravity, crystaline forms and cleavage, colour, refraction, chemical composition, etc., and there is an interesting section on superstitions in regard to gems, the medical and magical powers with which they were reputed to be endowed. These beliefs are very remarkable, and it has even been suggested by archaeologists that jewelry did not have its origin so much in a love for personal decoration, as in the belief that the objects used possessed magical virtue. The article Mineralogy (Vol. 18, p. 509), by L. J. Spencer, of the British Museum, and editor of the Mineralogical Magazine, will be found especially valuable for reference in the workshop. It gives, among other things, the scale of hardness, and nomenclature and classification of minerals. The crystal formation of gems as well as their optical properties—characteristics by which the genuineness of precious stones may be tested—are discussed and explained in the article Crystallography (Vol. 7, p. 569), with over 100 illustrations, also by L. J. Spencer. The cutting of gem stones is treated under Lapidary and Gem Cutting (Vol. 16, p. 195), by Dr. George F. Kunz, the famous gem expert to Tiffany & Co., New York,—an article of uncommon historical interest and practical value, in which diamond cutting is considered at much length.

The second section of the article Gem, Gems in Art (Vol. 11, p. 562), by Dr. A. S. Murray, the famous British archaeologist, and A. H. Smith, gives an account of precious stones engraved with designs. The illustrations show more than 90 examples, including Cretan and Mycenaean intaglios, Greek, Phœnician and Etruscan scarabs and scarabæoids, cameos, seals, Oriental, Christian, and modern gems. This subject is further discussed in separate articles, such as Scarab (Vol. 24, p. 301), by Dr. F. Ll. Griffith, the Egyptologist, an account of the designs which, originating in Egypt during the Fourth Dynasty, have exercised a lasting influence on the design and shape of gems; Cameo (Vol. 5, p. 104), Intaglio (Vol. 14, p. 680), Seals (Vol. 24, p. 539), illustrated, by Sir E. Maunde Thompson, formerly principal librarian, British Museum, as well as in the articles on ancient and Oriental civilizations, already mentioned.

Synthetic Stones

The artificial duplication of certain gems by chemical processes which yield products identical in composition and physical properties with the natural stones is a subject of growing importance 52to the jeweller, and the latest developments are described in Gem, Artificial (Vol. 11, p. 569), by Sir William Crookes. This famous chemist and authority on precious stones does not hesitate to declare that although the artificial diamonds so far produced have been microscopic in size, scientists have now found the right method and that “there is no reason to doubt that, working on a larger scale, larger diamonds will result.” The artificial production of rubies, sapphires, Oriental emeralds, amethysts, topazes and zircons is also discussed. Descriptions of the several gem stones are found under their respective headings, for example Diamond (Vol. 8, p. 158), illustrated, by H. A. Miers, principal of the University of London, and former editor of the Mineralogical Magazine. Here are given its scientific characters, its uses (especially for faceting softer precious stones), distribution, and mining, and the wonderful history of the most famous diamonds of the world. Ruby (Vol. 23, p. 812), the most valued of gem stones, is often called “Oriental ruby” to distinguish it from Spinel (Vol. 25, p. 684), an aluminate stone of inferior hardness, density and value. It is interesting to note that many historic stones described as monster rubies were really spinels. The great ruby set in the Maltese Cross in front of the Imperial State Crown of England is a spinel. Sapphire (Vol. 24, p. 201) was known to the Greeks as “hyacinthus,” and the present name was formerly applied to lapis lazuli. Asteria or Star Stone (Vol. 2, p. 792) tells how the luminous star comes to be seen in sapphires, rubies and topazes. The name Emerald (Vol. 9, p. 332) is used for a number of stones, of which the most valued is not a true emerald at all; see Corundum (Vol. 7, p. 207). The same is true of the Topaz (Vol. 27, p. 48), the more prized Oriental topaz being a yellow corundum, harder and denser than the stone from which it takes its name. “Scotch” or “Spanish” topazes are yellow or smoke-tinted quartz, or cairngorm. The Amethyst (Vol. 1, p. 852) is violet or purple quartz, and the sapphire of a purple colour is often called an Oriental amethyst. The many varieties of the beautiful Zircon (Vol. 28, p. 989), such as Hyacinth (Vol. 14, p. 25) and Jargoon (Vol. 15, p. 276) are carefully described and distinguished. These valuable articles on the precious stones have been contributed by F. W. Rudler, of the Museum of Practical Geology, London. Pearl (Vol. 21, p. 24) discusses the results of the latest researches on the cause of pearl formation, and gives a graphic account of pearl-fishing.

Semi-Precious Stones

The material in the Britannica on the semi-precious stones is as complete. There are many articles, specified in the list at the end of this chapter. Alexandrite (Vol. 1, p. 576) is remarkable for its property of appearing dark green by daylight, and red by candle-light, which makes it especially popular in Russia where green and red are the military colors; Chrysoberyl (Vol. 6, p. 320), of which alexandrite is a variety; Chrysolite (Vol. 6, p, 320), often mistaken for chrysoberyl; Peridot (Vol. 21, p. 147), like chrysolite, a variety of olivine; Beryl (Vol. 3, p. 817), much prized by the ancients as a gem stone, and of which the Emerald (see above) and the Aquamarine (Vol. 2, p. 237) are the chief “precious” varieties; Tourmaline (Vol. 27, p 103), the remarkable stone of as much interest to the physicist as to the jeweller, on account of its optical and electrical properties; and Rubellite (Vol. 23, p. 804), its much prized red variety Garnet (Vol. 11, p. 470), together with Almandine (Vol. 1, p. 712), which, when cut with a convex face is known as carbuncle; Cinnamon-Stone (Vol. 6, p. 376), the light red garnet, so easily mistaken for a variety of zircon (the article tells how to distinguish them); Demantoid (Vol. 7, p. 979), the green 53garnet from the Urals, and Pyrope (Vol. 22, p. 695), usually known as Bohemian garnet; Jade (Vol. 15, p. 122), which occupies in China the highest place as a jewel, and whose many varieties are here clearly distinguished; Jet (Vol. 15, p. 358); Haematite (Vol. 12, p. 804); Moonstone (Vol. 18, p. 807); Cat’s-Eye (Vol. 5, p. 537), a term applied to several distinct minerals of which Crocidolite (Vol. 7, p. 477) has recently become very popular; Opal (Vol. 20, p. 120), an article in which the brilliant flashes of colour in this stone are explained; Quartz (Vol. 22, p. 715), with its many ornamental varieties such as Agate (Vol. 1, p. 368), Amethyst (Vol. 1, p. 852), Aventurine (Vol. 3, p. 54), Bloodstone (Vol. 4, p. 85), Cairngorm (Vol. 4, p. 952), Carnelian (Vol. 5, p. 365), Chalcedony (Vol. 5, p. 803), Chrysoprase (Vol. 6, p. 320), Heliotrope (Vol. 13, p. 232), Mocha Stone (Vol. 18, p. 637), Onyx (Vol. 20, p. 118), Rock-Crystal (Vol. 23, p. 433), Sard (Vol. 24, p. 209), and Sardonyx (Vol. 24, p. 2.18).

Watches and Clocks

The article Watch (Vol. 28, p. 362), illustrated, by Lord Grimthorpe, the great authority on watches and clocks, and Sir H. H. Cunynghame, vice-president of the British Institute of Electrical Engineers, is full of interest. There is a very valuable historical account beginning with the invention of portable time pieces in the 15th century. The parts of a modern watch are described, with details as to the mainspring, different types of escapement, the balance-wheel and hair-spring, compensation adjustments and secondary compensation. Methods of correcting temperature errors are discussed, and a simple means for demagnetizing a watch which has been near a dynamo is given. The proper materials used for jewelled bearings are described in the articles Diamond, Corundum, etc. Lubricants (Vol. 17, p. 88) contains a valuable paragraph on the properties and preparation of the fluid oils used on the spindles of watches and clocks.

The article Clock (Vol. 6, p. 536) is by the same distinguished authorities as Watch, with an additional section on Decorative Aspects (p. 552), by James Penderel-Brodhurst. It is equivalent to 55 pages of this Guide and is fully illustrated. Among the topics considered are the earliest clocks and their gradual improvement; the essential components of a clock; the mechanics of the pendulum; methods of compensation, including the use of the new nickel-steel alloy—described in the article Invar (Vol. 14, p. 717)—the barometrical error, and methods of counteraction; suspension of pendulums; balance, anchor, dead, pinwheel, detached or free, and gravity escapements; the remontoire systems for abolishing errors in the force driving the escapement; testing of clocks; clock wheels; striking mechanism; the watchman’s clock, church and turret clocks, electrical clocks, miscellaneous clocks, including magical clocks and other curious designs. The section on Decorative Aspects tells about styles of cases and mountings, the origin and development of the “grandfather” clock, etc. In connection with long-period clocks, attention should be given to the new and ingenious, if not commercially practical, device invented by the Hon. R. J. Strutt. Electrified particles emitted by a radioactive substance separate two strips of gold leaf, and these, falling together after the charge has been conducted away upon contact with metal, are extended again, the process being constantly repeated. If some way could be found to utilize this motion to work an escapement, we should have a clock that would go on indefinitely, since 1000 years must elapse before even half the small amount of radium used has disappeared. A description of this so-called “radium” clock will be found in Perpetual Motion (Vol. 21, p. 181).

54

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO MANUFACTURERS OF AND DEALERS IN JEWELRY, CLOCKS, AND WATCHES

55

CHAPTER XI
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINERY AND SUPPLIES

Construction and Operation

Electrical machinery and supplies include three main groups of appliances: The apparatus by which electricity is originally generated; the apparatus by which current is transmitted and, if necessary, modified before it is used; and the infinitely various appliances for its final employment. In connection with any one of the latter, information may be needed as to its structure and its mechanical or electrochemical method of operation, or as to its uses, and in the treatment of these two aspects of a vast number of subjects the advantages of the encyclopaedic plan of the Britannica are obvious. One article will explain the method by which the same principles are applied to a number of different machines. Another article will deal with a group of appliances all used for similar purposes; and a reference to the Index of 500,000 entries (Vol. 29) will at once guide the reader who turns to the name of any electrical appliance to either kind of information he desires at the moment, whether he wants to know how the machine is made and operated, or what kind of work it does and how efficiently it does it.

The reader to whom this chapter is addressed is already familiar with the general subject of electricity, but he may at any moment desire to review or to supplement his general knowledge in connection with some new appliance which, for the first time, applies to commercial use one of the many and intricate laws of electrical vibration. The whole subject of the nature and action of electricity is outlined in the article Electricity (Vol. 9, p. 179), by Prof. J. A. Fleming, of the University of London, one of the world’s foremost authorities. In a space equivalent to hardly more than 30 pages of this Guide, the field covered in detail by many other articles is so concisely and clearly surveyed that you get a complete view of the theoretical and practical developments by which electrical science and industry have reached their present position. The same contributor then considers Electrostatics (Vol. 9, p. 240) and Electrokinetics (Vol. 9, p. 210); and, in Conduction, Electric (Vol. 6, p. 855), deals with metallic, non-metallic, dielectric and gaseous conductors. One section of this article is by Sir J. J. Thomson, winner, in 1906, of the Nobel Prize for Physics. The form in which metal is chiefly employed for the conduction of electricity is the subject of a separate article, Wire (Vol. 28, p. 738); and the articles on the individual metals deal with their electrical properties.

Batteries and Dynamos

The whole subject of the chemical production of electricity is discussed in Electrolysis (Vol. 9, p. 217), by W. C. D. Whetham, of the technical staff of Cambridge University. Battery (Vol. 3, p. 531), fully illustrated, deals with all the forms of primary battery, and Accumulator (Vol. 1, p. 126), also illustrated, by Walter Hibbert, of the London Polytechnic, with all the secondary types. The alkaline accumulators, of which the Edison apparatus is a well known type, 56are the subject of a special section. Turning to mechanically produced electricity, the first article to read is Electromagnetism (Vol. 9, p. 226). This brings you naturally to the article Dynamo (Vol. 8, p. 764), by C. C. Hawkins, author of one of the best practical text-books on the subject. This copiously illustrated article, in length equivalent to 50 pages of this Guide, discusses continuous current dynamos, lap-winding, commutators, field-magnets, forgings and castings for magnets, air-gaps, armature cores, carbon brushes, cooling surfaces and alternators.

Having thus covered the subject of obtaining current, the group of articles next to be considered is that dealing with its measurement and the examination of resistances. The general article Units, Physical (Vol. 27, p. 740), contains a section on electrical units. Then come Potentiometer (Vol. 22, p. 205); Meter, Electric (Vol. 18, p. 291); Voltmeter (Vol. 28, p. 206), illustrated; Amperemeter (Vol. 1, p. 879), illustrated; Ohmmeter (Vol. 20, p. 34); Wattmeter (Vol. 28, p. 419); Galvanometer (Vol. 11, p. 428), illustrated; Electrometer (Vol. 9, p. 234), illustrated; Electroscope (Vol. 9, p. 239), illustrated; Wheatstone’s Bridge (Vol. 28, p. 584), illustrated; and Oscillograph (Vol. 20, p. 347), illustrated.

Lighting Appliances

The commercial supply of current is covered by a series of articles of which the first to be read is Electricity Supply (Vol. 9, p. 193), to which Emile Garcke, the famous electrical engineer, contributes a section. Power Transmission, Electrical (Vol. 22, p. 233), is by Louis Bell, chief engineer of the General Electric Co., Boston; and contains full details as to the use of both two-phase and three-phase generators in transmission. Induction Coil (Vol. 14, p. 502) and Transformers (Vol. 27, p. 173) are both fully illustrated. Lighting, Electric (Vol. 16, p. 659) deals with arc, incandescent and vapour lamps, and with wiring. The section on household work gives excellent practical information about the best arrangements of lights. A special class of electric light supplies is discussed in Lighthouse (Vol. 16, p. 627), by W. T. Douglass, who erected the new Eddystone and the Bishop’s Rock lights, and by N. G. Gedye, another practical expert.

The appliances used to convert current back again into the mechanical energy from which it had been derived are described in the article Motors, Electric (Vol. 18, p. 910). This article divides continuous current motors into five classes: Separately excited; series-wound constant current; series-wound constant potential; series-wound interdependent current and potential; and shunt-wound constant potential. Alternating current motors are similarly classified as Synchronous constant potential; induction-polyphase constant potential; induction monophase constant potential; repulsion commutating, and series-commutating.

Trolley Cars and Railroads

Machinery for applying electric power to transportation, both for trolley cars and heavy railroad traffic, is described in the article Traction (Vol. 27, p. 118), by Prof. Louis Duncan, who designed the first electric locomotives employed with large loads—those introduced in 1895 by the Baltimore & Ohio R.R. for its track in the tunnel under Baltimore. The article gives, with many mechanical diagrams, accounts of the appliances by which the current is taken from trolley wires, conduits and third rails, and of the types of motors and controllers employed. Crane (Vol. 7, p. 368), by Walter Pitt, describes the peculiar type of “crane-rated” motor, by the aid of which steam and hydraulic cranes can be displaced. The electric furnaces used for the reduction of ores and for manufacturing processes in which exceptionally high temperatures are required, 57are treated in Electrometallurgy (Vol. 9, p. 232), by W. G. M’Millan, lecturer on metallurgy at Mason College, Birmingham. Electric machinery for the refining of metals is dealt with in the article Electrochemistry (Vol. 9, p. 208). Under Surgical Instruments (Vol. 26, p. 133) there is a description of the apparatus used for cautery and for illuminating parts of the interior of the body. The appliances used in Electrotherapeutics are dealt with under that heading (Vol. 9, p. 249). Information as to other medical and surgical apparatus will be found under Röntgen Rays (Vol. 23, p. 694), X-Ray Treatment (Vol. 28, p. 887), by Dr. H. L. Jones, of St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, London; and Fluorescence (Vol. 10, p. 575), by Prof. J. R. Cotter, of Trinity College, Dublin.

Telegraph and Telephone

Telegraph (Vol. 26, p. 510), equivalent in length to 70 pages of this Guide, and fully illustrated, is by a number of contributors, and discusses both land lines and submarine cables. The section on instruments, by H. R. Kempe, electrician to the General Post Office, London, includes a full description of the transmitters and receivers employed in the various systems of wireless telegraphy. Telephone (Vol. 26, p. 547) deals with the fixed and portable instruments, the batteries and switchboards, the new automatic exchange “selectors,” and with special applications of the microphone.

A number of other electric appliances are discussed in separate articles, such as Bell (Vol. 3, p. 692), by H. M. Ross, in which burglar alarm devices are described; and Ventilation, Fan (Vol. 27, p. 1011), by James Bartlett; while sparking plugs and other ignition appliances are treated under Oil Engine (Vol. 20, p. 35).

There are also a number of appliances used mostly in experimental and educational work. Such, for instance, are Electrical or Electrostatic Machine (Vol. 9, p. 176), with many illustrations; Electrophorus (Vol. 9, p. 237), and Leyden Jar (Vol. 16, p. 528).

The metals, chemicals and other materials sold by dealers in electrical supplies, and their properties and uses, are described in Copper (Vol. 7, p. 102), Zinc (Vol. 28, p. 981), Lead (Vol. 16, p. 314), Sulphuric Acid (Vol. 26, p. 65), Sodium, Compounds (Vol. 25, p. 341); Chromium (Vol. 6, p. 296); Nitrogen, Compounds (Vol. 19, p. 715); Sal Ammoniac (Vol. 24, p. 59), Bichromates and Chromates (Vol. 3, p. 912), Carbon (Vol. 5, p. 305), Rubber (Vol. 23, p. 795), and Gutta Percha (Vol. 12, p. 743).

The following is a partial list, in alphabetical order, of articles of peculiar interest to dealers in electrical supplies.

58

CHAPTER XII
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF CHEMICALS AND DRUGS

A Factor in All Industries

The chemical and drug industry is not only in itself an enormous business, but it supplies essential materials for almost every branch of manufacturing. Chemical products are employed in our buildings, our clothing, our food; we come into the world and go out of the world with the odour of chemicals about us. The manufacturer or dealer cannot analyze all the influences that affect his market, and when he tries, as he must, to consider the future of the trade, to reckon with the channels of demand that will arise in the course of new applications of chemical products, he is facing all the problems of all the industries.

The variety of raw materials from which chemical products are derived, and the activity with which new sources are discovered and developed, are almost as bewildering. Only a century has passed since coal-tar was first distilled, and to-day no chemist would venture to fix the limits of its industrial possibilities. Electrolysis has been in use since 1804, and yet the future of the world’s wheat supply probably depends upon processes, as yet hardly beyond the experimental stage, of utilizing atmospheric nitrogen.

In connection with so comprehensive an industry, the uses of the Britannica are so manifold that this whole Guide might be devoted to them. Articles on every manufacturing process touch upon the use of chemicals. The articles on countries, states and cities are full of relevant information; and there is hardly a scientific article that would not be helpful. But the 40 general articles on chemistry, the 350 on chemical compounds, and the 75 on manufactured products call most immediately for attention; and, with the aid of other chapters in the Guide, the reader who desires to go further will easily find his way.

Articles on Chemicals

The article Chemistry (Vol. 6, p. 33), equivalent to 135 pages of this Guide, is divided into 6 sections. The first, History, traces the general trend of the science from its infancy to the foundations of the modern theory. The second section, Principles, treats of nomenclature, formulæ, chemical equations and chemical changes. It provides a brief but complete introduction to the terminology and methods of the chemist, and there is not a line in it which will not prove of value in some way or other to the chemical manufacturer. Sections 3 and 4 are devoted to Inorganic and Organic Chemistry, giving a history of the subjects and the principles underlying the structure of compounds, with cross references to all articles dealing with their preparation and properties. Sections 5 and 6 deal, respectively, with Analytical and Physical Chemistry.

Dr. Walter Nernst, professor of physical chemistry, University of Berlin, is the author of Chemical Action (Vol. 6, p. 26), which deals specifically with the nature of chemical forces and deduces the laws of chemical statics and kinetics. Of interest and importance in connection with the manufacture of chemicals is Solution (Vol. 25, p. 368), by W. C. D. Whetham, of Cambridge University, author of Theory of Solution, etc. Another theoretical article which will be found 59widely useful is Thermochemistry (Vol. 26, p. 804), by Prof. James Walker, of Edinburgh University. For further details see the chapter on Chemistry in this Guide.

Manufacture of Chemicals

It is possible here to mention only a small amount of the material dealing with the manufacture of chemicals. At the end of this chapter there is a fuller alphabetical list. It may be noted, however, that the articles on the elements, metallic and non-metallic, give much consideration to their compounds, how these are made and how used in the arts and in medicine. But in addition to this there are many noteworthy contributions dealing with chemical manufacture. For instance, Alkali Manufacture (Vol. 1, p. 674), by Dr. Georg Lunge, professor of technical chemistry, Zurich Polytechnic, 11 pages in length and with 10 illustrations. The chief processes described are the Leblanc, ammonia-soda, and electrolytic, together with others dependent upon them. The facts about the manufacture of the carbonate, hydrate, and sulphate of soda, chlorine, hydrochloric acid, etc., are fully given. Potassium (Vol. 22, p. 197) treats of the commercial compounds of this metal in the same manner. Nitrogen (Vol. 19, p. 714) explains the new process for the commercial manufacture of nitric acid from atmospheric air—a matter of enormous industrial importance—and also the conversion of nitrogen into ammonia, which has been done successfully only within the past few years.

The manufacture of chemical products by the use of electricity is the subject of Electrochemistry (Vol. 9, p. 208), and a still larger field is covered by Electrometallurgy (Vol. 9, p. 232). Both of these valuable articles are by W. G. M‘Millan, formerly secretary of the Institute of Electrical Engineers of Great Britain. Sulphuric Acid (Vol. 26, p. 65), illustrated, by Dr. Lunge, describes the properties, reactions and manufacture of the most important of all chemicals, including the more modern contact processes.

Drugs, Origin and Manufacture

As a key to the subject of the origin and manufacture of drugs, the article Pharmacology (Vol. 21, p. 347), by Dr. Ralph Stockman, professor of materia medica and therapeutics in the University of Glasgow, presents a great amount of interesting and valuable information on the action of chemical substances (apart from foods) on all kinds of animals, from bacteria up to man. A short history of pharmacology is given and a large part of the article concerns the action of drugs. There is also a classification of drugs according to the latest and most scientific methods into twenty-eight groups, describing the effects of each group. An appendix to the article, by Dr. H. L. Hennessy, is entitled Terminology in Therapeutics, and is a general explanation of the common names used in the therapeutic classification of drugs.

Since therapeutics is concerned with the remedial power of drugs and the conditions under which they are to be used, the article Therapeutics (Vol. 26, p. 793), by Dr. Sir Lauder Brunton, of St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, London, and author of the well-known treatise, Modern Therapeutics, should not be overlooked, nor Poison (Vol. 21, p. 893), by Dr. Sir Thomas Stevenson, lecturer on chemistry and forensic medicine at Guy’s Hospital, London, wherein all poisons are classified and their antidotes are indicated.

Pharmacy (Vol. 21, p. 355), by E. M. Holmes, of the Pharmaceutical Museum, London, is largely historical in its nature, and yields much interesting and valuable information about the pharmacist. We learn that an Egyptian papyrus of the date 2300 B.C. gives direction as to the preparation of prescriptions, and that diachylon plaster, invented by Menecrates 60in A.D. 1, is used for the same purposes to-day. A great deal of curious knowledge about ancient remedies, such as the thigh bone of a hanged man, moss grown on a human skull, the ashes of the head of a coal-black cat, etc., renders this article especially entertaining. Pharmacopœia (Vol. 21, p. 353), also by Mr. Holmes, tells about the pharmacopœias in use in different countries, the standardization of drugs, etc.

In the list at the end of this chapter are noted the numerous separate articles on drugs, their preparation and use that appear in the Britannica. Mention should be made of the articles on the elements, such as Iron (Vol. 14, p. 799), Arsenic (Vol. 2, p. 653), Mercury (Vol. 18, p. 158), Iodine (Vol. 14, p. 725), Bromine (Vol. 4, p. 633), Sodium (Vol. 25, p. 343), Potassium (Vol. 22, p. 200), Magnesium (Vol. 17, p. 321), Bismuth (Vol. 4, p. 11). Separate sections dealing with pharmacology are found in the articles on very many plants, such as Aloe (Vol. 1, p. 720), Anise (Vol. 2, p. 55), Arrowroot (Vol. 2, p. 649), Iceland Moss (Vol. 14, p. 241), Cinchona (Vol. 6, p. 369), Coca (Vol. 6, p. 614), Colchicum (Vol. 6, p. 661), Dandelion (Vol. 7, p. 801), Hop (Vol. 13, p. 678), Horehound (Vol. 13, p. 692), Lobelia (Vol. 16, p. 837), Mint (Vol. 18, p. 557), Mustard (Vol. 19, p. 97), Peppermint (Vol. 21, p. 128), etc.

Biographies of Eminent Scientists

The scientific biographies include not a few subjects which will be of interest, owing to familiarity with the names, to those engaged in the chemical and drug business. Among these are Lister, Baron Joseph L. (Vol. 16, p. 777), to whose work and teaching the present importance of the manufacture of antiseptics is largely due; Pasteur, Louis (Vol. 20, p. 892); Curie, Pierre, and Mme. Marie Curie (Vol. 7, p. 644), the physicists who first announced the existence of radium; Liebig, Baron J. von (Vol. 16, p. 590), the great physiological chemist; Lunge, Georg (Vol. 17, p. 126), the noted expert in technical chemistry, already mentioned as a contributor to the Britannica, and Glauber, J. R. (Vol. 12, p. 114), the German chemist who made a living chiefly by the sale of secret chemical and medicinal preparations.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO THOSE ENGAGED IN THE MANUFACTURE AND SALE OF CHEMICALS AND DRUGS

CHAPTER XIII
FOR MERCHANTS AND MANUFACTURERS OF FOOD PRODUCTS

The manufacturer of or dealer in food products must of necessity be interested in questions of transportation by land and sea, of taxation, of agriculture, stock-raising and fishing, for example. For all such subjects as these he is referred to other chapters of this Guide. Here he will find only the chief articles on the subjects most closely related to the study of food products. But on these he may glean a wealth of information that will be of greatest value to him, and from them he can turn readily and with profit to a survey of the larger area covered by other chapters.

As a general introduction to the subject the student should read Dietetics (Vol. 8, p. 214), by the late Dr. W. O. Atwater, who was in charge of the Nutrition Investigation of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, and R. D. Milner, also of that Department. This article deals with the composition and nutritive values of foods, their fuel value, quantities of nutriments needed, hygienic and pecuniary economy of foods (with tables showing the percentage composition of common food materials), conditions of digestibility, and other matters of equal importance. Nutrition (Vol. 19, p. 920), by Prof. D. N. Paton and Dr. E. P. Cathcart, both of the University of Glasgow, discusses more particularly digestion and the utilization of the different food constituents.

Food Preservation

After establishing the value and relative importance of the various substances used as food, it is of great interest to everyone in the business to consider the subject of Food Preservation (Vol. 10, p. 612), an article by Otto Hehner, formerly president of the Society of Public 64Analysts, in which there are separate sections on Preservation by Heat (which includes all canning processes); by Chemicals; by Drying; by Refrigeration; by Pickling. The sterilization of milk, condensed milk and milk powder all fall within the scope of this article. The preservation of food by cold is described in fuller detail in the article Refrigerating and Ice Making (Vol. 23, p. 30), by T. B. Lightfoot, author of the standard technical book on that subject. Among the separate articles on preservative materials are Vinegar (Vol. 28, p. 96), Acetic Acid (Vol. 1, p. 135), Citric Acid (Vol. 6, p. 397), Oils (Vol. 20, p. 43), Salt (Vol. 24, p. 87), Saltpetre (Vol. 24, p. 93), Sugar (Vol. 26, p. 32), Borax (Vol. 4, p. 243), Formalin or Formaldehyde (Vol. 10, p. 667), Benzoic Acid (Vol. 3, p. 756), Salicylic Acid (Vol. 24, p. 69), Sulphur, Compounds (Vol. 26, p. 63), Alcohol (Vol. 1, p. 525).

Adulteration

The objections to the use of some of these chemicals are discussed in Adulteration (Vol. 1, p. 218), by Otto Hehner. This article is about as long as 50 pages of this Guide. There is an interesting historical introduction, from which we learn that the first legal statute in which the adulteration of food is noticed dates from the reign of King John in England (1203). There is an elaborate account of all the subsequent legislation in Great Britain, the United States, and Germany. The effects upon digestion of the chemical preservatives mentioned above are shown in the light of the very latest investigations. There is a section on colouring matter in food, with information about harmless and harmful dyes; and the last part of the article considers adulteration as recently applied to the more important articles of food, such as milk (with tests for borax and formaldehyde), cream, butter, cheese, lard, oils, flour and bread, sugar, marmalade and jams, tea, coffee, cocoa and chocolate, wine, beer, spirits, non-alcoholic drinks, and vinegar.

The properties of adulterants and colouring matters are described in separate articles, such as Glucose (Vol. 12, p. 141); Saccharin (Vol. 23, p. 970); Paraffin (Vol. 20, p. 752), which is sometimes added to coffee when it is roasted; Alum (Vol. 1, p. 766), often used with weak and unstable flours in bread making, and unwholesome, although not strictly speaking an adulterant; Sago (Vol. 23, p. 1003) and Arrowroot (Vol. 2, p. 649), which provide adulterants of cocoa; Chicory (Vol. 6, p. 131), which many consumers insist upon using in their coffee; Copper, Compounds (Vol. 7, p. 109), which describes the copper salts used for colouring canned vegetables; Anatto (Vol. 1, p. 943) and Turmeric (Vol. 27, p. 474), two harmless vegetable colouring matters, much employed; and Aniline (Vol. 2, p. 47). A full list of the various other colouring matters will be found in the article Dyeing (Vol. 8, p. 744).

Another group of articles will be found particularly useful in connection with the manufacture of certain classes of food products. Among these are Fermentation (Vol. 10, p. 275), by J. L. Baker, the noted English analytical and consulting chemist; Fungi (Vol. 11, p. 333), illustrated, with its information about molds; Bacteriology (Vol. 3, p. 156), illustrated, especially for the material relating to the nature of toxins (p. 174)—both of these articles by the late Professor Ward of Cambridge and Professor Blackman of the University of Leeds; Medical Jurisprudence, Food Poisoning (Vol. 18, p. 29), by Prof. H. H. Littlejohn, of the University of Edinburgh, and T. A. Ingram; and Poison (Vol. 21, p. 893), by the late Dr. Sir Thomas Stevenson, of Guy’s Hospital, London.

The diseases of animals which affect meat are described in the article Veterinary 65Science (Vol. 28, p. 2), by George Fleming, author of Animal Plagues, and Prof. John MacQueen of the London Veterinary College, which contains sections on diseases of cattle, sheep and pigs as well as on the principal parasites of domestic animals; and there are separate articles on Anthrax (Vol. 2, p. 106); Foot and Mouth Disease (Vol. 10, p. 617), Pleuro-Pneumonia, or Lung Plague (Vol. 21, p. 838), and Rinderpest (Vol. 23, p. 348).

Special Foods

The article Flour and Flour Manufacture (Vol. 10, p. 548), by George F. Zimmer, not only describes the processes of milling and of dressing and bleaching the flour, but also gives the history of milling from the earliest times, and deals with the special customs of different countries. There is a very full article Bread (Vol. 4, p. 465), by the same contributor. It is not generally known that there are in existence remains of cakes made by the Swiss lake-dwellers in the Stone Age. The author says that, in all probability, they were baked on hot stones. The machine bakeries of the present day are described; and there are sections on sanitation of bakehouses, quality, flavour and colour of flour, baking powders, methods of dough making (the ferment-and-dough, the sponge-and-dough, and other systems), leavened, unleavened and aerated bread, and the recently invented Apostolov process, which among other advantages, permits the utilization of about 87½% of the wheat berry in bread making. A complete modern bread-making plant is described, together with the latest types of machine kneaders, dough dividers and mixers, and baking ovens. There are also articles on Biscuit (Vol. 3, p. 992), Macaroni (Vol. 17, p. 192), Vermicelli (Vol. 27, p. 1024), and Gluten (Vol. 12, p. 145).

The article Starch (Vol. 25, p. 794) treats of the manufacture of this most important alimentary substance. The materials from which the chief food starches are made are described in Maize (Vol. 7, p. 448), Arrowroot (Vol. 2, p. 649), with illustrations showing the appearance under the microscope of the substances which pass commercially under the name of arrowroot or farina; Sago (Vol. 23, p. 1003), Tapioca (Vol. 26, p. 413), and Cassava (Vol. 5, p. 457). Oat (Vol. 19, p. 938) has information about the manufacture of oatmeal.

The article Sugar (Vol. 26, p. 35) is by two practical experts, Alfred and Valentine W. Chapman. It deals with the chemistry, manufacture, history and statistics of this important food product as well as with the cultivation of the sugar cane and beet.

Among articles on the products in the manufacture of which sugar is employed is Jams and Jellies (Vol. 15, p. 150), by Otto Hehner. The author points out many things of interest, for example why starch-glucose is an ingredient and not an adulterant of these products, and he shows the baselessness of the prejudice against the use of beet sugar in their manufacture. The manufacturer of jellies and preserves will find separate articles on all the fruits employed, and other information in Gelatin (Vol. 11, p. 554); in Irish Moss (Vol. 14, p. 795) as to the properties of vegetable gelatin; and in Isinglass (Vol. 14, p. 872), which, besides its gelatinous qualities, possesses the property of clarifying wines, beers, and other liquids. Confectionery (Vol. 6, p. 898) describes an important industry—which until the middle of the 19th century was part of the druggist’s business. See also Chocolate (Vol. 6, p. 259) and Jujube (Vol. 15, p. 546).

Salt (Vol. 24, p. 87) covers the manufacture of salt very fully. It is curious to note that the termination “wich” in English place-names points to localities of ancient salt manufacture, for “wich” is an old English word meaning saltspring. This article contains an interesting section on the Ancient History and 66Religious Symbolism of salt (p. 90), by the late Dr. William Robertson Smith. The preservative qualities of salt were held to make it a peculiarly fitting symbol of any enduring compact, and in more than one part of the world cakes of salt have been used as money.

Dairy Products

Butter and cheese manufacture fall under the article Dairy and Dairy Farming (Vol. 7, p. 737), illustrated, by the late Dr. William Fream, of Edinburgh University. There are sections on Milk Production; Cheese and Cheesemaking, including Canadian and American factory practice and the Babcock and Russell investigations in Wisconsin which have opened up a new field for commercial exploitation (the varieties of English, French, German, and Italian cheeses being also described); Butter and Butter-making, Dairy Factories, Adulteration of Dairy Produce; The Milk Trade, American Dairying, etc. Margarine, the “perfectly wholesome butter substitute” is the subject of a separate article (Vol. 17, p. 704).

There is an article on Lard (Vol. 16, p. 214), showing what real leaf lard is, and how the term is applied in commerce. Oils (Vol. 20, p. 43), by Dr. Julius Lewkowitsch, author of Chemical Technology and Analysis of Oils, Fats, and Waxes, deals with the fixed oils and fats, and essential, etheral or volatile oils. Some of these are among the most important articles of food, and the oil and fat industry may be considered as old as the human race itself. The three processes of oil extraction are described, also refining and bleaching, methods of testing, etc. A list of all oils and fats, including those that are edible, is given. For the chief oils used as food see Olive (Vol. 20, p. 85), Cotton, Cotton-seed (Vol. 7, p. 260), Sesame (Vol. 24, p. 701), Sunflower (Vol. 26, p. 102), Poppy Oil (Vol. 22, p. 91).

Other articles on foods deal with the preparation for the market of such products as Ginger (Vol. 12, p. 27), Mustard (Vol. 19, p. 97), Pepper (Vol. 21, p. 127), with the different varieties distinguished, Cayenne Pepper (Vol. 5, p. 589), Vinegar (Vol. 28, p. 96), Pimento (Vol. 21, p. 614), Cloves (Vol. 6, p. 562), Cinnamon (Vol. 6, p. 376), Curry (Vol. 7, p. 649), Caviare (Vol. 5, p. 582), from which we learn that the finer grades rarely find their way out of Russia; Ketchup (Vol. 15, p. 761), Chutney (Vol. 6, p. 350), Pickle (Vol. 21, p. 584), Vanilla (Vol. 27, p. 894), Raisin (Vol. 22, p. 864), Currant (Vol. 7, p. 648), Prune (Vol. 22, p. 518), Fig (Vol. 10, p. 332), and Guava (Vol. 12, p. 665).

Beverages, Tea and Coffee

The same completeness is displayed in the Britannica articles on beverages. Tea (Vol. 26, p. 476), by John McEwan, has an admirable historical introduction. It was not until the middle of the 17th century that the English began to use tea. It is a curious fact that whereas 35 years ago China practically supplied the world with tea, to-day Russia alone takes half of her export. The reason for this is explained. The characteristics of all varieties of tea are given and the main facts about the cultivation and manufacture. Tea Adulteration and Effects on Health are other sections of this valuable article.

Coffee (Vol. 6, p. 646) is treated in very similar fashion by A. B. Rendle and W. G. Freeman. This beverage, in spite of fierce religious opposition, became the national beverage of the Arabians, and finally appeared in Europe in the 17th century. The physiological action of coffee has a section all to itself. Coffee consumption, roasting and adulteration are also discussed. It is of interest to note that while one branch of the Anglo-Saxon race, namely the people of the United States, is near the head of the list of coffee consumers, others, especially Great Britain, Canada and Australia “are almost at the foot, using only about 671 lb. of coffee per head each year.” In the United States “the average consumption per head is about 11 or 12 lbs. per annum.”

Cocoa (Vol. 6, p. 628) is an interesting and valuable article on “the food of the gods”—the great beverage and dietary substance which America has given the world. Modern lovers of chocolate as a beverage (which is the same as cocoa save that the fat has not been extracted) will envy the digestive powers of the Emperor Montezuma of Mexico who had, each day, 50 jars of chocolate prepared for his personal consumption.

Beer (Vol. 3, p. 642), by Dr. Philip Schidrowitz, member of the Institute of Brewery Council, confines itself to the history of this important beverage, the chemical composition of beers of different types, and information in regard to production and consumption. In Brewing (Vol. 4, p. 506) this same author enters very fully into the manufacturing operations. The English and foreign systems are described and there are many illustrations. It is curious to note that Pliny, who is the earliest writer to mention beer, describes it as scorned by the Romans, who looked upon it as only fit for barbarians, and he thought it a more sinful drink than wine. “So exquisite,” he says, “is the cunning of mankind in gratifying their vicious appetites, that they have invented a method to make water itself produce intoxication.” The section on Brewing Chemistry is very valuable. In connection with Brewing there is an article on Malt (Vol. 17, p. 499), illustrated and very complete in its treatment, by Arthur R. Ling, editor Journal of the Institute of Brewing, and one on Hop (Vol. 13, p. 677), by the late Dr. Wm. Fream. Dr. Schidrowitz also contributes the article Wine (Vol. 28, p. 716). The art of wine-making is thoroughly described, and there are most interesting sections on the wines of France, Spain, Portugal, Germany, Italy, Austria-Hungary, United States, classifying the different varieties and affording a full survey of the industry.

Spirits (Vol. 25, p. 694), illustrated, and also by Dr. Schidrowitz, is a general article covering the subject of the distillation of fermented saccharine and starchy liquids. The account is both historical and technical, and there are separate and more specific articles on Brandy (Vol. 4, p. 428), Rum (Vol. 23, p. 825), Arrack (Vol. 2, p. 642), Whisky (Vol. 28, p. 591), in which the difference between three main types—Scotch, Irish and American—is carefully explained; Vodka (Vol. 28, p. 170), Gin (Vol. 12, p. 26). The many flavoured and sweetened forms of alcohol are described in the article Liqueurs (Vol. 16, p. 744), where we also learn the difference between a “cordial” and a “liqueur.” There are separate articles on Absinthe (Vol. 1, p. 75), Benedictine (Vol. 3, p. 721), Chartreuse (Vol. 5, p. 954), Curaçoa (Vol. 7, p. 636), Kirsch (Vol. 15, p. 834), and Vermouth (Vol. 27, p. 1029).

Mineral Waters (Vol. 18, p. 517) classifies all the great springs according to their mineral constituents, and discusses the effects upon digestion of their use, and their value in medical treatment.

The appended list includes a large number of articles of interest to the food producers, including chemical compounds and flavouring extracts.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO THOSE ENGAGED IN THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OF FOOD PRODUCTS

CHAPTER XIV
FOR INSURANCE MEN

For the insurance man, whether veteran or tyro, the new Encyclopaedia Britannica has much of value and importance, and it has it in quickly available form so that the desired information may be readily found, whether the experienced student wants an authoritative statement on a difficult point, or the beginner wishes an outline course of the subject. This availability, whether for the expert or the novice, is secured by the Index (the 29th volume), which guides the reader immediately to desired information, if he does not find it in the alphabetically arranged articles in the body of the book upon first turning up the article in which he expects the subject to be treated.

To be more concrete—if you want to know something about insurance, turn first to the article Insurance in Volume 14, beginning on p. 656. You find an elaborate article, which would occupy about 75 pages if printed in type and on a page like this Guide.

In other encyclopaedias you would have no clue to the whereabouts of any information about insurance except what would be given in the article Insurance or in articles to which it might refer you in that article. For anything else you would have to guess how the editor’s mind had worked to find where in the book he had put other information about insurance; and to guess how each contributor’s mental processes have been related to his interest in insurance so that you might know whether in some article, on a topic apparently not related to insurance at all, the contributor had put in some interesting and important fact about insurance.

But in the Britannica you have one entire volume, the 29th, which was made for the sole purpose of increasing the practical efficiency of the other 28 volumes. Under the heading Insurance in this index, you will find references to many articles and cross references to Title Insurance and to Title Guarantee Companies.

Apart from the fact that he has the initial assurance that what he gets from the Britannica in the first place is fuller and better than he would get from another work of reference, what are the advantages offered by the index in this particular instance?

First: Instead of having a reference to volume 14 only he has references to volumes 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27 and 28,—nineteen volumes in all,—say a gain of 1800% in efficiency.

Second: Instead of having one article Insurance to refer to, he has reference to specific information in the following articles:

70That is, to 28 new articles,—say 2800% additional gain.

Observe, too, that this is a gain that cannot be expressed in figures. The index references are classified. First there is a main head Insurance; then subheads, Fire, Life, Marine, Title, Workmen’s; and under the subheads special topics arranged alphabetically.

In brief, the Index facilitates and accelerates reference to anything in the Britannica that bears on any desired topic.

The article Insurance opens with a definition of that word and with drawing a distinction between it and “assurance.” The general history of insurance traces marine insurance back to Greek commerce in the 4th century B.C., but shows that modern methods of marine insurance were unknown until the 14th century; that fire insurance dates from the 17th century and especially from the Great Fire of London in 1666; and that, although there were a few instances of life insurance in the 16th and 17th centuries, it did not become a regular business until the 18th century and was not widely extended until the 19th century. Separate sections of the article deal with Casualty (or accident) and Miscellaneous Insurance, Fire Insurance, Life Insurance, British Post Office Insurance, and Marine Insurance.

The section on British Post-Office Insurance will give to the American insurance man a knowledge of this innovation in the post-office to which the American post-office seems to be tending, if one may judge by the introduction of postal savings-banks and the adoption of the parcels-post system.

In the same way the article Old Age Pensions will make you acquainted with another radical measure which has been adopted in Great Britain, Germany, France, Denmark, Victoria and notably New Zealand, with fuller description in the article New Zealand. The importance of the subject to the American insurance man lies in the fact that similar schemes are under consideration or actual operation in Massachusetts, New Jersey, and other states of the United States. In the same way the article on Employers Liability and Workmen’s Insurance will give him a wider grasp of the subject of state insurance, mandatory or elective, for workmen.

The principal articles on insurance topics have already been mentioned. It is to be noted, however, that the actuary will find important information in the mathematical articles Mensuration and Probability; that the article Friendly Societies is supplemented by such special articles as Free Masonry, B’nai Brith, Building Societies, Burial Societies, Odd Fellows, etc.

In the Classified List of Articles in the Index Volume the student of insurance will find on page 893 a list of articles in the field of economics and social science, many of which will bear more or less directly on the subject. Among these articles and sub-articles are:

CHAPTER XV
FOR ARCHITECTS

Although architecture is more and more coming to be recognized as one of the fine arts, it is at the same time so largely practical and utilitarian that its theory and methods may to a great extent be gathered from systematic reading. In the article Fine Arts in the Britannica, by Sir Sidney Colvin, it is well said that “The original or rudimentary type of the architect, considered not as a mere builder but as an artist, is the savage, who, when his tribe had taken to live in tents or huts instead of caves, first arranged the skins and timbers of his tent or hut in one way because it pleased his eye, rather than in some other way which was as good for shelter.” Whether the architect wishes to learn how the eye may be pleased, to study critically the history of architecture, or, like the less imaginative savage who failed of being the first inspired architect, to consider comfort and shelter rather than beauty and charm, he will find much to help him in the Britannica. If his interest is chiefly practical, he should consult the chapter For Builders in this Guide.

The architect should read first—and he will constantly be referring to it afterwards—the article Architecture (Vol. 2, p. 369), equivalent in length to 235 pages of this Guide and illustrated by 140 figures, about one-third of which are photogravures. The article is historical in the main and a brief outline of it is as follows:—

The part of the article dealing with Modern Architecture is by H. H. Statham author of a well-known book on the subject. Earlier sections are by R. Phené Spiers, late master of the Royal Academy’s Architectural School, with sections on the Romanesque and Gothic in France by W. R. Lethaby, principal of the Central (London County) School of Arts and Crafts.

Before continuing his more systematic historical readings the student may well read the article House (Vol. 13, p. 810), illustrated with 12 figures (3 plates), including four particularly fine examples of “half timbered buildings,” and one English house, the Jew’s House at Lincoln, dating from the 12th century. An interesting article on Mural Decoration (Vol. 19, p. 16) is by a remarkably distinguished trio: William Morris, poet, craftsman and painter, John Henry Middleton, late Slade professor of fine art, Cambridge, and Walter Crane, the well-known illustrator and decorator. This is illustrated with 16 figures in black and white and with a reproduction in colours of a wall-painting from a Roman villa of the early Empire. The article deals with: reliefs in marble and stone; marble veneer; glazed bricks or tiles; hard stucco; sgraffito; stamped leather; painted cloth; printed hangings and wall-papers; and painting.

If the student of architecture would know about the buildings of prehistoric times, in which there was little architecture in the sense of a fine art, he should read the articles Archaeology, (Vol. 2, p. 344), Lake Dwellings (Vol. 16, p. 91), Stonehenge (Vol. 25, p. 961) and Stone Monuments, Primitive (Vol. 25, p. 962),—the last two of particular interest to the building engineer because it is so puzzling a problem how these great blocks could have been brought such distances and set in place without modern appliances.

Early Oriental Architecture

Engineering problems will be the most interesting in a large part of the student’s reading about Egyptian architecture. Supplementing the 4,000 or 5,000 words on this subject under Architecture, accompanied by seven illustrations, there is much information in the articles Egypt (Vol. 9, p. 21); Abydos (Vol. 1, p. 81) and Karnak (Vol. 15, p. 680); and in the articles Pyramid (Vol. 22, p. 683), (by W. M. Flinders Petrie) and Sphinx (Vol. 25, p. 662) by Francis Llewellyn Griffith, another well-known Egyptologist. In the former article the author points out that the outside and inside work on all the pyramids was excellent and that the casings were not a mere veneer but were “of massive blocks, usually greater in thickness than in height, and in some cases (as at South Dahshur) reminding the observer of horizontal leaves with sloping edges.” The massive character of the roofing of the sepulchral chambers is indicated by Prof. Petrie’s estimate that “in Pepi’s pyramid it is of three layers of stone beams, each deeper than their breadth, resting one on another, the thirty stones weighing more than 30 tons each.” But neither Stonehenge nor the pyramid was really an engineering problem. Here, and as in all his studies of early architecture, artist or engineer will find religion and worship the aim and the reason of the building even more, if that is possible, 73than in the great European cathedrals of comparatively recent times.

In the article Babylonia and Assyria there is a brief section (Vol. 3, p. 108) on Art, supplementing the treatment under Architecture. It is interesting to note that even in Assyria architecture was trammelled, reactionary, governed by Babylonian styles and using brick and clay because Babylon did, although there was stone in Assyria, and none in Babylonia; and keeping the heavy brick platform foundation which the Babylonian architects had adopted because of the marshy character of their country, although there was no need of such construction in Assyria. Here too the function of architecture was largely as an aid to religion: as shown in the article Nippur (Vol. 19, p. 707), with its description of the “ziggurat” or artificial mountain in the shrine, built probably 40 or 45 centuries B. C. One temple was 272 ft. square, with seven storeys, each smaller than the one below and thus surrounded by a terrace, each dedicated to a planet, each coloured a separate tint, the first probably 45 ft. high, and the total height 160 ft.

In Assyria great palaces of the 9th, 8th and 7th centuries B. C. have been found, and these are probably the earliest large buildings of any architectural importance not religious in their purpose; but this distinction must not be carried too far, for the king was sacrosanct, half priest and half god, and his palace was a shrine.

Greece and Rome

Although the main treatment of Greek and Roman architecture is in the article Architecture, the student should read the articles Greek Art (Vol. 12, p. 470; equivalent to 70 pages in this Guide; written by Percy Gardner, author of Grammar of Greek Art) and Roman Art (Vol. 23, p. 474; equivalent to 40 pages of this Guide; written by H. Stuart Jones, director of the British School at Rome). The article on Greek Art contains 82 illustrations, many of them halftones. It makes clear the dependence of the other fine arts in Greece on architecture—and on religion—in showing that the greatest sculptures were adjuncts to temples, and (p. 471–472) in a discussion of the architecture of Greek temples calls attention to four basal principles of Greek architecture:

(1) Each member of the building has one function and only one, and this function controls even the decoration of that member. Pillars support architraves; their perpendicular flutings emphasize this. Moulding at a column’s base suggests the support of a great weight.

(2) Simple and natural relations prevailed between various members of a construction.

(3) Rigidity of simple lines is avoided; scarcely any outline is actually straight. Columns are not equidistant.

(4) Elaborate decoration is reserved for those parts of the temple which have, or seem to have, no strain laid upon them.

The article Temple (Vol. 26, p. 603) gives plans and general information about Greek and Roman sacred architecture, as well as Hebrew, Egyptian and Assyrian temples; and the reader should study the article Parthenon (Vol. 20, p. 869) and the diagram in that article, and the article Pergamum (Vol. 21, p. 142) and the two plates which accompany it.

The article Roman Art (Vol. 23, p. 474) is probably the first brief and authoritative treatment of a topic long overshadowed in popular interest by the earlier art of Greece and the later art of Italy. It begins with a history of recent research. Architecture, pre-eminently the most Roman of the arts as combining utility with beauty, is outlined (pp. 476–477 especially) and the main point in regard to Roman architecture is brought out as follows: “the specific 74achievement of the Roman architect was the artistic application of a new set of principles—those which are expressed in the arch, the vault and the dome,” as contrasted with the rectilinear buildings of the Greeks. The arch, particularly the triumphal arch, is specifically a Roman product and is specifically Roman besides in being an expression of reverence for governmental authority,—which, it should, however, be remembered, cannot be separated from religion. Among the most important of Roman sculptures and particularly reliefs are those of the arches, described in the articles Arch (Vol. 2, p. 342) and Triumphal Arch (Vol. 27, p. 297), the latter with eight figures. The part of the article Aqueduct which deals with Roman aqueducts (Vol. 2, pp. 241–243, with 2 plates, 6 illustrations) will interest the architect as well as the contractor or engineer. And he should read the article on the Roman architect and writer on architecture, Vitruvius (Vol. 28, p. 150), whose book so strongly affected the Renaissance.

Before taking up modern architecture as distinguished from ancient, the student will do well to examine the architecture of some more remote peoples—for instance,

Modern Architecture

The last topic will serve as a transition to the modern architecture of Europe, especially because the influence of the Byzantine was so strong in the early church.

The study of the Italian Romanesque and Gothic in an elaborate section of Architecture (Vol. 2, p. 391) may well be supplemented by reading the articles on the Italian cities in which this art is preserved. The following list is roughly chronological, the cities named first being those in which there are the oldest churches.

Ravenna, Pisa and Venice, for Byzantine Romanesque.
Milan for Lombard Romanesque
Pavia
Brescia
Bergamo
Piacenza
Parma
Modena
Bari for Southern Romanesque
Molfetta
Palermo for Sicilian Romanesque
Messina
Monreale
Cefalu
Würzburg, for Romanesque in Germany
Genoa for Italian Gothic
Assisi
Orvieto
Verona
Perugia
Siena

In the same way, for Gothic in other countries, the student should read:

Aix-la-Chapelle for French Gothic
Le Puy
Angoulême
Arles
Nimes
St. Denis
Noyon
Senlis
Sens
Reims
Le Mans
Oviedo for Spanish Gothic
Leon
Avila
Segovia
Lerida
Toledo
Burgos
Seville
Salamanca
75_
Durham for English Gothic
Lincoln
Salisbury
Gloucester, etc.
Aix for German Gothic
Mainz
Worms
Spires
Cologne
Tournai, Louvain, etc., for Belgian,

and in general, the articles Cathedral, Nave, Aisle, Choir, Apse, Chevet, Lady-Chapel, Vault, Flying Buttress, Pinnacle, Clerestory and Triforium. The article Cathedral has plans of Canterbury, Salisbury, Durham, Ely, Chartres, Sens and Angoulême and a perspective of Amiens cathedral.

In the same way the student of the Renaissance architecture may supplement the section in the article Architecture (p. 408, etc.) by reference to the articles on the cities in which the great Renaissance buildings stand. But now “the career of the individual has to be taken into consideration,” so true is it that the Renaissance in architecture as in scholarship was intensely individualistic. The article Architecture points this out and in this section is largely biographical in its treatment. The reader should study the following separate articles also

For Italian Renaissance

The French Renaissance

For this period, less individual than in Italy, the reader will find it best to study the geographical articles. Let him read

Spanish Renaissance

English Renaissance

76

German Renaissance

Renaissance in Belgium and Holland

On Mahommedan Architecture the student should read not only the section (Vol. 2, pp. 422–427) in the article Architecture, with eight illustrations, but the separate articles

On the more recent period, the 19th century, roughly, the student should supplement the last part of the article Architecture by reading the following articles

For the Classical Revival in the British Isles

English Gothic Revival

France (Figs. 122–129 in article Architecture)

The Last 50 Years

George Frederick Bodley England
R. Norman Shaw
William Morris
Harvey L. Elmes
Charles R. Cockerell
Liverpool (and Fig. 86 in Architecture)
H. H. Richardson United States (and see Plates XV and XVI, and Figs. 97, 98, 99 in article Architecture)
Richard M. Hunt
Charles F. McKim
Stanford White
William R. Mead
Russell Sturgis
Steel Construction

Classical Revival in Germany

French Classicism

English “Commonsense”

The sections of the article Architecture dealing with France and Germany in the last two generations may best be supplemented by a study of the articles Paris, Berlin, Vienna, and Budapest.

The following is a brief alphabetical list of architectural articles and topics in the Britannica, including topics for the builder and contractor.

CHAPTER XVI
FOR BUILDERS AND CONTRACTORS

The Builder’s Problems

The rapid increase in population, and especially in its density, the congestion in great cities, with the consequent building up of suburbs; and the equally rapid upward tendency in the scale of comfort, are factors of modern civilization which make the work of the builder and contractor increasingly complex. The good builder is probably much commoner than ever before, in spite of the popular impression that building materials are poorer and that construction work is more often “scamped” than they used to be. Increased transportation facilities make the builder much less dependent on local and often inadequate materials. And there has been a change in the theory and practice of government: the old easy-going policy has been abandoned, and new laws, strictly enforced, have resulted in such inspection and control of building operations as would have seemed tyranny to the builder of a generation ago and as make modern buildings, especially in cities, much safer than ever before. Insurance companies have done much to the same end.

There is a general prejudice against the modern builder on the part of the temperamental “praiser of the past.” Occasionally similar complaints are made even against the builders of the past. Kipling sings:

Who shall doubt the secret hid
Under Cheops’ pyramid
Was that a contractor did
Cheops out of several millions?
Or that Joseph’s sudden rise
To Comptroller of Supplies
Was a fraud of monstrous size
On King Pharaoh’s swart civilians?

The mere duration of the pyramids, undamaged except by the hand of man, is an answer to such a charge; and in the Britannica article Pyramid the reader will find (Vol. 22, p. 683) that even where the hidden material was rubbly or of mud 80bricks, “the casings were not a mere veneer, but were of massive blocks, usually greater in thickness than in height”—in other words, that the construction was of the best character.

But the builder must be a far better-informed man under present conditions than ever before. To give him the necessary information there is a large and growing literature ranging from builders’ and contractors’ pocket manuals to special periodicals. This literature is expensive, and like all special literature puts the intending purchaser in a difficult position, for if he buys it all, he must pay much more than the returns from his purchase warrant, and he will then have to read it all and use his own judgment in deciding what is best. If he does not buy all, he must be an expert, not merely in every branch of his business but in the bibliography of his business, to make a wise selection,—and if he is sufficiently expert for this he will probably need no such library. But he will find, to a remarkable degree, the best of all that there is in such special literature in the Encyclopaedia Britannica, with the strongest assurance of its being authoritative, and with the certainty that for an outlay, small in comparison with what he would make for such special information elsewhere, he will get the guidance that he needs for his work and also information as excellent on any other subject that he or any member of his family may wish to pursue.

The key or foundation article for the builder or contractor is Building (Vol. 4, p. 762), by James Bartlett, lecturer on construction, etc., King’s College, London, who has contributed other articles on related topics. The article deals with:

The relation of building to architecture and with building laws and special types of plans according to local governmental requirements

The conditions necessary for a successful building, namely—ease of access, good light, good service, pleasing environment and approaches, minimum cost with true economy, and, for office buildings, ease of arrangement to suit tenants

Construction, its general principles

Materials of construction, especially stone and brick

Particular objects of construction

Foundation walls

Footings to walls

General procedure for an intended building

Builder’s sphere

American building acts

Fire-resisting construction.

This general article is supplemented by the following articles:

Foundation, containing 13 diagrams and paragraphs on: load on foundation; trial boring; construction; types—concrete piers, pile foundations, concrete piles, plank foundations, caissons, well foundations, coffer dams, dock foundations, cantilever foundations, building on sand (at Cape Henlopen, Delaware)

Caisson

Masonry, with 18 diagrams, and with special treatment of tools, including hammers, mallets, saws, chisels, setting tools, hoisting appliances; of seasoning stone; of setting stones; of use of mortar; of bonding; slip joints; footings; walling; random; coursed rubble, ashlar, etc.; backing to stone work; pointing and stonewash. There is also a brief vocabulary of technical terms and a discussion of methods of facing; joints; cramps; dowels; joggles; stone arches; tracery and carving; and the articles Ashlar, Rag-stone, Random

Cement, with 3 figures; description and analysis of Pozzuolanic and Portland cement; mixing; loading of kilns; types of kilns; cement clinker; testing; hydraulic 81lime; Roman cement; natural cements; Passow cement; uses of hydraulic cement; calcium sulphate cements

Concrete, with 16 illustrations and paragraphs on constituents; proportions; mixing; moulds; depositing; strength; durability; convenience and appearance; resistance to fire; cost; artificial stones; steel concrete, including columns, piles, beams, floor slabs, etc.; concrete arches

Mortar, with sections on slaking; hardening; magnesia in mortar; strengths; adhesion, decay, effects of salt and frost; legal restrictions; limes and cements for mortar

Lime

Brick, with sections on brick-clays and brick-making

Brickwork, with 15 diagrams; sections on hollow walls; materials and labor; varieties of bricks; strength of brickwork; mortar; pointing; footing; binding; prevention of damp; arches and plates; chimneys and flues; brick paving

Basement

House, with 17 illustrations

Bungalow

Carpentry, with 36 diagrams showing joints, notching, cogging, dovetail, housing, halving, mortise, tenons, wedging, dowelling, turning-piece, lintel, floors, strutting, partition, half timber construction, braced frame; and descriptive text on these and other topics

Steel Construction, with 4 illustrations; sections on skeleton and steel-cage construction; local laws; protection from corrosion; columns; girders; floors; windbracing; materials; floor-filling; partitions; time and cost of construction

Stone, with sections on constitution, colour, testing, preservatives, natural bed, seasoning, varieties, artificial stone

Marble, a descriptive article, about 4000 words long

Granite, with descriptions and analyses of typical granites

Limestone, about 2500 words

Timber, with paragraphs on: felling timber, conversion of timber—with diagram of bastard and quarter sawing; seasoning; defects; decay; preservation of timber; varieties, with description of the principal coniferous and hard woods—and separate articles on Pine, Fir, Larch, Cedar, Birch, Beech, Chestnut, Walnut, Elm, Teak, Mahogany, Maple, etc.

Half-timber Work

Chimney-piece

Scaffold, with 4 figures; sections on bricklayers’ and masons’ scaffolds, material, erection, gantries, derrick towers, cradles, chimney scaffolds, accidents

Shoring, with 8 figures; sections on raking shores; braces, horizontal or flying shores; needle, vertical and dead, shoring; rules and sizes for all shores

Staircase, divided into architecture and construction, the latter having 4 diagrams, description of dog-legged or newel stair, open newel stair, geometrical stair, circular stair, spiral stairs; a defining vocabulary of technical terms; concrete and stone; moving inclines; local building laws

Baluster

Balustrade

Elevator, with 3 illustrations; paragraphs on history; construction, essentials of design; safety devices; traveling staircases; freight elevators

Parquetry

Ceiling

Roofs, with 23 figures and two plates; with sections on forms of roof, trusses, open timber roofs, mansards; iron roofs, covering materials—felt corrugated iron, zinc, lead, copper, “tin,” slate, tiles, miscellaneous—weight of roofs, building laws; and separate 82articles on Slate, Tile, Tin, Tin Plate, etc.

Plaster Work, with paragraphs on lathing, metal lathing, limes, hair, substitutes for hair, sand, external work, rough stucco, roughcast or pebble-dash, sgraffito, internal work, three coats, moulding, cracks, slabs, fibrous plaster.

Joinery, with 13 illustrations, and treating such topics as: tools and materials; joints, mitre, dovetail, etc.; warping; moulding; flooring, including wood block and parquet; skirting, dados; picture rails; windows, bay windows; shutters; shop-fronts; doors; church work; ironmongery, including hinges, locks, etc.

Door

Doorway

Casement

Windows

Glazing

Stained Glass

Wall Coverings, with sections on marble wall-lining, mosaic, tiles, metal sheeting, tapestry, wall-papers—and see Mural Decoration.

Painter-Work, dealing with paint bases, vehicles, thinners, driers, pigments, enamel, paints, woodwork paints, varnish, gums, French polishes, putty, tools, workmanship, graining, marbling, painting on plaster and on iron, repainting on old work, blistering and cracking, distemper, gilding, etc.

Sewerage

Lighting, with sections on oil, gas and electric lighting

Lightning Conductor

Heating, with sections on open fires, closed stoves, gas fires, electrical heating, oil stoves, low pressure hot water, high pressure hot water, steam heating, hot water supply, safety valves, geysers, incrustation, Lockport central steam supply

Ventilation, with sections on rate of air consumption, ventilation of buildings, with table; chimney draught; other outlets; inlets; window and door ventilation; arrangements in barracks, in public buildings, exhaust cowls; extraction of vitiated air; fans; water spray ventilation; extraction by hot-air shaft; measurement of air; systems in public buildings

Both the builder and contractor will find valuable information to govern their financial relations with their clients in the article Building Societies, of which the American part is by Carroll D. Wright, late United States Commissioner of Labor.

The contractor will find the following articles of importance to him, in addition to those of more particular interest for the builder:

and the article Railway, with the other articles on railway construction listed in the chapter For Railroad Men in this Guide.

For an alphabetical list of the principal articles and topics of interest to builders and contractors, see the end of the chapter For Architects in this Guide.

83

CHAPTER XVII
FOR DECORATORS AND DESIGNERS

All the Arts in One

The decorator and designer is a specialist in his purposes rather than in his methods, and his taste and judgment must be based upon a wide range of information. His selection and combination of decorative factors call for a knowledge of architectural design, of painting, sculpture, furniture, textiles, pottery, enamels, embroideries, laces and all the other arts, crafts and products that contribute to the perfecting of “the house beautiful.” The variety of the materials at his command offers him infinite possibilities of successful achievement, and as many temptations to incoherence and exuberance. The highest success in decoration can be attained only when the designer possesses the resources of all these arts and crafts, and failure perhaps comes oftenest through too exclusive a use of one medium of expression because it is the one with which the designer feels he can most competently deal. The ideal should be not only to employ, but to enlarge, the scope of every contributory medium of form or colour, as Wagner found new possibilities in the use of every musical instrument in one orchestra. This practical usefulness of versatility is clearly indicated in one of the articles, characteristic of the Britannica, where one great expert writes about the work of another. William Morris and Walter Crane have been the leaders of the modern revival of artistic interest in the daily accessories of life; and Crane in the Britannica (Vol. 2, p. 701) says of Morris that his influence is to be attributed to his having “personally mastered the working details and handling of each craft he took up in turn, as well as to his power of inspiring his helpers and followers. He was painter, designer, scribe, illuminator, wood-engraver, dyer, weaver and, finally, printer and paper-maker; and, having effectively mastered these crafts he could effectively direct and criticize the work of others.” Obviously, few men can afford to devote forty years, as Morris did, to the close study and actual practice of all these pursuits, and still fewer could hope to develop so many manual dexterities. But any earnest student can become a competent critic in all these varied fields, and can retain an equal appreciation of all the materials and methods employed, if he will enlarge and refresh his knowledge by constant reading of the best authorities. The comprehensiveness of the Britannica makes it, for such purposes, invaluable to the designer and decorator, no matter how many technical books his working library may contain.

The Influence of Architecture

Since harmony of proportion, the essence of architecture, is also the primary law of interior decoration, the reader of the present chapter may well begin his reading with a number of the articles described in the chapter For Architects, of which only those dwelling most upon the use of ornament and colour need be separately mentioned in this connection. The article Architecture (Vol. 2, p. 369) is by R. Phené Spiers, formerly master of the Architectural School of the English Royal Academy, with sections on special periods and schools of architecture by other famous authorities. Oriental architecture, with its elaboration of detail, is peculiarly suggestive to the decorator, who may be surprised to find, in the Britannica, treatises so highly specialized as Indian Architecture (Vol. 14, p. 84428), by Dr. James Burgess, editor of the standard book on the subject, the History of Indian Architecture; the architectural part of China, Art (Vol. 6, p. 214), by Lawrence Binyon, whose work in the great British Museum collection has made his reputation as one of the foremost modern critics; and Japan, Art (Vol. 15, p. 181), by Capt. Frank Brinkley, whose many years of study in Japan have given him an exceptional mastery of the subject. Among other articles dealing with the decorative aspects of architecture are Order (Vol. 20, p. 176), Capital (Vol. 5, p. 275), and House (Vol. 13, p. 810), with its exquisite full page plates.

Design and Mural Painting

The article Design (Vol. 8, p. 95), by W. R. Lethaby, principal of the Central School of Arts and Crafts, London, contains a passage which the decorator may well bear in mind when he has to contend against the typical client’s unreasoning demand for the sensationalism which, for the moment, is accepted as an evidence of originality, but is always the cause of subsequent dissatisfaction and complaint. “Modern use has tended to associate design with the word ‘original’ in the sense of new or abnormal. The end of design, however, is properly utility, fitness and delight. If a discovery, it should be a discovery of what seems inevitable, an inspiration arising out of the conditions, and parallel to invention in the sciences.” These fifty words are but a millionth part of the contents of the Britannica; but alone they show that the work can practically serve the designer. Mural Decoration (Vol. 19, p. 16), with its delightful reproduction in colour of a wall painting preserved in the National Museum at Rome, and its other illustrations, is by William Morris and Walter Crane, with a section on classical wall paintings by Prof. J. H. Middleton, Slade professor of fine art at Cambridge University. The “furnishing” point of view is considered under other headings (see below). Here the distinguished contributors give an interesting account of marble and stone reliefs, the oldest method of wall decoration; marble veneer, especially appropriate to 14th and 15th century Italian style; wall-linings of glazed brick or tiles; coverings of hard stucco; the recently revived sgraffito method; stamped leather, much used in rooms of the 16th–18th century period; painted cloth; printed hangings and wall-papers, of great antiquity among the Hindus and Chinese but not common in Europe until the 18th century; wall-painting, with description of the characteristic schemes of mural art in ancient and modern times, and methods of execution.

In further connection with this subject the reader should turn to Egypt, Art and Archaeology (Vol. 9, p. 65), by the noted Egyptologist, W. M. Flinders Petrie; Greek Art (Vol. 12, p. 470), by Percy Gardner; Roman Art (Vol. 23, p. 474), by H. Stuart Jones; Painting (Vol. 20, p. 459), by Prof. G. B. Brown, of Edinburgh University, and other authorities; Sculpture (Vol. 24, p. 488), by Professor Middleton and other authorities; Mosaic (Vol. 18, p. 883), by Professor Middleton and H. Stuart Jones, with a practical section on Modern Mosaic (p. 888), by Sir William Blake Richmond, noted for his accomplishments in decorative art. All of these articles are richly illustrated. See further, the chapters on Fine Arts, Painting and Sculpture.

The Wall and the Floor

Wall-Coverings (Vol. 28, p. 279), by James Bartlett, of Kings College, London, deals with the subject in its practical relation to house furnishing, with reference to the conditions of the room, the use to which it is to be put, its lighting aspect, and its outlook. There is much information about the employment of marble, mosaic, tiles, metal sheeting, tapestry, and wall-papers; and 85separate articles will be found on the following materials: Marble (Vol. 17, p. 676), by J. S. Flett; Tile, Wall and Floor (Vol. 26, p. 971), illustrated, by William Burton; Leather (Vol. 16, p. 330), illustrated, by Dr. J. G. Parker; Tapestry (Vol. 26, p. 403), by A. S. Cole, an admirable historical account, fully illustrated, and giving information on varieties of design, indications of date, the marks of makers, modern tapestry weaving, etc. Bayeux Tapestry (Vol. 3, p. 555) is an interesting historical account by the antiquarian, J. H. Round, of this venerable relic executed by order of the half-brother of William the Conqueror; it is illustrated with two plates containing 11 views of the tapestry.

In the matter of Floor-coverings there are the articles Floor-Cloth (Vol. 10, p. 527), Parquetry (Vol. 20, p. 861), and Carpet (Vol. 5, p. 392), illustrated, by A. S. Cole, devoted to descriptions of carpets and rugs as designed and manufactured in Europe and Oriental countries.

Furniture

The next group of topics begins with the article Furniture (Vol. 11, p. 363) with 36 illustrations by J. G. Penderel-Brodhurst. The classified Table of Articles in the Britannica (Vol. 29, p. 888) indicates over 75 articles on separate pieces of furniture, but in this general treatise we have a concise history, describing periods and styles, with many interesting facts about the origin and use of different pieces of furniture from the earliest time to the “art nouveau” of very recent date. Some of the noteworthy separate articles, which have been written by Mr. Penderel-Brodhurst, are Chair (Vol. 5, p. 801); Desk (Vol. 8, p. 95); Table (Vol. 26, p. 325), and Bed (Vol. 3, p. 612). See also Marquetry (Vol. 17, p. 751). For those who wish to preserve unity of style in furnishing a room, these articles will prove of the highest value. A full list is appended to this chapter; and the reader should consult the chapter in this Guide For the Manufacturer of Furniture.

Textile Fabrics

The decorator and designer must be familiar with all manner of fabrics, and the Britannica contains an immense fund of information in regard to the nature, manufacture and use of textiles. For purposes of study a beginning would perhaps here be made with the article Weaving, which is in two parts. The first, Industrial Technicology and Machinery (Vol. 28, p. 440) with 28 illustrations, is by T. W. Fox, professor of textiles in the University of Manchester. Very useful will be found the classification of weaving schemes into groups, from which we learn the distinctive weaves of plain cloth, twills, satins, damasks, compound cloths, repps, piled fabrics, chenille, velvets and plushes, gauze, etc. All weaving machinery is described. The second part, Archaeology and Art, is written by A. S. Cole. It is a most interesting and valuable account of the origin of various textiles, and the periods to which they are appropriate. There are many illustrations of typical designs of silk, brocade and flax weavings.

The investigation of woven fabrics reveals the fact that the almost endless variety of effects obtained is due in part only to the method of weaving. Consequently, it is necessary for the student, in order to acquire an expert knowledge of the character and effect on any textile product which he wishes to employ, to have access to the information in the articles Bleaching (Vol. 4, p. 49) illustrated; Mercerizing (Vol. 18, p. 150); Dyeing (Vol. 8, p. 744) illustrated, and with an elaborate classification of colouring matters—acid, direct, and developed colours; Finishing (Vol. 10, p. 378) illustrated, and Textile Printing (Vol. 26, p. 694), illustrated. The fact that this fine series of articles has been prepared 86by Dr. Edmund Knecht, professor of technological chemistry, University of Manchester, assisted by noted authorities like the late J. J. Hummel, professor of dyeing, University of Leeds, and A. S. Cole, is a guarantee of their great interest and value.

In the matter of the fabrics themselves, under Cotton, Cotton Goods and Yarn (Vol. 7, p. 275) will be found descriptions of many cotton fabrics, and see also Silk (Vol. 25, p. 96) illustrated, by Arthur Mellor and other authorities; Wool, Worsted, and Woolen Manufactures (Vol. 28, p. 805) illustrated, by Prof. A. F. Barker of Bradford Technical College; Linen and Linen Manufactures (Vol. 16, p. 724) by Thomas Woodhouse, head of the weaving and textile designing department, Technical College, Dundee. Those who desire a closer scientific knowledge of fibres may obtain it from Fibres (Vol. 10, p. 309), illustrated, by the well-known English analytical chemist, C. F. Cross. There are separate articles on Brocade (Vol. 4, p. 620); Muslin (Vol. 19, p. 93); Canvas (Vol. 5, p. 223); Chintz (Vol. 6, p. 235); Cretonne (Vol. 7, p. 431); Gauze (Vol. 11, p. 357) and other textiles. A full list of these materials is appended.

The article Lace (Vol. 16, p. 37) is one of the most notable contributions to the Britannica. It is written by A. S. Cole, author of Embroidery and Lace, Ancient Needle Point and Pillow Lace, etc., and has over 60 illustrations. A full history of lacemaking is given, and the article is of the highest interest throughout. There exists no better manual on the subject than this, and the pictures alone will enable the student to distinguish the different varieties. Embroidery (Vol. 9, p. 309) by A. F. Kendrick, keeper of the Victoria and Albert Museum, and A. S. Cole, has 18 illustrations and describes the characteristics of the art as practised by different nationalities. Gold and Silver Thread (Vol. 12, p. 200), also by A. S. Cole, is a general and historical account of the gold and silver strips, threads and gimp used in connection with varieties of weaving, embroidery and twisting and with plaiting or lace-work.

Arts and Crafts

Before taking up the specific objects of art used in interior decoration and furnishing, attention must be called to the many articles of great value to those engaged in all arts and crafts-work whose success depends upon a sound knowledge of methods and the principle of design. In Arts and Crafts (Vol. 2, p. 700) Mr. Walter Crane gives an account of the recent movement in the arts of decorative design and handicraft that has for its object the adornment of the house. Handicraft workers will find valuable material, discussing designs, methods and tools, in Needlework (Vol. 19, p. 339); Wood-carving (Vol. 28, p. 791) fully illustrated, by F. A. Crallan, author of Gothic Wood-carving; Carving and Gilding (Vol. 5, p. 438); Metal-Work (Vol. 18, p. 205) illustrated, by Professor Middleton of Cambridge University, with sections on Modern Art Metal-work by John S. Gardner, and on Industrial Metal Work by J. G. Horner, author of Practical Metal Turning; Medal (Vol. 18, p. 1) illustrated, by M. H. Spielmann, formerly editor of The Magazine of Art; Glass, Stained (Vol. 12, p. 105) illustrated, by Lewis Foreman Day, late vice-president of the Society of Arts; Spinning (Vol. 25, p. 685) by Professor Fox; Basket (Vol. 3, p. 481) with an account of the basket-making industry and methods employed, by Thomas Okey, examiner in basket-work for the City of London Guilds and Institute; Embossing (Vol. 9, p. 308); Chasing (Vol. 5, p. 956); Repoussé (Vol. 23, p. 108); Enamel (Vol. 9, p. 362) a very complete historical and technical article, fully illustrated, by Alexander Fisher, author of The Art of Enamelling on Metals; Japan, Cloisonné 87Enamel (Vol. 15, p. 189); Inlaying (Vol. 14, p. 574). Much knowledge about primitive shapes and designs may be obtained from Archaeology (Vol. 2, p. 344) by Dr. Charles H. Read of the British Museum, Aegean Civilization (Vol. 1, p. 245) by D. G. Hogarth, the explorer, Scandinavian Civilization (Vol. 24, p. 287), and America, Archaeology (Vol. 1, p. 810) by the late O. T. Mason, of the National Museum, Washington. These articles are beautifully illustrated.

Portable Ornaments

Some of the articles on art objects have already been mentioned; in addition to them there is Ceramics (Vol. 5, p. 703), equivalent to 133 pages of this Guide, with over 100 illustrations including 10 full-page plates, six of which are colour. This magnificent article is the joint contribution of six special authorities and describes the art of pottery and porcelain manufacture, potter’s marks, etc., in all countries and at all periods, with the exception of Japanese ceramics, for which see Japan, Art, Ceramics (Vol. 15, p. 183). Glass (Vol. 12, p. 86) has a section on the History of Glass Manufacture (p. 97) in which glassware from the primitive vessels of ancient Egypt to modern wares is discussed and illustrated. The authors of this valuable account are Alexander Nesbitt, who wrote the descriptive catalogue of glass vessels for the South Kensington Museum, and H. J. Powell, of the Whitefriars Glass Works, London. Plate (Vol. 21, p. 789) illustrated, is the joint product of H. Stuart Jones, formerly director of the British School at Rome; H. R. H. Hall, of the British Museum, and E. Alfred Jones, author of Old English Gold Plate. It contains unusually full information about hall-marks. There are also separate articles on Pewter (Vol. 21, p. 338) and Sheffield Plate (Vol. 24, p. 824) by Malcolm Bell, author of Pewter Plate, etc.

Clock has a section Decorative Aspects (Vol. 6, p. 552), by J. G. Penderel-Brodhurst. Fan (Vol. 10, p. 168) by the late J. H. Pollen, author of Ancient and Modern Furniture and Woodwork, devotes special attention to styles of fan painting. Ivory has a well-illustrated section on Ivory Sculpture and the Decorative Arts (Vol. 15, p. 95) by A. O. Maskell, author of Ivories, etc. Mirror (Vol. 18, p. 575); Frame (Vol. 10, p. 773), and Screen (Vol. 24, p. 477) are likewise useful articles for the decorator and furnisher. Terracotta (Vol. 26, p. 653) illustrated, by H. B. Walters of the British Museum, and William Burton, deals with the use of this material in architecture and sculpture, describes its manufacture, and contains an historical and critical discussion of subjects and types. Byzantine Art by W. R. Lethaby contains a section, Metal Work, Ivories, and Textiles (Vol. 4, p. 910).

The subject of Lacquer (Vol. 16, p. 53) is further treated under Japan, Lacquer (Vol. 15, p. 188), a part of a very elaborate discussion of all forms of Japanese art, including especially Painting and Engraving (Vol. 15, p. 172), which, as well as China, Art (Vol. 6, p. 213), will be referred to constantly by all who are interested in Oriental handiwork and design.

Biographies

A great number of the biographies in the Britannica will possess much interest for the decorator and designer. Some of the noteworthy names of modern times are Morris, William (Vol. 18, p. 871); Crane, Walter (Vol. 7, p. 366); Tiffany, Louis C. (Vol. 26, p. 966); La Farge, John (Vol. 16, p. 64); Richmond, Sir William Blake (Vol. 23, p. 307); Chippendale, Thomas (Vol. 6, p. 237); Hepplewhite, George (Vol. 13, p. 305); Sheraton, Thomas (Vol. 24, p. 841); Gibbons, Grinling (Vol. 11, p. 936).

88

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO THOSE ENGAGED IN DECORATING, DESIGNING, INTERIOR FURNISHING AND ALL FORMS OF ART HANDICRAFT

90

CHAPTER XVIII
FOR RAILROAD MEN

There are no less than six distinct classes of articles in the new Encyclopædia Britannica which contain information of peculiar interest to railroad men:—

1. Articles on continents contain authoritative and original accounts of trans-continental routes and traffic. For example the article Europe has a table in which the 19 chief avenues of trade are analyzed, showing the direct distance, the distance by sea and the distance by rail from point to point; another table comparing railroad developments in the various parts of Europe, and also an account of the contour of Europe from the railroad man’s point of view, discussing the mountain ranges pierced by tunnels and the passes over which lines have been carried wholly or largely in the open.

Six Classes of Articles

2. The articles on separate countries, on the individual states of the Union, and on colonies contain detailed accounts of the railway systems. For example, the article France describes the six great French railroads, traces their lines and explains the financial system by which they were constructed, the concessions granted to them by the French government, and the extent to which direct state ownership and management has been adopted.

3. The articles on cities show the relation of each centre to the general railroad system of the country and describe the terminals and the methods of urban communication. For example, in the article Berlin there is an account of the Stadtbahn, carried through the heart of the city, 20 feet above the street, providing for through traffic as well as for suburban service.

4. The maps as well as the many plans of cities, all of which were specially prepared for the Britannica, show much more clearly than does an ordinary atlas, the present development of railroads in all parts of the world.

5. The articles on various branches of engineering and mechanics, described in other chapters of this Guide, are complete treatises on the technical subjects connected with railroad construction and management.

6. The articles devoted exclusively to the subject, of which a brief account is given in the present chapter, are those to which railroad men will naturally first turn.

The key article is Railways (Vol. 22, p. 819), equivalent in length to more than 120 pages of this Guide. It is written by the foremost authorities on the subject both in the Old World and in the New, including:

Technical Authorities

Arthur Twining Hadley, president of Yale University, and author of Railroad Transportation.

Hugh Munro Ross, author of British Railways and editor of the Engineering Supplement of the London Times.

Ray Morris, formerly managing editor of the Railway Age Gazette of New York and author of Railroad Administration.

Lt. Col. H. A. Yorke, C.B., chief inspecting officer of railways of the English Board of Trade.

Prof. Frank Haigh Dixon, of 91Dartmouth College, author of State Railroad Control.

Braman Blanchard Adams, associate editor of New York Railway Age Gazette.

William Ernest Dalby, professor of engineering in the South Kensington Central Technical College, and author of The Balancing of Engines, etc.

William Barclay Parsons, formerly chief engineer to the New York City Rapid Transit Commission and advisory engineer of the Royal Commission on London Traffic.

Maj. Gen. C. E. Webber, founder of the Institute of Electrical Engineers.

Emile Garcke, managing director of the British Electric Traction Co., Ltd., author of Manual of Electrical Undertakings.

The Key Article

The article opens with an introductory historical summary which describes the use of railways or tramways before the invention of the steam locomotive in mining districts in England (just as in the article Mauch Chunk, Vol. 17, p. 903, early mine transportation in America is described) and the way in which their use induced the development of high speed locomotives and how the first American trans-continental railroads were built. The student will find next a section of general statistics of railway mileage for the world, with a summary of American railway building, especially in the Far West since 1896. The following section is on economics and legislation in general, followed by separate treatment of British railway legislation and of American railway legislation. The great problem of government control and operation of railways as practised in various European countries is also discussed and is of interest in connection with contemporary American tendencies. The safety of railway transportation is treated in a section containing in compact form the most valuable classified statistics. A section on Financial Organization compares American and British conditions in a most illuminating way.

Of even greater importance to the technical student are the remaining sections of this great article, namely:

(1) Construction, with subsections on Location, Cuttings and Embankments, Gradients, Curves, Gauge, Permanent Way (including ballast, ties, fish-plates and other rail joints, and rails), Bridges, Rack (or cog) Railways, Cable Railways, Mono-Rail Systems, Switches and Cross-overs, Railway Stations (for passengers and for freight), Round Houses for Locomotives, and Switching Yards. This treatise on construction is equivalent to 22 pages of the type and size of this Guide, and is in itself an adequate brief manual for the use of the construction engineer, with valuable illustrations in the text.

(2) Locomotive Power, including subsections on Fundamental Relations, Methods of Applying Locomotive Power, General Locomotive Efficiency, Analysis of Train Resistance, Vehicle Resistance, Engine Resistance, Maximum Boiler Power, Draught, The Steam Engine, Tractive Force, Engine Efficiency, Piston Speed, Compound Locomotives, Balancing of Locomotives, Classes of Locomotives, Current Developments. This section of the article is a little longer than the preceding,—it would fill 25 pages of this Guide,—and has illustrations, tables, and formulae. It is written by Prof. Dalby, the principal British authority on locomotives.

(3) Rolling Stock, dealing with dining, sleeping, passenger and vestibule cars, wood and metal, their heating and lighting and their weight and speed; with freight cars, their weight and speed; and with car-couplers and brakes.

(4) Intra-Urban, or city street railways, elevated and underground, by W. B. Parsons, formerly chief engineer of the New York Rapid Transit Commission.

(5) Light Railways for rural and interurban 92service and portable railways.

Other Major Articles

The next article to be read is Tramway (Vol. 27, p. 159), dealing with the earliest railways used in coal mines, American and English, without locomotive power; and with modern street railways,—surface lines, steam, cable and electric, the last being subdivided into three classes, overhead or trolley, open conduit and closed conduit. The different types of street cars are discussed, and there are summaries of legislation and of commercial results, with general statistics.

The article Traction (Vol. 27, p. 118, equivalent to more than 20 pages of this Guide) is by Louis Duncan, formerly head of the department of electrical engineering in the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. It deals principally with electric traction and thus supplements the article Tramway. Steam traction, as treated in the section on Locomotive Power in the article Railways, by Prof. Dalby, may be studied further in the article Steam-Engine (Vol. 25, p. 818), and especially that part of the article which deals with locomotives (§ 104, p. 841).

The civil engineer engaged in railway work will profit by reading, besides the articles already mentioned: Professor W. C. Unwin’s article (Vol. 4, p. 533) on Bridges, especially pp. 545 and 547 seq., dealing with railway bridges; and the article Tunnel (Vol. 27, p. 399), by H. A. Carson, engineer-in-charge of the Boston Subway and of the East Boston Tunnel, which would make about 30 pages if printed in the form of this Guide. This article classifies tunnels into river, mountain and town (subway) tunnels, and gives special information about rail corrosion and ventilation in tunnels.

The equipment engineer will add to the topics already listed (cars, engines, etc.) the article Signal, § Railway Signalling (Vol. 25, p. 73; as long as 15 pages of this Guide), by B. B. Adams, of the Railway Age Gazette, and H. M. Ross, of the London Times Engineering Supplement; and Brake (Vol. 4, p. 414).

Legislation

On the history of railroading and on statistics there is much information in the Britannica in local articles. It has already been remarked that each article dealing with a state of the United States, or any of the commercial countries of the world, has a section on Communications, giving railway mileage and describing the principal railway lines in the area; and that articles on cities and towns give accurate and minute information about railway service. In pursuing the study of legislation bearing on railways, and especially on rate legislation, the student should read the article Interstate Commerce (Vol. 14, p. 711), by Prof. Frank A. Fetter of Princeton University, a part at least of the article Trusts (Vol. 27, p. 334), by Prof. J. W. Jenks, of New York University (formerly of Cornell), parts of the article on the history of the United States, in the same volume, especially pp. 315, 316, 353, 367, 394, 395, 396, 406, 407, and, in separate state articles, the sections on laws and history, notably North Carolina for the rate cases of 1907 (Vol. 19, p. 778), Nebraska for the maximum freight rate of 1893 (Vol. 19, p. 329), Wisconsin on radical rate legislation and on physical valuation for ad valorem tax of railways (Vol. 28, p. 744).

Biographies

The biographical articles in the new Britannica also have much important information for the student of railways.

Among the names of inventors whose lives are outlined are: Thomas Newcomen (Vol. 19, p. 475), James Watt (Vol. 28, p. 414), Matthew Boulton (Vol. 4, p. 324), George and Robert Stephenson (Vol. 25, pp. 888 and 889), Richard Trevithick (Vol. 27, p. 256), Oliver Evans (Vol. 10, p. 2), John Ericsson (Vol. 9, p. 740), Peter Cooper (Vol. 7, p. 80), and Sir Marc I. 93Brunel (Vol. 4, p. 682); among the names of engineers and railway and bridge builders George Parker Bidder (Vol. 3, p. 918), Thomas Brassey (Vol. 4, p. 435), John Cockerill (Vol. 6, p. 625), Erastus Corning (Vol. 7, p. 174), James Buchanan Eads (Vol. 8, p. 789), Sir William Fairbairn (Vol. 19, p. 129), Sir John Fowler (Vol. 10, p. 761), James Henry Greathead (Vol. 12, p. 398), Sir John Hawkshaw (Vol. 13, p. 99), William Kingsford (Vol. 15, p. 817), Sir Robert Gillespie Reid (Vol. 23, p. 50), John Rennie (Vol. 23, p. 101), and J. A. Roebling (Vol. 23, p. 450); and among railway financiers,—to take only a few American names,—the Vanderbilts (Vol. 27, p. 885), Jay Gould (Vol. 12, p. 284), Asa Packer (Vol. 20, p. 441) and E. H. Harriman (Vol. 13, p. 18).

In such articles as Strikes and Lock Outs (Vol. 25, p. 1024) and Trade Unions (Vol. 27, p. 140), each with American sections by Carroll D. Wright, late U. S. Commissioner of Labor, the reader will find valuable assistance in studying railway economics as affected by the relations of labour and capital.

For marine transportation see the next chapter in this Guide.

The following is a brief list of articles, and of sections of articles, of interest to all railroad men:

94

CHAPTER XIX
FOR MARINE TRANSPORTATION MEN

Problems of the Near Future

The immediate future of marine commerce cannot fail to be very greatly affected by changed conditions. No one believes that England, Germany, France, Russia, Austria, Japan and China will be able, before the middle of the century, to establish a stable adjustment of the international difficulties which surround them. No one knows what changes the Panama Canal may make in the movement of freights within the first ten years of its operation. No one knows to what industry the United States may next apply the methods by which the country has created the age of steel.

Coal and the steam engine may both, within a few years, be displaced as factors in marine transportation. Sweeping tariff changes in the United States, in Great Britain and in Germany may vitally affect the movement of freights. Transatlantic passenger traffic, not only a huge business in itself, but also important, so long as it is sea-borne, in its effects upon transatlantic freights, may become aerial instead of marine.

Technical Subjects

Confronted by the approach of a period so full of changes, the uttermost alertness of outlook is merely elementary prudence on the part of everyone engaged in the business of marine transportation; and the new Britannica reviews all the many fields of knowledge which are of importance in this connection. It supplies technical information regarding the construction of ships, the management of shipping lines, marine engines of every kind, shipboard and waterside appliances for the handling of cargo, the development of harbours and the dredging and embankment of rivers, the building of docks, warehouses and dry docks, ship canals and canal locks, navigation, lighthouses, lightships, buoys, lanes of traffic, marine insurance, cold transport—every conceivable subject with which shipping men are concerned. Articles by contributors in twenty different countries, deal with all the world’s ports, industries, exports, imports and shipping. The financial and legal aspects of the business are exhaustively covered. Tariffs, legislation affecting marine transportation, and such questions of international policy as the command of the sea, the right of search, and the position of neutrals in wartime are discussed by the highest authorities.

In addition to all this, the Britannica articles on these and similar subjects contain historical sections which, in conjunction with the articles on the history of all countries, show how past changes, as sweeping as these which are now anticipated, have affected commerce. Whether your present position—or the position you are endeavouring to make for yourself—in relation to shipping is such that this coming period of transition promises to affect you favourably or unfavourably, you need to be forewarned and forearmed, prepared to keep what you have or get what you want.

An Outline of Sea Trade

A course of reading should always begin with the study of general principles, in order that in your subsequent and more detailed examination of the field, the relative importance of each fact that you master may be appreciated. The Britannica provides, in the article 95Commerce (Vol. 6, p. 766), a bird’s-eye view of the whole subject of marine transportation. The article would not fill more than 16 pages of this Guide; you can read it (and digest it as you read it, so clear is it) in an hour, and yet it will give you such a grasp of the whole science—for it is a science—of international trade that you will spend another hour in assorting and classifying, in your own mind, a mass of impressions you had received before, at school or in the course of casual reading, impressions which have not been so useful to you as they should have been because they had not been systematically arranged. There is no text book in existence which outlines the subject so fully and clearly as does this one brief article—about one five-thousandth part of the total contents of the Britannica.

This article will arouse your interest in the direct relation between commerce, past, present and future, and the progress of civilization. You will realize that the man who has any part in the vast shifting of cargoes from one part of the world to another is distributing ideas and ideals and ambitions as well as commodities, and in the article Civilization (Vol. 6, p. 403), by Dr. Henry Smith Williams, editor of The Historians’ History of the World, you will see how harbours receive and send on to the inlands the influences as well as the manufactures of the more advanced communities.

From these articles you should turn to the three great articles which deal with the methods by which these wonderful results are accomplished. These three are Ship, Shipbuilding and Shipping, all in volume 24, and equivalent to about 420 or 425 pages of this Guide. These three articles contain hundreds of illustrations, more than forty being full page plates. They are by the most eminent authorities. Sir Philip Watts, director of naval construction for the British Navy, designer of the Dreadnoughts and the Super-Dreadnoughts of the British Navy, as well as of the “Mauretania” and the “Lusitania,” chairman of the Federation of Shipbuilders, and naval architect and director of the warshipbuilding department of Armstrong, Whitworth & Co., Ltd., wrote the articles Shipbuilding and Ship (except the history of ships before the invention of steamships, which is by Edmund Warre, provost of Eton, well-known as a writer on nautical history). The article Shipping is by Douglas Owen, lecturer at the Royal Naval War College and author of Ports and Docks.

In brief, these three articles in length, contents,—both text and illustrations,—and authorship, make up a remarkable book on the subject, valuable either as a text-book or a work of reference for the ship builder, the marine engineer or the student of shipping.

Story of the Ship

Taking the articles separately, the article Ship begins with a section of nearly 10,000 words on the early development of ships. It suggests that shells floating on the water or the nautilus may first have suggested the use of a hollowed tree-trunk for transportation—the first boat or “ship” (the word comes from the same root as “scoop”) as distinct from a raft. The evolution of boat building is traced,—from dug-out to bark- or skin-covered frame, built like modern racing-shells sometimes ribs first and then skin laid on and sometimes shell first and then ribs inserted. In spite of the great length of the period during which such boats were used—of course they are still used by more primitive peoples,—it is interesting to notice that there were local variations which never became general, such as the outrigger and weather platform, used in the South Pacific and not found elsewhere.

Egyptian vessels we may study in the excellent early tomb-paintings still preserved, 96and one of these shows a ship, not a canoe or large boat, such as was in use from 3000–1000 B. C., fitted with oars and a mast in two pieces which could be lowered and laid along a high spardeck.

The Phoenicians did more than the Egyptians to develop ship and navigation, and a Phoenician galley of the 8th century B. C. is shown in an Assyrian wall painting. The Phoenicians probably sailed out of the Mediterranean, to Britain for tin, or even around Africa.

Greek ships and shipbuilding we know from a full and varied national literature, from the figures on coins and vases, and from the discovery in 1834 at the Peiraeus, the port of Athens, of records of Athenian dockyard superintendents for several years between 373 and 324 B.C. We have besides descriptions, partly technical, showing the point of view of the engineer or architect, written by Roman authors. The article gives a critical account of the Greek types of vessels. The growth of Roman shipping seems to have been due primarily to political reasons and to have advanced slowly but surely,—practical devices being introduced to solve special difficulties in a field and on an element where the Romans were far from being at home. A five-tiered Carthaginian galley which had drifted ashore served the Romans as a model for their first war-ship, and with crews taught to row in a framework set up on dry land they manned a fleet which was launched in sixty days from the time that the trees were felled.

Mast and Sail

Passing quickly over the remainder of the earlier period, which the reader will find treated in full in the article Ship, he should notice that the sailing vessel came into use gradually for merchant use, but that galleys (propelled by oars) were long the only type for warships. There were some galleys even in the Spanish Armada of 1588. In the meantime the invention of gunpowder and the development of artillery brought about changes in size and in form, with a notable tendency to more masts and a greater spread of sail. The discoveries of the 15th and 16th centuries and especially the consequent expansion of trade in the 17th century, all tended to increase the size and efficiency of sailing ships. The end of the 18th and the beginning of the 19th century marked the highest point in the development of American sailing ships. “The Americans with their fast-sailing ‘clippers’ taught the English builders a lesson, showing that increased length in proportion to beam gave greater speed, while permitting the use of lighter rigging in proportion to tonnage, and the employment of smaller crews. The English shipyards were for a long time unequal to the task of producing vessels capable of competing with those of their American rivals, and their trade suffered accordingly. But after the repeal of the Navigation Laws in 1850, things improved and we find clippers from Aberdeen and the Clyde beginning to hold their own on the long voyages to China and elsewhere.”

The revolution in marine transportation by the introduction of steam is summed up by Sir Philip Watts as follows:

Before steam was applied to the propulsion of ships, the voyage from Great Britain to America lasted for some weeks; at the beginning of the 20th century the time had been reduced to about six days, and in 1910 the fastest vessels could do it in four and a half days. Similarly, the voyage to Australia, which took about thirteen weeks, had been reduced to thirty days or less. The fastest of the sailing tea-clippers required about three months to bring the early teas from China to Great Britain; in 1910 they were brought to London by the ordinary P. & O. service in five weeks. Atlantic liners now run between England and America which maintain speeds of 25 and 26 knots over the whole course, as compared with about 12 knots before the introduction of steam.

Iron Hulls

The introduction of iron for wood began about the same time as the substitution 97of steam for sails, and there was even more prejudice against it. This was due not merely to the sentiment attaching to the oaken timbers that typified “hearts of oak,” or to the “Wooden Walls of England.” In all seriousness it was objected that iron would not float! It was feared that iron bottoms would be more easily perforated when ships grounded; but this was found not to be the case when construction was careful. It was proved that fouling of iron bottoms from weeds and barnacles might be remedied by frequent cleaning and repainting. The most serious objection against iron was that it affected the compass; but in 1839 Sir G. B. Airy laid down rules for the correction of compass errors due to iron in construction. But even to-day wood is preferred for the construction of ships for scientific expeditions to the Polar regions where the slightest disturbance of the compass is to be avoided. Iron and steel (first used in shipbuilding to any extent in 1870–75) have three advantages over wooden ships: less weight; greater durability; greater ease in securing the necessary general and local strengths. But while iron was coming into use largely because it is more durable, there was a great increase in the durability of wooden ships, due to the improved knowledge of wood-preservation. At the end of the 18th century 15 or 20 years was the average life of a wooden ship; but there are several instances of ships built in the first decade of the 19th century—or even earlier—which were still in commission at the beginning of the 20th century.

Early Steamships

Full details are given in regard to the first ships used for canal and river navigation in Great Britain and the United States; the comparatively rapid adoption of steam vessels on the Irish and English channels; and the first steamships to make long trips—the American-built “Savannah” which crossed the Atlantic in 1819 in 25 days using steam only a part of the time, the “Enterprise” which went from London to Calcutta in 1825 in 103 days (64 under steam), the “Sirius,” the “Great Western,” etc. All these were propelled by paddle-wheels. Jet propulsion had been suggested by Benjamin Franklin in 1775 and was tried several times with some success. But the greater success of the screw-propeller, perfected by Colonel John Stevens and Captain John Ericsson, soon caused jet-propulsion to be abandoned. The screw-propeller made possible—and was quickly followed by—great improvements in engines; the gearing used with paddles was soon given up for direct-acting engines—compound about 1854, triple-expansion in 1874.

Statistics of shipping for all countries are given in tables and diagrams equivalent to 18 or 20 pages of this Guide.

A brief summary outline of the remainder of this article Ship is all that can be given here.

Merchant Vessels

Sailing Ships

Barges, Smacks or Cutters, Schooners, Brigs and Brigantines

Steamships

Types: Turtle-back, etc. Cargo Ships: Modern Developments, Great Lake Freighters, Oil Tank Steamers, Motor Tank Vessels. Passenger Steamers: Ferries, River and Sound, Cross-Channel, Ocean Liners (Atlantic: Canadian, Emigrant Vessels, Liners on other Routes; Pacific Liners). Special Vessels (Dredge, Train Ferries, Ice Breakers, Surveying Vessels, Lightships, Coastguard and Fishery Cruisers, Salvage and Fire Vessels, Lifeboats, Yachts). Propulsion by Electricity, by Naphtha Engines, by Internal Combustion Engines

War Vessels

Battleships and Armour Protection; 98Sir E. J. Reed and the British Navy Turret Ships; American Monitor; Sir Nathaniel Barnaby in England; the work of Sir W. H. White; Development from 1885 to 1902; The “Dreadnought” type—in England, United States, Germany, France, Japan, Russia, Italy, Austria, Brazil, Argentina, etc., with Table, “Development of Some of the Leading Features of Notable Armored Battleships from 1860 to 1910.”

Cruisers, Second-Class Cruisers, Third-Class, Armored Cruisers, Dreadnought Cruisers, Cruisers in Different Navies

Gunboats and Torpedo Craft and Torpedo-boat Destroyers

Submarines: American experiments in the 18th Century; inventions of Holland and Nordenfeldt; the Goubet System in France; Submarines in different navies.

History of Shipping

The article Shipping (Vol. 24, p. 983) is devoted to the history and practice of maritime transportation. It outlines the early period of trade, and the contest for trade among Spain, Portugal, the Netherlands and England, especially in the period after the discovery of America, when the prizes of commerce became suddenly so much richer. The Navigation Act of 1651, confining the trade between England and her colonies and the British coasting trade to English ships, was followed by a rapid growth of English shipping. The tonnage doubled between 1666 and 1688. In the 18th century and into the 19th, the history of shipping was primarily a contest for trade between France and England, finally won by the latter. The 19th century, as has already been seen in the article Ship, was marked by the adoption of steam as a motive power. The struggle for supremacy in the Atlantic trade and in commerce with China and the Far East between the United States and Great Britain was won by the latter largely for this reason—the American ship-builders clung to the sailing clipper too long—and they were too slow in adopting iron instead of wooden hulls. The American Civil War was an additional set-back to American commerce. Other great factors during the last 50 years in the development of shipping, treated in the article, may be catalogued here:

The opening of the Suez Canal in 1869.

Improved apparatus for fire prevention.

Refrigerating machinery, making possible the shipment of meats and other foods.

Germany’s merchant marine.

Japanese merchant vessels.

French efforts to get trade.

The shipping combine of 1902.

“Liners” and “Tramps.”

The freight rate question and increased tonnage.

Special passenger transport: tourists, emigrants, etc.

Instructions for the Ship-Builder

The third of the main articles is Shipbuilding (Vol. 24, p. 922) by Sir Philip Watts. The article is equivalent to 200 pages of this Guide, and the illustrations include more than 120 working drawings. A brief outline of the article is all that can be given here.

Stability: Equilibrium, Stability of Equilibrium, Transverse Stability, Small Inclinations, Metacentric Heights, Inclining Experiment, Large Inclinations, Curves of Stability, Effect of Freeboard, Effect of Beam, Effect of Position on Centre of Gravity, Geometrical Properties, Dynamical Stability, Sailing Ships, Longitudinal Stability, Stability when Damaged, Stability in any Direction.

Rolling of Ships: Unresisted Rolling—Froude’s Theory, Resisted Rolling, Methods of Reducing Rolling 99(Bilge-Keels, Water Chambers, Gyroscope).

Resistance: Components of Force, Wake, Frictional Resistance, Law of Comparison, Model Experiments, Experimental Results.

Propulsion: Experimental Results, Cavitation.

Strength: Longitudinal Bending, Transverse Bending.

Steering: Nature of Forces when Turning, Heel when Turning, Types of Rudders, Experimental Results.

Process of Design

Ship-yard Work

Course of Construction

Armour

Structural Arrangements

Longitudinal System as used in New London, Conn.; Great Lake steamer; British cargo steamer; Atlantic liner; Differences between war and merchant ships; Auxiliary Machinery.

A Dictionary of Ships and Shipping

The student should read the article Navy and Navies (Vol. 19, p. 299) and refer to the Chapter For Naval Officers.

The following is a partial list of the articles in the Britannica of particular value to the marine transportation man.

100

CHAPTER XX
FOR ENGINEERS

What “Engineering” Includes

The history of a word will sometimes supply the key to the gradual development of an art. “Engineering” was originally used to describe a mere branch of military science, the construction of fortifications and the trenching and sapping needed for their capture. Then about a century and a half ago the use of the phrase “civil engineering” came into use to indicate the broadening of the engineer’s functions to civil pursuits, but even then it served for a long time chiefly to describe surveying, road-making and bridge building. To-day, the specialized knowledge of engineers of one kind or another directs or facilitates every branch of industry. Consider for a moment the handling of iron, which, as the Britannica article Iron and Steel shows, has become the most indispensable of all substances save air and water, because we can find no substitute for it that possesses its strength, the hardness and the pliability we can give to it, and its magnetic properties, upon which all our electrical work depends. The mining engineer is concerned with the ore, the mechanical engineer with the machinery employed in its treatment; the transportation of the finished iron or steel depends upon the skill of the engineers who construct railroads and ships; the structural engineer shapes our buildings from the girders and erects them on the sites indicated by the surveying engineer; the sanitary engineer makes them wholesome, and the electrical engineer provides them with the many convenient appliances we need. Various primitive races have believed that the earth is supported upon the back of a tortoise, an elephant, or a fish; but when we begin to look into the origin of the surroundings we have made for ourselves, we cannot carry our examination very far before we find that almost everything we possess begins with a blueprint.

It seems a paradox, and yet it is true, that the more a man’s profession tends to specialization, the more help he can get from the comprehensiveness of the Britannica. He finds it necessary to dig so deep that the shaft he sinks must perforce be of narrow diameter, limiting his daily vision to but a small circle of the broad sky above him. The engineer of each class has his own text books, but at any moment his work may bring him into temporary relation with allied subjects which they do not cover, and in connection with which he may need trustworthy information. There is certainly no other book which surveys so authoritatively and minutely as does the Britannica the whole field of applied science. The services rendered by the 73 engineering experts—German, American, English, French and Italian—who collaborated in the production of the work are not to be measured only by the articles they wrote; for the advice and 101assistance many of them gave the editors in planning the book as a whole, ensured such treatment as an engineer would desire of many subjects indirectly connected with his work.

Mathematical Articles

The engineer will naturally turn first to the mathematical articles, which may be described as text-books of the most concise and useful nature, written by leading mathematicians of the age. Algebra (Vol. 1, p. 599) is by Dr. Sheppard, and G. B. Mathews, formerly professor of mathematics, University College of North Wales; Algebraic Forms (Vol. 1, p. 620) by Major P. A. Macmahon, formerly president of the London Mathematical Society; Geometry (Vol. 11, p. 675), Euclidean, Projective, Descriptive, by Dr. Henrici, professor of mathematics, Central Technical College of the City and Guilds of London Institute; Analytical, by E. B. Elliott, Waynflete professor of pure mathematics, Oxford; Line, by B. A. W. Russell, author of Foundations of Geometry, etc., and Dr. A. N. Whitehead of Trinity College, Cambridge; Axioms, by Dr. Whitehead; Trigonometry (Vol. 27, p. 271) by Dr. E. W. Hobson of Cambridge University; Surveying (Vol. 26, p. 142), Geodetic Triangulation, Levelling, Topographical Surveys, and Geographical Surveying, by Sir Thomas Holdich, formerly superintendent of Frontier Surveys, India; Nautical, by Vice-Admiral A. M. Field, R.N., author of Hydrographical Surveying, etc.; Geodesy (Vol. 11, p. 607) by Col. A. R. Clarke of the British ordinance survey, and Prof. F. R. Helmert of the University of Berlin; Logarithm (Vol. 16, p. 868) by Dr. J. W. L. Glaisher, editor of the Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied Mathematics; Mechanics (Vol. 17, p. 955), Statics, Kinetics, by Dr. Horace Lamb, professor of mathematics, University of Manchester; Theory of Structures, Theory of Machines, Applied Dynamics, by Dr. W. J. M. Rankine, late professor of civil engineering, Glasgow University, and W. E. Dalby, professor of civil and mechanical engineering, City and Guilds of London Institute; Dynamics (Vol. 8, p. 756) by Professor Lamb; Differences, Calculus of (Vol. 8, p. 223), by Dr. W. F. Sheppard; Infinitesimal Calculus (Vol. 14, p. 535) by Dr. A. E. H. Love, secretary of the London Mathematical Society; Variations, Calculus of (Vol. 27, p. 915), by Dr. Love; Quaternions (Vol. 22, p. 718) by Alexander McAulay, professor of mathematics and physics, University of Tasmania; Diagram (Vol. 8, p. 146), by Dr. James Clerk Maxwell, the noted physicist; Mensuration (Vol. 18, p. 135) by Dr. Sheppard; Table, Mathematical (Vol 26, p. 325), by Dr. J. W. L. Glaisher; Units, Physical (Vol. 27, p. 738), by Dr. J. A Fleming, professor of electrical engineering, University of London; Units, Dimensions of (Vol. 27, p. 736), by Sir Joseph Larmor, secretary of the Royal Society, England; and Calculating Machines (Vol. 4, p. 972), with 24 illustrations, is by Professor Henrici.

These admirable treatises as well as the article Drawing, Drawing-Office work (Vol. 8, p. 556), by Joseph G. Horner, will be useful to all engineers, and in the special field of civil engineering the following partial list of articles will convey some idea of the scope of the material to which the professional man has immediate access.

Articles for Civil Engineers

Bridges (Vol. 4, p. 533), with 72 illustrations, diagrams, etc., is a thorough discussion of the subject by Dr. William C. Unwin, emeritus professor of engineering, Central Technical College, City and Guilds of London Institute, author of Wrought Iron Bridges and Roofs, etc. This article covers the whole theory of bridge design, and describes all the typical structures from the timber 102Pons Sublicius of ancient Rome, the bridge Horatius defended, to the Manhattan Bridge over the East River at New York. Roads and Streets (Vol. 23, p. 388); River Engineering (Vol. 23, p. 374), with 26 illustrations, by the late L. F. Vernon-Harcourt, professor of civil engineering, University College, London, and author of Rivers and Canals, etc.; Jetty (Vol. 15, p. 359), with 6 illustrations, and Pier (Vol. 21, p. 588), illustrated, also by Prof. Vernon-Harcourt; Dredge and Dredging (Vol. 8, p. 562), with 13 illustrations, by William Hunter, consulting engineer for Waterworks to Crown agents for the Colonies.

Hydraulics (Vol. 14, p. 35), with 213 illustrations, is by Prof. W. C. Unwin—an article in which the whole theory and practice of water-power, including discussions of water-motors and turbines, are brought fully up to date by the designer of the first water-motors at Niagara, the section dealing with hydraulic machines occupying 25 pages; Hydromechanics (Vol. 14, p. 115) by Sir Alfred George Greenhill, formerly professor of mathematics in the Ordnance College, Woolwich; Ventilation (Vol. 27, p. 1008), illustrated, by James Bartlett; Water Supply (Vol. 28, p. 387), with 20 illustrations, diagrams, and maps, by Dr. G. F. Deacon, formerly engineer-in-chief for the Liverpool Water Supply; Aqueduct, Modern Construction (Vol. 2, p. 244), by E. P. Hill; Sewerage (Vol. 24, p. 735), with 29 illustrations, by James Bartlett; Irrigation (Vol 14, p. 841).

Canal (Vol. 5, p. 168), by Sir E. Leader Williams, chief engineer of Manchester Ship Canal during construction, is an interesting article. There are also separate articles on great engineering undertakings, such as Panama Canal (Vol. 20, p. 667); Manchester Ship Canal (Vol. 17, p. 550) by Sir E. Leader Williams; Suez Canal (Vol. 26, p. 22). It will surprise many readers to learn that the project of a ship canal across Central America was considered as early as 1550, when a book demonstrating its feasibility was published in Portugal. Only a year later the King of Spain was strongly urged, in a memorial presented by De Gomara, the Spanish historian, to undertake the work.

Railways and Transportation

Tunnel (Vol. 27, p. 399), with many plans and illustrations, by H. A. Carson, in charge of designing and constructing the Boston Subway; Dock (Vol. 8, p. 353), with illustrations and plans; Caisson (Vol. 4, p. 957); Breakwater (Vol. 4, p. 475), with 16 illustrations; Harbour (Vol. 12, p. 935), illustrated; Reclamation of Land (Vol. 22, p. 954), with 13 illustrations. The last five articles are by Professor Vernon-Harcourt; Lighthouse (Vol. 16, p. 627), with 59 illustrations, by W. T. Douglass, who erected the Eddystone and Bishop Rock Lighthouses, and Nicholas G. Gedye, chief engineer to the Tyne Improvement Commission; Shipbuilding (Vol. 24, p. 922), with 125 illustrations—a complete treatise on the subject by Sir Philip Watts, director of naval construction for the British Navy; Traction (Vol. 27, p. 119), illustrated, by Prof. Louis Duncan, of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology; Tramway (Vol. 27, p. 159), illustrated, by Emile Garcke, managing director of the British Electric Traction Co., Ltd.; Railways (Vol. 22, p. 819), a magnificent composite article, fully illustrated, in which the Introduction and the sections on Construction and Rolling Stock are by H. M. Ross, editor of The Times Engineering Supplement; General Statistics and Financial Organization, by Ray Morris, formerly of the Railway Age Gazette, New York, and author of Railroad Administration; Economics and Legislation, by Arthur T. Hadley, president of Yale University; American Railway Legislation, by Prof. Frank H. Dixon, of Dartmouth College, 103author of State Railroad Control; Accident Statistics, by B. B. Adams, associate editor, Railway Age Gazette; Intra Urban Railways, by W. B. Parsons, formerly chief engineer, Rapid Transit Commission, New York, and Light Railways, by C. E. Webber of the Royal Engineers, and Emile Garcke. No book on the subject has ever before contained so great a collection of expert knowledge as this article presents.

Structural Engineering

In regard to construction, engineers will find most valuable for reference and study the elaborate treatises Strength of Materials (Vol. 25, p. 1007), with 42 diagrams and illustrations, by Prof. J. A. Ewing, and Elasticity (Vol. 9, p. 141), with 32 diagrams, by Prof. A. E. H. Love. Notable articles in this connection are Iron and Steel (Vol. 14, p. 801), illustrated, by Dr. H. M. Howe, professor of metallurgy, Columbia University; and Steel Construction (Vol. 25, p. 861), illustrated. It is interesting to note that early in the 19th century a tall shot-tower was built in New York city by erecting a braced cage of iron and filling in the panels with masonry. Stone (Vol. 25, p. 958); Masonry (Vol. 17, p. 841), with 18 illustrations; Brickwork (Vol. 4, p. 521), with 15 illustrations—these four articles by James Bartlett, lecturer on construction at King’s College, London; Cement (Vol. 5, p. 653), illustrated, by Bertram Blount, hon. president, Cement Section of International Association for Testing Materials, Budapest; Concrete (Vol. 6, p. 835), with 16 illustrations, by F. E. Wentworth-Shields, dock engineer of the London and South-Western Railway; Mortar (Vol. 18, p. 875); Foundations (Vol. 10, p. 733), with 13 illustrations; Timber (Vol. 26, p. 978); Roofs (Vol. 23, p. 697), with 23 illustrations; Scaffold (Vol. 24, p. 279) illustrated; Shoring (Vol. 24, p. 1004), illustrated—the last six by James Bartlett.

For the Mechanical Engineer

The Engineering Section of the new Britannica provides an equal wealth of authentic material for members of other branches of the profession. It is impossible to indicate the exact lines of demarcation between these branches, and many articles are of use to all engineers alike; but in the special field of mechanical engineering there are Thermodynamics (Vol. 26, p. 808) by Dr. H. L. Callendar, professor of physics, Royal College of Science, London; Steam Engine (Vol. 25, p. 818) by Prof. Ewing, more than 30 pages long, with 68 illustrations. This article, with its up-to-date section on turbines, is one of the many in the engineering department of the Britannica which have been said by technical critics to merit separate publication as text-books. But such articles are all the more useful because they form part of one great library of universal knowledge. Other mechanical articles are Air Engine (Vol. 1, p. 443), illustrated, also by Professor Ewing; Gas Engine (Vol. 11, p. 495), illustrated, by Dugald Clerk, inventor of the Clerk Cycle Gas Engine; Oil Engine (Vol. 20, p. 35), illustrated, also by Dugald Clerk; Boiler (Vol. 4, p. 141), with 20 illustrations, by James T. Milton, chief engineer surveyor to Lloyd’s Registry of Shipping, and Joseph G. Horner, author of Plating and Boiler Making; Injector (Vol. 14, p. 570); Water Motors (Vol. 28, p. 382), illustrated, by T. H. Beare, Regius professor of engineering in the University of Edinburgh; Windmill (Vol. 28, p. 710), illustrated, by Professor Unwin; Fuel (Vol. 11, p. 274), illustrated, Solid Fuels by Hilary Bauermann, of the Ordnance College, Woolwich; Liquid Fuel, by Sir James Fortescue-Flannery, formerly president of the Institute of Marine Engineers; Gaseous Fuel, by Dr. Georg Lunge, 104professor of technical chemistry at the Zurich Polytechnic; Gas, Gas for Fuel and Power (Gas producers) (Vol. 11, p. 490), illustrated, also by Professor Lunge.

Power Transmission (Vol. 22, p. 224), illustrated, Mechanical, by Professor Dalby; Hydraulic, by Edward B. Ellington, chief engineer of the General Hydraulic Power Co., Ltd.; Pneumatic, by A. de W. Foote, superintendent of the North Star Mining Co., California; Pulley (Vol. 22, p. 641), illustrated, by Dr. Ernest G. Coker, professor of mechanical Engineering in the City and Guilds of London Technical College; Pump (Vol. 22, p. 645), illustrated; Brake (Vol. 4, p. 413), illustrated; Tool (Vol. 27, p. 14), with 79 illustrations, by Joseph G. Horner; Cranes (Vol. 7, p. 368), with 21 illustrations, by Walter Pitt; Elevators (Vol. 9, p. 263), illustrated, by G. F. Zimmer, author of Mechanical Handling of Material; Lubricants (Vol. 17, p. 89) by R. M. Deeley, joint author of Lubrication and Lubricants; Pneumatic Despatch (Vol. 21, p. 865) by H. R. Kempe, electrician to the General Post Office, London; Gyroscope and Gyrostat (Vol. 12, p. 769), illustrated, by Sir Alfred Greenhill; Motor Vehicles (Vol. 18, p. 914), with 37 illustrations—Light, by the Hon. C. S. Rolls, late managing director of the Rolls Royce Co., Ltd.; Heavy Commercial Vehicles, by Edward S. Smith, editor of The Commercial Motor; Railways, Locomotive Power (Vol. 22, p. 842) by Professor W. E. Dalby.

For the Electrical Engineer

The key article describing the general principles of electrical engineering is Electricity Supply (Vol. 9, p. 192), illustrated, by Emile Garcke, but at the immediate service of the electrical engineer there also stand Dynamo (Vol. 8, p. 764), with 42 illustrations, by C. C. Hawkins, author of The Dynamo; Power Transmission, Electrical (Vol. 22, p. 233) by Dr. Louis Bell, chief engineer, Electric Power Transmission Dept., General Electric Co.; Conduction, Electric (Vol. 6, p. 855), Conduction in Solids by Professor Fleming; in Liquids, by W. C. D. Whetham; in Gases, by Sir J. J. Thomson, a Nobel prize-winner and professor of experimental physics at Cambridge; Electrolysis (Vol. 9, p. 217) by W. C. D. Whetham; Electrokinetics (Vol. 9, p. 210), illustrated; Electrostatics (Vol. 9, p. 240); Electromagnetism (Vol. 9, p. 226), illustrated; Units, Physical, Electrical Units (Vols. 27, p. 740); Galvanometer (Vol. 11, p. 428), illustrated; Electrometer (Vol. 9, p. 234), illustrated; Amperemeter (Vol. 1, p. 879), illustrated; Voltmeter (Vol. 28, p. 206), illustrated; Ohmmeter (Vol. 20, p. 34), illustrated; Wattmeter (Vol. 28, p. 419)—all of these by Professor Fleming; Potentiometer (Vol. 22, p. 205); Accumulator (Vol. 1, p. 126), with 24 illustrations and diagrams, by Walter Hibbert, of the London Polytechnic; Transformers (Vol. 27, p. 173), with 15 illustrations and diagrams, and Wheatstone’s Bridge (Vol. 28, p. 584), illustrated, by Professor Fleming; Motors, Electric (Vol. 18, p. 910), by Dr. Louis Bell; Meter, Electric, (Vol. 18, p. 291), by Professor Fleming; Lighting, Electric (Vol. 16, p. 659), with 16 illustrations, by Professor Fleming, and a chapter on its commercial aspects, methods of charging, wiring of houses, testing meters, etc., by Emile Garcke; Telegraph (Vol. 26, p. 510), fully illustrated, Land and Submarine Telegraphy, by H. R. Kempe; Wireless Telegraphy, by Professor Fleming, and Commercial Aspects, by Emile Garcke; Telephone (Vol. 26, p. 547), illustrated, by H. R. Kempe and Emile Garcke; Traction, Electric (Vol. 27, p. 120), illustrated, by Professor Duncan. An admirable historical sketch of electricity will be found in Electricity (Vol. 9, p. 179), by Professor Fleming, which contains also an account of the development of electric theory.

American Practice in Mining

105It is typical of the policy pursued in making the new Britannica that the Editor placed the mining section in the hands of American experts, since they are universally regarded as the best in the world. This entire section is a worthy monument to American learning and practice.

The key-article Mining (Vol. 18, p. 528), fully illustrated, is by Dr. Henry Smith Munroe, professor of mining in Columbia University. This covers every branch of the subject, but further discussion of its special phases is continued in Mineral Deposits (Vol. 18, p. 504) by Dr. James F. Kemp, professor of geology, Columbia University; Quarrying (Vol. 22, p. 712) by Dr. F. J. H. Merrill, formerly state geologist of New York; Ore-Dressing (Vol. 20, p. 238), illustrated, by Dr. R. H. Richards, professor of mining and metallurgy, Massachusetts Institute of Technology; Shaft-Sinking (Vol. 24, p. 766), illustrated; Boring (Vol. 4, p. 251), illustrated; Blasting (Vol. 4, p. 44), illustrated—the last three by Robert Peele, professor of mining in Columbia University.

The Metallurgical Section

Metallurgy (Vol. 18, p. 203) describes in outline the general sequence of operations. Assaying (Vol. 18, p. 776) is by Andrew A. Blair, formerly chief chemist U. S. Geological Survey. See also Metal (Vol. 18, p. 198). Metalography (Vol. 18, p. 202), illustrated, is an account of the new and important method of microscopical examination of alloys and metals by Sir William Chandler Roberts-Austen; and Francis H. Neville. Alloys (Vol. 1, p. 704), with unique photomicrographs of alloys and metals, is also by the authors of the article Metallography. Annealing, Hardening and Tempering (Vol. 2, p. 70), illustrated, is by Joseph G. Horner, who also writes Forging (Vol. 10, p. 663), which has 19 illustrations, Founding (Vol. 10, p. 743), with 11 illustrations, and Rolling-Mill (Vol. 23, p. 468), with 8 illustrations. The material on Fuel has already been mentioned. Furnace (Vol. 11, p. 358) describes and illustrates all the latest designs. Welding (Vol. 28, p. 501) is by J. G. Horner and Elihu Thomson, who writes on his own invention, Electric Welding.

The mining engineer or metallurgist will have in the new Britannica constantly at his elbow a complete series of articles dealing with the mining and metallurgy of all minerals and metals. Professor Howe’s exhaustive article Iron and Steel has already been noted in another part of this chapter. A few of the other important articles are Copper (Vol. 7, p. 103); Gold (Vol. 12, p. 192); Silver (Vol. 25, p. 112); Lead (Vol. 16, p. 314); Tin (Vol. 26, p. 995); Zinc (Vol. 28, p. 981); Manganese (Vol. 17, p. 569); Aluminum (Vol. 1, p. 767) by E. J. Ristori, member of Council, Institute of Metals. Safety-Lamp (Vol. 23, p. 998) is written by Hilary Bauermann. The latest mining statistics of all countries are to be found under their respective headings.

Biographies of Engineers

Military men are familiar with the lives and deeds of great soldiers; lovers of art and literature know something of the careers of their favorites; but as a rule the engineer knows little or nothing about the lives of the great ornaments of his profession, the splendid heroes of peace who have done much more than the soldier and the artist to create the world of to-day. The reason for this is that engineering biographies are very scarce, and in this connection the new Britannica fills a positive gap in the engineer’s library. There are considerably more than 100 biographies of great engineers, living and dead, written in the most interesting fashion by authoritative 106contributors. Among these articles are Watt, James (Vol. 28, p. 414) by Professor Ewing; Arkwright, Sir Richard (Vol. 2, p. 556); Stephenson, George (Vol. 25, p. 888); Bessemer, Sir Henry (Vol. 3, p. 823); Whitworth, Sir Joseph (Vol. 28, p. 616); Rennie, John (Vol. 23, p. 101); Lesseps, Ferdinand de (Vol. 16, p. 494) by Henri G. S. A. de Blowitz; Eads, James B. (Vol. 8, p. 789); Edison, Thomas A. (Vol. 8, p. 946); Ericsson, John (Vol. 9, p. 740); Maxim, Sir Hiram (Vol. 17, p. 918); Roebling, John A. (Vol. 23, p. 450); Siemens, Sir William (Vol. 25, p. 47) by Professor Ewing; Telford, Thomas (Vol. 26, p. 573); McAdam, John L. (Vol. 17, p. 190), and Trevithick, Richard (Vol. 27, p. 256).

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST TO ENGINEERS

109

CHAPTER XXI
FOR PRINTERS, BINDERS AND PAPER-MAKERS AND ALL WHO LOVE BOOKS

From Manuscript to Book
Supply and Demand Interacting

“An author, even an immortal genius, is, from the economic point of view, a producer of raw material,” says the Britannica article Publishing, and from the educational point of view, his product, until it has undergone the industrial and commercial processes of reduplication and distribution, is as undeveloped as the seed lying hidden in the winter soil. The history of civilization might, indeed, be divided into four stages: the period before writing; the period before printing, when libraries of manuscripts were almost exclusively the property of kings and priests; the period of costly, hand-printed books; and the period of the power-press, which began less than a hundred years ago. Of these four periods, the first is almost unimaginable. You are sometimes brought into contact with absolutely illiterate people. But they live in shadow, not in total darkness; they get the diffused light of our age of culture. The second period, the era of books in manuscript we can, however, to some extent reconstruct; and by one fantastic supposition we can even bring it into the focus of our 20th century. Let it be assumed that for some reason the printing of the new Britannica had been enjoined by the law courts, but that the original typoscript was available for consultation—say in a public library at New York or Chicago. Instead of your 29 volumes, weighing only 80 lbs. and occupying only about two cubic feet of space, the walls of a large room would be lined with partitioned shelves on which the 300,000 typed sheets and the 7,000 illustrations, on cardboard, would be ranged. What a mob of students there would be, waiting their turns to read the 40,000 articles, what a mass of notebooks would be filled each day! The impossibility of accomplishing, without the use of printing, all that the Britannica does, will present itself very forcibly to your mind, in another aspect, if you try to imagine 1,500 separate audiences, assembled each day to listen to lectures by the 1,500 contributors to the book. Any attempt to imagine the Britannica doing its work in any way but the way in which it does makes you realize, too, that if it were not for modern methods of spreading knowledge, there would be no such system of assembling and co-ordinating knowledge as finds its fullest development in the Britannica. It is not only for commercial reasons that the demand must be sufficient to justify the supply; the 1,500 specialists who laid aside their usual work in order to write these articles would never have combined their efforts if this vast public of all educated English speaking people 110were not to have been enabled to avail themselves of the result.

The industrial arts which make it possible to produce books swiftly and to sell them at low prices are obviously subjects of interest not only to those who do the producing and selling, but to all who profit by the use of books. And, as the articles mentioned in this chapter show, these arts are in themselves among the most ingenious and curious of all processes; so that in a double sense they merit the attention of everyone to whom the chapters on Literature in this Guide would appeal. As the warp of cloth carries the weft, so the raw material of printers’ paper and printers’ ink carries the “raw material” of the writer’s thoughts.

The article on Paper (Vol. 20, p. 725) is equivalent to 35 pages of this Guide and is illustrated with 15 diagrams. The article is divided into three parts: History, by Sir Edward Maunde Thompson, director of the British Museum; Manufacture, by J. W. Wyatt, author of The Art of Making Paper; and India Paper, by W. E. Garrett Fisher.

History of Paper

The history of paper, like that of so many other great inventions, dates back to an early period in China; and, as is the case with almost every great contribution to civilization which came from China, paper came to the Western world only after many years and only by chance. In the 8th century of the Christian era, when paper had been made in China for 1000 years, some Chinese paper-makers were taken captives in Samarkand by Arabs, who thus learned the methods of its manufacture. The Arabs and the Persians used linen as a base for the paper instead of the cotton the Chinese used; and the name “paper” was transferred from the Egyptian rush and the writing material made from its fibres to the new product. Paper was manufactured in Europe first by the Moors in Spain at Xativa, Valencia and Toledo in the 12th century; and into Italy also it seems to have been brought by the Arab occupation of Sicily. Among other interesting points in regard to the history of paper are: water-marks as a sign of age; old papers; variation in prices of paper; blotting-paper, wrapping paper, etc. The articles Papyrus (Vol. 20, p. 743) and Parchment (Vol. 20, p. 798), both by Maunde Thompson, deal with these earlier writing materials. Palimpsest (Vol. 20, p. 633) describes the processes by which writings which have been scraped or washed from sheets of vellum, so that the material might be used again, can sometimes be chemically restored and deciphered.

Paper Manufacture

In taking up the study of paper manufacture, the first article to be read is Fibres by C. F. Cross, the well-known analytical and consulting chemist, and especially the section in it on Paper-making (Vol. 10, p. 312). This describes the treatment of cotton and flax for writing and drawing papers, wood pulp, esparto, cellulose and cereal straws for printing-paper, etc. See also the article Cellulose (Vol. 5, p. 606) by C. F. Cross. The section on Manufacture in the article Paper, already mentioned, should next be read. Here it is stated that rags, linen or cotton, were the principal materials used for paper in Europe until the middle of the 19th century; and then when prices rose, because the necessarily inelastic supply was no longer sufficient, esparto-grass, wood and straw began to be used as substitutes. The change from hand-making to machinery began in France in 1798 and was accomplished in England in 1803, with the result that hand-made paper is now used only where great durability is the chief requisite, as for bank-notes and drawing paper.

Actual paper manufacture may be divided into two processes: the preliminary cleaning and reduction to pulp; and 111the methods of converting pulp to paper—including beating, sizing, colouring, making the sheet or web, surfacing, cutting, etc. Reduction to pulp is described in the treatment of esparto, straw and wood, and there are cuts showing rag-boiler, rag-breaking engine, esparto boiler, press-pâte or half-stuff machine, esparto bleaching and beating plant, and the Porion evaporator and the Yaryan multiple-effect evaporator for soda recovery.

Paper-making proper, after the pulp has been prepared, is next described. The first process is beating; and besides the esparto bleaching and beating plant, described under bleaching, there are drawings of the Taylor and Jordan beaters and a description of them and of the Kingsland beater. Sizing, loading and colouring are then explained. The other main topics of the section on manufacture are: hand manufacture (with two illustrations), paper machine, with pictures of the paper machine, of the dandy roll, of super-calender and of reel paper cutters, and paragraphs on straining, forming the sheet, shake, water marking and couching, pressing and drying, surfacing, machine power, tub-sizing, glazing or surfacing for better grades, cutting, sheeting, sizes (with table), standards of quality, the paper trade, and a list of the best books on paper.

India Paper

The article Paper closes with a brief history and description of India paper, which is of particular interest because of the adoption and successful use of this paper in the new Encyclopaedia Britannica. In this true India paper, “the material used is chiefly rag,” but “the extraordinary properties of this paper are due to the peculiar care necessary in the treatment of the fibres, which are specially beaten in the beating engine.” The first India paper was brought to England from the Far East in 1841 by an Oxford graduate, and the name India was used merely to express this Oriental origin, as in “Indian ink” or in the name “Indians” as applied to the American aborigines when their home was thought to be a part of the East. Just where the paper came from is not known. It was given to the Oxford University Press and was used in printing a very small English Bible in 1842. This book was only one-third the usual thickness, and attracted much attention by its lightness and by the opacity of the thin tough paper.

In 1874 a copy of this Bible fell into the hands of Henry Frowde, and experiments were instituted at the Oxford University paper mills at Wolvercote with the object of producing similar paper. On the 24th of August 1875 an impression of the Bible, similar in all respects to that of 1842, was placed on sale by the Oxford University Press. The feat of compression was regarded as astounding, the demand was enormous, and in a very short time 250,000 copies of this “Oxford India paper Bible” had been sold. Many other editions of the Bible, besides other books, were printed on the Oxford India paper, and the marvels of compression accomplished by its use created great interest at the Paris Exhibition of 1900. Its strength was as remarkable as its lightness; volumes of 1500 pages were suspended for several months by a single leaf, as thin as tissue; and, when they were examined at the close of the exhibition, it was found that the leaf had not started, the paper had not stretched, and the volume closed as well as ever. The paper, when subjected to severe rubbing, instead of breaking into holes like ordinary printing paper, assumed a texture resembling chamois leather, and a strip 3 in. wide was found able to support a weight of 28 lb. without yielding. The success of the Oxford India paper led to similar experiments by other manufacturers, and there were, in 1910, nine mills (two each in England, Germany and Italy, one each in France, Holland and Belgium) in which India paper was being produced. India paper is mostly made upon a Fourdrinier machine in continuous lengths, in contradistinction to a hand-made paper, which cannot be made of a greater size than the frame employed in its production.

In addition to technical information in regard to paper the student of the manufacture of books must know something about ink.

Ink

112The necessary information he will find in the article Ink (Vol. 14, p. 571) with special descriptions of writing inks, tannin inks, China or Indian ink, logwood ink, aniline ink, copying ink, red and blue ink, marking ink, gold and silver inks, indelible or incorrodible ink, sympathetic ink, and, of the most importance for our present purpose, printing inks.

The process of putting ink on paper is a subject which in the Britannica takes much more ink and paper than the subject of ink or of paper.

Printing

This topic is treated in two main articles: one dealing with type and the other with presses. The former, Typography (Vol. 27, p. 509), is a good sized treatise in itself, being equivalent to more than 135 pages of this Guide. It is divided into two parts: The History of Typography, by John Henry Hessels, author of Gutenberg: an Historical Investigation; and Modern Practical Typography, by John Southward, author of A Dictionary of Typography and its Accessory Arts, and Hugh Munro Ross, editor of The (London) Times Engineering Supplement.

The former part of the article, and the longer, is a very important and elaborate contribution to the knowledge of early printing. On these first developments the student should read the same writer’s article Gutenberg (Vol. 12, p. 739) and should notice the great difficulty surrounding the whole question of the “invention,” obscured by the fact that so many of the documents on Gutenberg exist only in copies, while others seem to be forgeries by two librarians of the city of Mainz who were eager to prove the claims of their fellow citizen Gutenberg to be the inventor of printing with movable metal types. See also Mr. Hessel’s article on Johann Fust (Vol. 11, p. 373). The honour of the invention of typography, Mr. Hessels decides, belongs to Lorens Janszoon Coster of Haarlem and its date was somewhere between 1440 and 1446. In Mexico printing was established in 1544, in Manila in 1590, and in Cambridge, Massachusetts, in 1638 or 1639. The early printers had only a few types of each character in a fount, and they printed books, even small quartos, page by page.

This whole treatment of the history of typography is too elaborate to be summarized here, but it is interesting to note that the article gives information about the history of the earliest types—Gothic, Bastard Italian, Roman, Burgundian, etc., with fac-similes of 13 different and characteristic faces between 1445 and 1479; and of different styles and alphabets—Italic, Greek, Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, Armenian, Ethiopic, Coptic, Samaritan, Slavonic, Russian, Etruscan, Runic, Gothic, Scandinavian, Anglo-Saxon, Irish, Music, Characters for the Blind, Initials, Ornaments and Flowers.

Practical Typography

The second part of the article Typography, on Modern Practical Typography, will be of more value, probably, to most students of printing and book-making. It deals with the following topics:—

Material characteristics of Type. Fount may consist of 275 “sorts” or characters. Numbers of sorts vary with different languages—and with different styles and writers; Dickens draws heavily on vowels, Macaulay on consonants. Bill of type or scheme—how computed.

Logotypes or word character as distinct from letters.

Parts of a type—face, stem, serif, beard, shoulder, shank, belly, back, counter, nick, kern, feet, burr and batter.

Species of letter—short, ascending, descending, long, superior, inferior, fat-faced, lean-faced, bastard.

Sizes: classification by names and by point-system.

Varieties of face: Roman, sanserifs or grotesques; black; script; old style; Caslon; influence of William Morris and the Kelmscott Press; Vale Press.

113Manufacture of type: type metal; punch, drive and matrix (with illustrations); type-casting—by hand and machine; inventions of Bruce, Barth, Wicks, with description and picture of the Wicks rotary type-casting machine.

Type-setting by hand. Type case, with illustration. Composition, justifying. Imposition. Signatures. Forme, quoin, side-stick, foot-stick, shooting-stick. Distributing.

Type-setting by machine. Linotype and Monotype. Earlier machines—the Paige (in which Mark Twain lost a fortune). Distributing machines—Delcambre, Fraser, Empire, Dow, Thorne, Simplex (with cut). Linotype—with diagrams and description. Monotype (the machine used for the Encyclopaedia Britannica) with illustrations of perforated strip.

Electrotyping and Stereotyping. Shells. Turtle, Flong. Wood’s Autoplate process. See also the articles Electrotyping (Vol. 9, p. 252) and Electroplating (Vol. 9, p. 237).

The reader should next turn to the articles Engraving (Vol. 9, p. 645), Line-Engraving (Vol. 16, p. 721), Wood-Engraving (Vol. 28, p. 798)—special reference to America where this method is still used for some book and magazine illustration—to Lithography (Vol. 16, p. 785) including offset printing; and Process (Vol. 22, p. 408), for further information in regard to “printing” apart from (and before) actual press work. The last-named of these articles is by Edwin Bale, art director of Cassell & Company, Ltd.; it would occupy about 20 pages of this Guide; and it is illustrated by a plate showing the three-colour process. The article describes:

(1)—relief processes, line blocks, swelled gelatin process, typographic etching, halftone processes, three colour blocks, colour filters;

(2)—intaglio processes, monotype, electrotype, steel-facing, blanketing, changes in machinery;

(3)—planographic processes, including woodburytype, stannotype, collotype or phototype, heliotype and photolithography. In relation to lithography there is further information in the biographical sketch of Senefelder, its inventor.

Press-Work

The article Printing (Vol. 22, p. 350) deals entirely with the subject of press-work, thus using printing in the narrower and more correct sense of the word. In length this article is equivalent to 25 pages of this Guide; and it contains 9 illustrations of presses. The article is by C. T. Jacobi, author of Printing, and The Printer’s Handbook of Trade Recipes. The article gives a history of the printing press, which was practically unchanged for a century and a half, until the Dutch map-maker Blaeu greatly simplified it. The first important metal press—earlier ones were of wood—was invented by Lord Stanhope nearly two hundred years later. It had greater power with smaller expenditure of labour, and its workings, as well as that of the Blaeu press, and of the Albion, which was used by William Morris at Kelmscott, may be readily understood from the illustrations in the article. Another hand press is the Columbian, invented in 1816 by a Philadelphian, George Clymer, and still in use for heavy hand work. Power presses began to be made at the end of the 18th century, but the presses invented by William Nicholson (1790) and Friedrich König (adopted by the London Times in 1814) printed only on one side at a time, as did the “double platen” machine of a little later date. The cylindrical eight feeder built by Augustus Applegath in 1848 for the London Times and the Hoe Type Revolving Machine are described in the section on the history of power presses, which closes with the story of Bullock’s machine (1865) for printing from a continuous web of paper.

Modern Presses

114The closing section of the article on printing is devoted to a description of modern presses. It opens with a list of the principal types of presses still in use, which are classified under the following seven heads:—

(1)—iron hand-presses like the Albion or Columbian, for proof-pulling or limited editions;

(2)—small platen machines for job or commercial work;

(3)—single cylinder machines (“Wharfedales”) printing one side only;

(4)—perfecting machines, usually two cylinder, printing both sides, but with two distinct operations;

(5)—two-revolution machines with one cylinder;

(6)—two-colour machines, with one cylinder usually, but two printing surfaces and two sets of inking apparatus;

(7)—rotary machines for printing from curved plates upon an endless web of paper—principally for newspapers or periodical work.

These seven classes are next described in detail and the article illustrates them all. A cut of an Albion press is given in an early part of the article, and the other six presses shown in the cuts are:

The Golding jobber platen machine

Payne & Sons’ Wharfedale stop-cylinder machine

Dryden & Foord’s perfecting machine

The Miehle two-revolution cylinder machine

Payne & Sons’ two-colour single cylinder machine

Hoe’s double-octuple rotary machine

The article closes with a discussion of the following very practical topics: the preparation or “make ready” for printing; recent development in printing with cross references to the article Process; and a paragraph on the management of a printing house.

Proof-Reading

From this closing paragraph and the article on Printing, the student is referred to the article Proof-Reading (Vol. 22, p. 438) which is by John A. Black, head press reader of the 10th edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, and John Randall, sub-editor of the Athenaeum and of Notes and Queries and former secretary of the London Association of Correctors of the Press, so that this article, like all the other articles on the subject of book-making, is written by eminent practical authorities on the subject.

Bookbinding

The same is true of the article Bookbinding (Vol. 4, p. 216), which naturally follows in a systematic course of study. This is by Cyril J. H. Davenport, assistant keeper of books in the British Museum and author of History of the Book, etc. This article is illustrated with 14 figures, including 8 in halftone, showing typical fine bindings. The other illustrations show machines and processes used in binding. Besides a historical sketch of book-binding the article treats of the following topics:

Modern methods and modern binding designers; machine binding, machine sewing, rounding and backing, casing, wiring, and blocking. A case-making machine, a casing-in machine and a blocking machine are shown in the illustrations.

A bookbinder or a student of the subject will find a great deal of very valuable information elsewhere in the book, particularly in the article Leather (Vol. 16, p. 330) by Dr. J. Gordon Parker, principal of the Leathersellers Technical College, London, and author of Leather for Libraries, etc. The article occupies the equivalent of 55 pages of this Guide; and the possessor of the Britannica will be interested to know that the leather bindings used for its volumes were all made according to specifications drawn 115up by Dr. Parker, the greatest authority in the world on tanning, curing and dyeing leather for book-bindings.

Publishing and Book-Selling

The last stages in getting the author’s raw material “from him to the ultimate consumer” are those in which the publisher and bookseller play their part; and for a description of their functions the student should refer to the articles on publishing and book-selling in the Britannica. The article Publishing (Vol. 22, p. 628) explains that publishing and book-selling were for a long time carried on together since “booksellers were the first publishers of printed books, as they had previously been the agents for the production and exchange of authentic manuscript copies.” The separation of publishing from book-selling is due to “the tendency of every composite business to break up, as it expands, into specialized departments.” As publishers became a separate class the work of their literary assistants also broke up into specialized departments—proof-reading and the reading of manuscripts submitted by authors—or the work of printers’ readers and publishers’ readers.

The importance of the work of the publisher’s reader is dwelt upon in this article which sketches besides the growth of the Society of Authors in England and of the formation there of the Publishers’ Association and the Booksellers’ Association. The article also outlines the methods of publishing in the United States and gives particular prominence to the effect on the British market of the introduction of American books and of American book-selling methods.

Historical and Miscellaneous Articles

Among other articles of interest to the manufacturer of books are the following: Book (Vol. 4, p. 214) by Alfred William Pollard, assistant keeper of books in the British Museum, gives a general historical description of books and in particular calls attention to the great change in book-prices in the last thirty years. “About 1894 the number of medium-priced books was greatly increased in England by the substitution of single-volume novels at 6s. each (subject to discount) for the three-volume editions at 31s. 6d.... The preposterous price of 10s. 6d. a volume had been adopted during the first popularity of the Waverley Novels and had continued in force for the greater part of the century.” To-day, well printed copies of these novels sell for 1s. in England and for 35 cents in the United States.

It may be added that one of the most striking lessons to be learned from the Britannica, in relation to the improvements and economies effected by the application of the most modern processes to the manufacture of books, is supplied by the consideration of the Britannica itself. The extent of the composition and machinery involved, the accuracy of the proof-reading, the novel employment—upon a large scale—of India paper and flexible bindings, the beauty of the illustrations, and, above all, the low price at which the product is sold, form a combination of the very latest perfections of every department of the industry.

Read too Book-collecting (Vol. 4, p. 221) also by A. W. Pollard; the article Book Plates (Vol. 4, p. 230) by Egerton Castle, illustrated with ten cuts of book plates (which are so well chosen that book plate collectors have not infrequently asked the publishers of the Encyclopaedia Britannica for extra copies so that they might include them in their collections); the article Bookcase (Vol. 4, p. 221) from which the reader may be surprised to learn that “the whole construction and arrangement of bookcases was learnedly discussed in the light of experience by W. E. Gladstone in the Nineteenth Century for March 1890;” and the article Bibliography and BibliOLOGY 116(Vol. 3, p. 908) by A. W. Pollard, supplemented by the article Incunabula (Vol. 14, p. 369).

The following alphabetical list of articles and sections of articles, although it does not profess to be complete, will give the student some idea of the large number of topics connected with the general subject of the manufacture of books:

117

CHAPTER XXII
FOR JOURNALISTS AND AUTHORS

The Development of Style

No writer can consider the use he will make of the tools of his trade—and the Britannica is certainly the chief among them—unless he has very definite views as to the particular kind of work he is trying to do. Where writing is regarded as a business, the art of writing is the art of being read, and the art of being read lies, nowadays, in convincing the reader that you have something fresh to say, rather than in arousing his admiration of your way of saying it. Writing is none the less one of the fine arts: the modern writer must form his style with the utmost care, and always guard himself against the temptation to relax his standards. But the juggling with words, the “rhythmical sequences of recurring consonants,” the musical prose in which sounds are adjusted as artfully as in verse, presuppose readers to whom these elaborations are delightful. Such readers are rare, to-day. Thirty or forty years ago it was a matter of course, in thousands of homes, for some one member of the household to read aloud to the others. The custom has almost disappeared, and there has been a change in public taste, due, perhaps, in great measure to a change in the pace at which people read. A book does not “last” as it did. Newspaper reading has trained the eye and the mind to swifter consumption. The modern professional writer adapts himself to the existing conditions. He knows that those who ride in automobiles do not peer under tufts of leaves to look for roadside violets. But he also knows that they want a straight, smooth road. He endeavors to write as concisely as possible, yet to write so clearly that every point he makes is made once for all; and he can work fully as hard, and apply talents fully as great, in forming a style that pleases by its simple directness—or, better, that pleases because the reader does not think of it as “style,”—as if he were aiming at the most elaborate ornament.

“Vitalized Observation”

In developing the power of clear and concise statement, the first essential is to form the habit of getting your “something to say” absolutely plain to your own mind before you attempt to say it. A writer deliberately strives to be wordy and vague when he is trying to misrepresent facts, and it is impossible, when he is groping for his facts, that he should avoid wordiness and vagueness. The Britannica article on Rudyard Kipling speaks of his “powers of observation vitalized by imagination.” It would be difficult to find a phrase more tersely describing the ideal equipment of a writer, and Kipling’s observation is rapid observation amplified by deliberate investigation. He gets a swift impression of the complex framework of a ship or of the intricate machinery of a locomotive, and then, before he writes “The Ship that Found Herself” or “.007,” he makes as elaborate a technical study as if he were writing an engineering article instead of a story. His imagination so vitalizes the result that when you read the story, although it describes beams and valves you never saw, you recognize the accuracy of his technical description as you recognize, in an art gallery, the fidelity of a portrait, although you never saw the person portrayed. In using the Britannica, the investigation by which you amplify 118your personal observation helps you in four ways. First, you correct your facts if they need correction. Whatever your subject may be, you find information so authoritative that you cannot question it. Second, you amplify your own observations; you discover the underlying causes and relations of the events or opinions you are about to discuss. Third, the reading by which you have, consciously or unconsciously, been influenced in forming your style, is rendered more profitable and stimulating by your study of the Britannica articles in which the work of all the world’s great writers, past and present, is analyzed by the most brilliant critics. |Models of Style| Fourth, you have in the Britannica itself such examples of scholarly, forcible, compacted English as cannot often be found in contemporary books. It is not within the province of this Guide to institute detailed comparisons between these articles by the leading literary men of the day and other writings from the same pens. But the reader will discover for himself that the editorial policy which demanded rigorous concision has stimulated, not hampered, the distinguished writers whose Britannica articles are, in case after case, the best of their productions.

Practical Tests

The foregoing summary of the uses of the Britannica to writers is based upon reviews of the work which have appeared in the daily and weekly press; and it may be supplemented by brief extracts from one or two letters to the publishers, written by men whose reputations give their opinions great weight. In one of these Horace White, formerly editor of the Evening Post of New York, spoke highly of the practical utility of the Britannica. Joseph Pulitzer, of the New York World, shortly before his death wrote: “I want to thank you for the intellectual pleasure I enjoyed this winter in examining this extraordinary production. I have already distributed a dozen sets in America as presents among editors and my children. [He afterwards ordered six more sets.] The work is a liberal education.” John Habberton wrote: “The new edition of the Britannica has already cost me hundreds of hours that I should have given to my work, but I do not regret the outlay, for I have been richly repaid. There never was a handier book for a desk or a more readable one.”

It is not only true that no ordinary library would supply the information to be found in the Britannica, but it is as true, and as relevant, that no ordinary library presents information in a form as stimulating to the writer who uses books as the tools of his trade. The editor-in-chief of the Britannica had all the world’s greatest experts in all fields of human knowledge and endeavour to choose from. He chose in each instance the expert whose knowledge was so thorough, and whose correlation of his special knowledge with related branches was so complete, that his articles are not merely “last word” information but interesting and alive. You may remember the new interest you felt in natural science when you first read an essay by Huxley, because he had the power of creating enthusiasm. It is a justifiable figure of speech to say that, in this sense, the Britannica has been written by Huxleys. Perhaps you have ransacked a public library for some out-of-the-way fact and finally found it, in skeleton form, and in crabbed German, in Meyer or Brockhaus or some other German encyclopaedia. Or did your search end by finding the fact in Larousse or La Grande Encyclopédie, in some clever phrase, so brilliantly written, so strikingly put, that it was the phrase and not the fact that you had got—and you felt that the Frenchman had hidden the fact, if he ever had had it, in his epigram? You may have wished, then, for a third type of encyclopaedia which should be “German-thorough” and 119“French-interesting.” Such a combination is the Britannica,—more authoritative, more up-to-date, more interesting, than any other book.

The Journalist’s Needs

A newspaper man, reporter or editor, must be informed at a moment’s notice on any one of so large a number and so wide a range of topics that the best library of reference obtainable can be none too good for him. This is especially true of the man on the smaller newspaper which does not have the luxury of specialists on its editorial staff, or of many reporters dividing among them the work of gathering news on such lines that each may work in a field with which he is intimately acquainted and in which he is particularly versed. And the rural newspaper is, besides, further from good public libraries and financially less able to have a large office library. The authority, the scope, the interest and the convenience of the Britannica make it just the book to fill these varied needs of the newspaper man. If he has to write a “murder story” in which some unusual poison has been used, he can find a full description of the origin, the use, the action and the tests of the drug by turning to the Britannica—instead of hunting for (and then through) a text book on medicine. And if, on the same day, or the next, he must write an editorial on the tariff, he will find in the article Tariff, in the articles Free Trade and Protection, and in that part of the article United States which deals with the country’s economic history, the information that he wants; and he can get it quickly, and can be sure of its being authoritative.

If the Britannica is evidently the work of reference for the writer, how is he to use it?

It has already been suggested that he will find authoritative and recent information on any topic connected with the subject on which he is writing. It would be interesting to see—or at least to imagine—how largely the Britannica might be used as a source for fiction. A novelist with an appetite for human documents like Balzac’s or like that of Charles Reade—with his many albums full of newspaper clippings,—could satisfy himself with the Britannica, taking his characters “from life” in its biographical and historical articles and his setting from its geographical articles.

Literary Criticism

It has already been suggested that the writer will find in the Britannica the clearness and conciseness of style which he cannot but wish to attain in his own work. Here he has the writings of great masters of English. He may remember Robert Louis Stevenson’s story of how he played “the sedulous ape” to the great stylists; and in the Britannica he can read not only an excellent sketch of Stevenson by Edmund Gosse, his friend and a well-known essayist, but Stevenson’s own article on Béranger. He may read Matthew Arnold on Sainte-Beuve; Walter Besant on Froissart and on Richard Jefferies; John Burroughs on Walt Whitman; G. W. Cable on William Cullen Bryant; Edmund Kerchever Chambers on Shakespeare: Ernest Hartley Coleridge on Byron; Sidney Colvin on Giotto, Leonardo, etc.; Austin Dobson on Fielding, Hogarth, Richardson, etc.; Henry van Dyke on Emerson; John Fiske on Francis Parkman; Richard Garnett on T. L. Peacock and on Satire; Israel Gollancz on “The Pearl”; Edmund Gosse on many literary genres, on Ibsen, etc.; Edward Everett Hale on James Freeman Clarke and on Edward Everett; Frederic Harrison on Ruskin; W. E. Henley on James Fenimore Cooper; William Price James on Barrie, Henley and Kipling; Prince Karageorgevitch on Marie Bashkirtseff; Stanley Lane-Poole on Richard Burton; Andrew Lang on Ballads, Molière, etc.; Henry Cabot Lodge on Albert Gallatin; E. V. Lucas on Jane Austen and Charles Lamb; Lord Macaulay on Bunyan, Goldsmith, 120Johnson and Pitt; David Masson on Milton; Brander Matthews on Mark Twain; Alice Meynell on Mrs. Browning; William Minto on Dryden, Pope, Spenser and Wordsworth; John Nichol on Robert Burns; Charles Eliot Norton on George William Curtis; Mark Pattison on Casaubon, Erasmus, Macaulay and Thomas More; W. H. Pollock on Thackeray and de Musset; Quiller-Couch on Thomas Edward Brown; Whitelaw Reid on Greeley; C. F. Richardson on Bronson Alcott and John Fiske; W. M. Rossetti on Shelley; Viscount St. Cyres on Fénelon and Madame Guyon; Saintsbury on French literature, Balzac, Montaigne, Rabelais, etc.; Carl Schurz on Henry Clay; H. E. Scudder on Lowell and Harriet Beecher Stowe; Thomas Seccombe on Boswell, Dickens, Charles Lever, etc.; William Sharp (“Fiona McLeod”) on Thoreau; Clement Shorter on the Brontës, Crabbe, Cowper and Mrs. Gaskell; W. W. Skeat on Layamon; E. C. Stedman on Whittier; Sir Leslie Stephen on Browning and Carlyle; Richard Henry Stoddard on Hawthorne; Swinburne on Beaumont and Fletcher, Congreve, Hugo, Landor, Marlowe, Mary, Queen of Scots; John Addington Symonds on the Renaissance, Machiavelli, Tasso, etc.; Arthur Symons on Hardy, Mallarmé, Verlaine; W. P. Trent on Sidney Lanier; A. W. Ward on Drama; Mrs. Humphry Ward on Lyly; Theodore Watts-Dunton on Poetry, Sonnet, Borrow, Wycherley, Matthew Arnold; Arthur Waugh on William Morris, Walter Pater; and G. E. Woodberry on American Literature.

The more you know of the subjects or authors in this list the more likely you will be to say what a Western professor of theology said, in reviewing the articles in the Britannica dealing with the Bible: “They are the very authorities that I would have chosen to write these articles!”

But the Britannica will serve the professional author in other ways than by giving him information in special fields and by keeping before him admirable models of style. He might well follow any of the courses suggested in the chapter on Literature in this Guide; and if he will read the articles on great authors written by great authors, already mentioned, he will have a doubly valuable course in biographical criticism by the ablest of literary critics.

Any newspaper writer or contributor to the periodical press should read such articles as:

Newspapers and Magazines

Newspapers (Vol. 19, p. 544; equivalent to 125 pages of this Guide), by Hugh Chisholm, editor-in-chief of the Britannica, with sections on the price of newspapers by Lord Northcliffe, on illustrated papers by Clement Shorter, general information on American newspapers, and an elaborate historical account of British, American and foreign newspapers.

Periodicals (Vol. 21, p. 151; equivalent to 40 pages in this Guide), by Henry Richard Tedder, librarian of the Athenaeum Club of London, treats the subject under the heads: British, United States, Canada, South Africa, Australia and New Zealand, West Indies and British Crown Colonies, India and Ceylon, France, Germany, Austria, Italy, Belgium, Holland, Denmark, Norway, Sweden, Spain, Portugal, Greece, Russia, and other Countries.

Societies, Learned (Vol. 25, p. 309), also by H. R. Tedder, deals with the publications of such societies and classifies them (with geographical sub-classification for each head) under Science Generally, Mathematics, Astronomy, Physics, Chemistry, Geology, Mineralogy and Palaeontology, Meteorology, Microscopy, Botany and Horticulture, Zoology, Anthropology, Sociology, Medicine and Surgery, Engineering and Architecture, Naval and Military Science, Agriculture and Trades, Literature, History and Archaeology, and Geography.

Local information in regard to newspapers and journalism will be found in 121separate local articles. Thus under Boston, Philadelphia, New York City, New Orleans, San Francisco, etc., there is valuable information in regard to these cities as literary centers and about their principal periodical publications, including newspapers; and in the articles on smaller cities, such as Albany and Springfield, Mass., there are valuable historical sketches of the local press of each.

Literary Biographies

The newspaper man should read the biographies of great American printers and editors: William Bradford (Vol. 4, p. 370); Benjamin Franklin (Vol. 11, p. 24; equivalent to 20 pages of this Guide); Isaiah Thomas (Vol. 26, p. 867); Noah Webster (Vol. 28, p. 463); William Cullen Bryant (Vol. 4, p. 698); James G. Birney (Vol. 3, p. 988); Gamaliel Bailey (Vol. 3, p. 217); W. L. Garrison (Vol. 11, p. 477); James Gordon Bennett (Vol. 3, p. 740); Thurlow Weed (Vol. 28, p. 466); Gideon Welles (Vol. 28, p. 506); John Bigelow (Vol. 3, p. 922); Horace Greeley (Vol. 12, p. 531); Henry J. Raymond (Vol. 22, p. 933); George Ripley (Vol. 23, p. 363); C. A. Dana (Vol. 7, p. 791); George William Curtis (Vol. 7, p. 652); Carl Schurz (Vol. 24, p. 386); Samuel Bowles (Vol. 4, p. 344); Joseph R. Hawley (Vol. 13, p. 101); Whitelaw Reid (Vol. 23, p. 52); George W. Childs (Vol. 6, p. 141); E. L. Godkin (Vol. 12, p. 174); and Henry Watterson (Vol. 28, p. 418).

The reading of these biographies will give the student many interesting starting-points for studies in American politics, economics, literature, reform movements as widely separated as abolition and the introduction of the merit system into the civil service. The author should also read the article American Literature (Vol. 1, p. 831; equivalent to 35 pages of this Guide), by Professor G. E. Woodberry, and, if his field is that of the publicist, he should read the article on the history of the United States (Vol. 27, p. 663), equivalent to 225 pages of this Guide; and the allied articles to which he is referred from that.

The advertising writer will find a valuable and stimulating article on Advertisement (Vol. 1, p. 235, equivalent to 20 pages in this Guide), which gives a history of the subject, deals with posters and signs, circulars, periodical advertising, and legal regulation and taxation. For a full list of articles of particular usefulness for the author, see the chapter Literature in this Guide. The following brief list may serve as the basis for a preliminary course of reading.

122

CHAPTER XXIII
FOR TEACHERS

The Teacher’s “Factor of Safety”

Every teacher has one pupil who tries harder than any of the others to absorb knowledge, and yet is never content with the progress made, who knows how hard the teacher works, and yet is never satisfied with the teacher—and that pupil is the teacher’s self. For every other learner there is a limit to the amount of knowledge to be acquired, but in the case of the teacher a “standard” is supposed to indicate no more than an indispensable minimum. When you are trying to make your pupils master a text-book, the volume seems to contain a most stupendous mass of learning, and when one of them asks you a question about the subject with which the text-book deals, that particular point is sure to be one that the text-book does not cover. What engineers call the “factor of safety,” the margin by which the strength of materials must exceed the stress it is expected to encounter, is, for the teacher, incalculable. It is, of course, a favorite pastime of parents to send a child to school primed with some question “to ask Teacher,” selecting an enigma that has been for centuries a battle-ground for scholars or scientists. And, apart from these malicious pitfalls, children themselves seem, quite innocently, to hit upon questions of extraordinary difficulty. A rebuff, a careless response, or, worst of all, an ingenious evasion of the issue, is fatal to the teacher’s authority and influence. “Ask me that again, to-morrow morning,” is the phrase with which a conscientious teacher often meets such a contingency. And then how a fagged brain is tormented that evening, how the few books available (and they are likely to be a very few if there is no public library at hand) are searched in vain! That is not all. If it be true that the teacher is the most diligent, yet always the least satisfied, of all the teacher’s pupils, it is equally true that many of the most puzzling questions with which the teacher is confronted arise in the teacher’s own mind.

Answers to All Questions

The question-answering power of the Britannica is therefore of cardinal importance to the teacher, and is to be considered not only in connection with the use of the work for reference, but also in the selection of such courses of reading as may be expected to supply information of the kind that questions most often demand. And this question-answering power lies in three characteristics of the work, and may be measured by the extent to which the three are found in it: broad scope, unimpeachable authority and convenient arrangement. Its scope covers the whole range of human knowledge, everything that mankind has achieved, attempted, believed or studied. Its authority is doubly vouchsafed. The fact that the Britannica is published by the University of Cambridge (England), one of the world’s oldest and most famous seats of learning, in itself gives such a 123guarantee as no other Encyclopaedia has ever offered, and the assurance thus given may be regarded as showing, chiefly, that there are no errors of omission, for against the existence of the errors of commission there is a further guarantee. The articles are signed by 1,500 contributors, including the foremost specialists in every department of knowledge. Among this army of collaborators, chosen from twenty countries, there are no less than 704 members of the staffs of 146 universities and colleges. This means that by means of the Britannica the youngest teacher in the most isolated village is brought into stimulating contact with the great leaders of the teaching profession. Its arrangement gives it the advantages of a universal library, providing the varied courses of reading outlined in this Guide, and those also of a work of reference which yields an immediate answer to every conceivable question. The index of 500,000 entries instantly leads the enquirer to any item of information in the 40,000 articles. No teacher could hope to form, in the course of a lifetime, a collection of separate books which would contain anywhere near as much information.

A Library of Text-Books

In another relation, the Britannica is of daily service to anyone engaged in educational work. It has already been remarked that the teacher needs a “factor of safety,” a reserve of knowledge beyond that which is directly called for in the ordinary routine of the class room. But in the very course of that routine, there is also a need for co-ordinated knowledge, presented in a form available for use in teaching, of a more advanced kind than that in the text-books with which pupils are provided. And the Britannica is, in itself, a vast collection of text-books.

Professor Shotwell, of Columbia University, recently wrote to the publishers a letter in which he said: “I shall use the articles in the Encyclopaedia Britannica which deal with industrial processes as a substitute for a text-book in one of my courses in Social and Industrial History and have especially in mind the splendid treatment of the cotton industry by Professor S. J. Chapman and others.” A large number of Britannica articles have, by permission, been reprinted, word for word, for use as text-books; and it is impossible to say how many have been paraphrased, and, in a form less clear and vivid than the originals, similarly employed. The writers of the Britannica have, among them, done so large a share of the world’s recent work in research and criticism, that no one who is engaged in writing a text-book or in preparing a course of lectures should fail to use the work as a check to test the completeness and the accuracy of independent investigation.

Fortunately, the system of monthly payments has enabled teachers to purchase the Britannica to an extent which, in view of their limited resources, is a striking evidence of their earnest desire to perfect their professional equipment. In some cases two and even three teachers have combined their efforts in order that they might jointly possess the work. But whatever may be the difficulties to be overcome, it is certain that the Britannica is, for the teacher, an instrument as directly productive as a technical library is for a doctor or a lawyer.

A professor in an eastern college wrote to the publishers: “It has become ‘the collection of books’ which Carlyle might term ‘the true university’”; and the practical head of a business school in Pennsylvania says: “By its purchase, I have secured access to a university education.” A well known professor of German calls it “a Hausschatz of amazing richness and variety,” and adds: “I hope you will not be sued at law for an attempt to monopolize the market for profitable and entertaining literature.” The president 124of a southern university wrote: “It is the first book to consult, the one book to own, if you can own but one.” And a Harvard professor says: “I have been particularly interested in some of the recent phases of European history. Concerning some movements, about which it is as yet extremely difficult to find material in books, I have found the Encyclopaedia most useful.” A teacher in a theological seminary exclaims: “What a university of solid training it would be for a young student, if he would spend an hour each day reading the work, volume by volume, and including all the articles except those of a technical nature belonging to other departments than his own!”

This is what teachers have said of the value to them of the Encyclopaedia Britannica. Specialists in school-hygiene and school librarians have also noted the advantage of the light, handy volumes printed on India paper—one weighs no more than two monthly magazines—, which may be easily held at the proper angle for eye-focus on a large page.

The teacher will find in this Guide valuable suggestions about particular subjects which he may wish to teach or study,—such as history, literature, language and biology. In this chapter we suggest a general course.

The Theory of Education

Let him begin with the article Education (Vol. 8, p. 951), which is the equivalent in length of 120 pages of the size and type of this Guide, and of which the first part is by James Welton, professor of education in the University of Leeds and author of Logical Bases of Education, etc., the sections on national systems by G. B. M. Coore, assistant secretary of the London Board of Education, and that on the United States by Nicholas Murray Butler, president of Columbia University. This valuable article begins with a discussion of the meaning of the term “Education,” excludes John Stuart Mill’s extension to everything which “helps to shape the human being,” and narrows the meaning to definitely personal work,—the true “working” definition for the practical teacher.

The section on educational theory might equally well be styled a sketch of the history of education and will prove valuable to the teacher preparing for a licence-examination in this subject or for a normal training course. It discusses old Greek education with special attention to Spartan practice, Plato’s theory and Aristotle’s, and the gradual change from the point of view of the city-state to Hellenistic cosmopolitanism. The older Roman education, practical and given by father to son, is contrasted with the later Hellenized training, largely by Greek slaves, largely rhetorical and largely summed up in Quintilian’s Institutio. The contest between the pagan system and Christianity is shown to have culminated in monasticism; and barbarian inroads stifled classical culture until the Carolingian revival under Alcuin in the 8th century and the scholastic revival (11th to 13th centuries) of Abelard, Aquinas and Arabic workings over of Aristotle. Scholastic education is considered especially in relation to the first great European universities and the schools of the Dominicans, Franciscans and Brethren of the Common Life, and in contrast to chivalry, the education of feudalism. The Renaissance is treated at greater length, and this is followed by sections on the influence of the Reformation on education, and the consequent growth of Jesuit schools. The keynote of the story thereafter is reform,—the movement away from the classics, toward natural science, and, especially after the French Revolution, by means of new methods and theories, notably those of Rousseau, Pestalozzi, Froebel and Herbart.

The remainder of the article EducaTION 125deals with national systems of education: French, German, Swiss, Belgian, Dutch, Scotch, Irish, English, Welsh and American, with an excellent bibliography. These, and other, national systems are also treated from another point of view in the articles on the separate countries.

Articles on Great Schools

The article Education should naturally be followed by a study of the article Universities (Vol. 27, p. 748—about 100 pages, if printed in the style of this Guide) by James Bass Mullinger (author of the History of Cambridge, The Schools of Charles the Great, etc.) and, for American universities, by Daniel Coit Gilman, late president of Johns Hopkins University; and by a reading of articles on the great universities, as for instance, Oxford, Cambridge, Aberdeen, Glasgow, St. Andrews, Dublin, Harvard, Yale, Columbia, Cornell, Princeton, Pennsylvania, Michigan, Wisconsin, California, Leland Stanford, Jr., etc. The student should then turn to the article Schools (Vol. 24, p. 359; equivalent to about 40 pages of this Guide) by Arthur Francis Leach, author of English Schools at the Reformation, who gives a summary of what is known of Greek, Roman and English schools.

Then,—to supplement these general articles,—he should read—

On Greek education:

Plato (Vol. 21, p. 808), especially p. 812 (on Meno) and 818 (on the Republic).

Aristotle (Vol. 2, p. 501).

Sparta (Vol. 25, p. 609, particularly p. 611).

On Roman education:

Cato (Vol. 5, p. 535).

Quintilian (Vol. 22, p. 761).

On early Christian education:

Clement of Alexandria (Vol. 6, p. 487, particularly p. 488, on the Paedagogus).

Augustine (Vol. 2, p. 907) and Jerome (Vol. 15, p. 326), with especial attention to their early pagan education and their attitude toward it as Christians.

Ambrose (Vol. 1, p. 798).

Martianus Capella (Vol. 5, p. 249).

Boetius (Vol. 4, p. 116).

Cassiodorus (Vol. 5, p. 459).

Isidore (Vol. 14, p. 871).

St. Gregory (Vol. 12, p. 566).

Bede (Vol. 3, p. 615).

Monasticism (Vol. 18, p. 687).

On the Carolingian revival:

Alcuin (Vol. 1, p. 529).

Angilbert (Vol. 2, p. 9).

Charlemagne (Vol. 5, p. 891, especially p. 894).

France (Vol. 10, p. 810).

On the Scholastic revival:

Scholasticism (Vol. 24, p. 346).

Abelard (Vol. 1, p. 40).

John of Salisbury (Vol. 15, p. 449).

Albertus Magnus (Vol 1, p. 504).

Grosseteste (Vol. 12, p. 617).

Thomas Aquinas (Vol. 2, p. 250).

Roger Bacon (Vol. 3, p. 153).

On the Renaissance:

Renaissance (Vol. 23, p. 83).

Dante (Vol. 7, p. 810).

Petrarch (Vol. 21, p. 310).

Boccacio (Vol. 4, p. 102).

Manuel Chrysolaras (Vol. 6, p. 320).

Manutius (Vol. 17, p. 624).

Thomas More (Vol. 18, p. 822).

Erasmus (Vol. 9, p. 727).

John Colet (Vol. 6, p. 681).

Thomas Linacre (Vol. 16, p. 701).

On the Reformation period and Counter-Reformation:

Reformation (Vol. 23, p. 4).

Melancthon (Vol. 18, p. 88).

Luther (Vol. 17, p. 133).

Trotzendorff (Vol. 27, p. 308).

Reuchlin (Vol. 23, p. 204).

Ascham (Vol. 2, p. 720).

Rabelais (Vol. 22, p. 769).

Jesuits (Vol. 15, p. 337), especially p. 342.

La Salle (Vol. 16, p. 231).

126On the Modern period:

Comenius (Vol. 6, p. 759).

Rousseau (Vol. 23, p. 775).

Voltaire (Vol. 28, p. 199).

Pestalozzi (Vol. 21, p. 284).

Froebel (Vol. 11, p. 238).

Herbart (Vol. 13, p. 335).

Wilhelm Von Humboldt (Vol. 13, p. 875).

Andrew Bell (Vol. 3, p. 684).

Joseph Lancaster (Vol. 16, p. 147).

Sir John Fitch (Vol. 10, p. 438).

James Blair (Vol. 4, p. 34).

T. H. Gallaudet (Vol. 11, p. 416).

F. A. P. Barnard (Vol. 3, p. 409).

Henry Barnard (Vol. 3, p. 410).

Horace Mann (Vol. 17, p. 587).

Mark Hopkins (Vol. 13, p. 684).

William T. Harris (Vol. 13, p. 21).

Justin S. Morrill (Vol. 18, p. 869).

Alexander Melville Bell (Vol. 3, p. 684).

S. C. Armstrong (Vol. 2, p. 591).

Booker T. Washington (Vol. 28, p. 344).

Co-Education (Vol. 6, p. 637).

Blindness (Vol. 4, p. 66).

Deaf and Dumb (Vol. 7, p. 887).

Infant Schools (Vol. 14, p. 533).

Kindergarten (Vol. 15, p. 802).

Museums of Art (Vol. 19, p. 60).

Museums of Science (Vol. 19, p. 64).

Polytechnic (Vol. 22, p. 38).

Technical Education (Vol. 26, p. 487), an elaborate article, about 40 pages in the form of this Guide, by Sir Philip Magnus, author of Industrial Education, member of the Royal Commission on technical instruction (1881–1884) and, in 1907, president of the education section of the British Association.

The Study of Psychology

Of equal importance with this course on the history of education, for the student taking the licence-examination or for a teacher taking an examination for a higher grade licence or a principalship, is a course in Psychology in the Britannica. This will be found largely in the great article on Psychology (Vol. 22, p. 547; equivalent in length to 200 pages of this Guide) by James Ward. The systematic treatment of the subject in this article is particularly valuable to the teacher, whether the object desired is to review the entire subject, sharpening one’s impressions from a longer course of reading; to get a general grounding in the subject—for which a careful study of this one article will suffice; or to make one’s self more certain of his comprehension of any part of the subject. It is not practicable to give an outline of this article here, but a few of its special topics are listed below:

General analysis of the subject

Besides the general article with its systematic summary of the subject, the Britannica contains many briefer articles on special topics, so that the teacher will find not only an excellent text-book of the subject in Prof. Ward’s article, but also an elaborate dictionary or encyclopaedia of psychological terms or topics. Among the topics treated in this “Dictionary of Psychology” are:

Furthermore, the teacher will find the Britannica a valuable biographical dictionary. This he will already have realized, if he has looked up the biographical articles mentioned in connection with the history of education. The following is a brief outline course in psychological biography:

CHAPTER XXIV
FOR MINISTERS

The Great Preachers

The minister or candidate for the ministry will find a valuable course of reading laid out for him in this Guide under the heading Bible Study, and it might be said with little exaggeration that any systematic course of reading in the Encyclopaedia Britannica should add to the efficiency and power of one who would be an ideal pastor. If the schools of the Middle Ages could truly call all the arts and sciences hand-maids and helpers to Theology, much more truly, in the present age, should the minister, in order that he may minister truly, know not merely the history of the Bible and of the Church, the results of modern criticism, and of comparative religion and folk-lore, but, almost as fully, general history, literature, philosophy, psychology, education, something of the fine arts, much of law and political science, and still more of social science and economics. In a period of specialization he cannot afford to be a specialist—or, it might be nearer the truth to say that, like every other true specialist, he must make all knowledge, all the circle of the sciences, tributary to his specialty, which is the knowledge and the improvement of the human soul. The suggestions that follow must necessarily be fragmentary, and should be considered as including merely a few topics not covered in the chapter on Bible Study nor in the other courses which, as has just 128been suggested, a minister might profitably pursue.

The article Sermon (Vol. 24, p. 673) is by Edmund Gosse, librarian of the House of Lords, biographer of John Donne, Jeremy Taylor and Dr. Thomas Browne. The writer is especially conversant with the English literature of the 17th century, in the middle of which, to quote his article, “the sermon became one of the most highly-cultivated forms of intellectual entertainment in Great Britain, and when the theatres were closed at the Commonwealth it grew to be the only public form of eloquence.”

Each name on the following list of great preachers is accompanied by volume and page reference to the biographical sketch in the Britannica, containing criticism of the preacher and a bibliography of his works and of works about him, so that the articles supply the basis for a study of the world’s great preachers.

These lists could easily be made longer and fuller, but the articles mentioned give such a view of the great preachers of the world as cannot fail to stimulate any minister. Supplementing what has been said above about the necessity of the minister’s being a well-rounded man, it may be worth while to notice that Donne and Keble and, in a less degree, Doane and Muhlenberg, were poets as well as preachers; that Cudworth was known as the founder of the Cambridge Platonists, and Jowett as the translator of Plato, Barrow as a mathematician, second, in his day, only to Isaac Newton, Edward Everett Hale as an essayist and writer of short stories, and McCook as a great naturalist.

The minister will find the Britannica an excellent encyclopaedia of comparative religion and of church history, with the newest and most authoritative information on any subject in this field. For a brief outline course in these topics let him read:

The article Religion (Vol. 23, p. 61; equivalent to 50 pages of this Guide), by Dr. Joseph Estlin Carpenter, principal of Manchester College, Oxford, and Robert R. Marett, fellow and tutor of Exeter College, Oxford, author of the Threshold of Religion and contributor to the Britannica of articles on Prayer, Ritual, etc. This article is made up of: a general introduction sketching the history of the study of religions, especially in the last century, and concluding that “the origin of religion can never be determined archaeologically or historically; it must be sought conjecturally through psychology”; a section on primitive religion, which is a remarkable summary of all that is known of this subject; and a section on the higher religions which discusses developments of animism, transition to polytheism, polytheism, the order of nature (a half-way stage to monotheism), monotheism, classification of religions, revelation, ethics and eschatology and bibliography.

Another class of articles comprises Ancestor Worship, Animal Worship, Animism, Fetishism, Folklore, Magic, Mythology, Prayer, Ritual, Sacrifice, Serpent-Worship, Totemism and Tree-Worship, written by such authorities as N. W. Thomas, author of Kinship and Marriage in Australia, etc., Andrew Lang, Stanley Arthur Cooke and R. R. Marett.

Certain primitive religions are separately treated, as in the article Indians, North American (Vol. 14, especially pages 471–473), by A. F. Chamberlain, assistant professor of anthropology, Clark University, Worcester; in the article Australia (Vol. 2, especially p. 957); in the article Hawaii (Vol. 13, pages 87, 88).

130On higher religions there are the following separate articles (among many):

Babylonian and Assyrian Religion, by Morris Jastrow of the University of Pennsylvania; and the articles Anai, Ishtar, Ea, Marduk, Assur and Gilgamesh,—all by the same author and all of particular value as throwing sidelights on Hebrew Religion.

Egypt (Vol. 9, pp. 48–56), by Allan H. Gardiner, editor of the New (Berlin) Hieroglyphic Dictionary.

Hebrew Religion (Vol. 13, p. 176; equivalent to 40 pages of this Guide), by Dr. Owen Charles Whitehouse, professor of Hebrew, Cheshunt College, Cambridge; and the articles Hebrew Literature, Jews, etc.

Brahmanism (Vol. 4, p. 381) and Hinduism (Vol. 13, p. 501), by Julius Eggeling, Professor of Sanskrit, Edinburgh.

Buddhism, Buddha and Lamaism, by T. W. Rhys Davids, author of Buddhist India, etc.

Confucius, by James Legge, author of The Religions of China.

Sikhism, by Max Macauliffe, whose book The Sikh Religion is accepted by the Sikhs as authoritative.

Zoroaster, by Karl Geldner, professor at Marburg, and the article Parsees.

Mahommedan Religion (Vol. 17, p. 417; equivalent to 45 pages in this Guide), by G. W. Thatcher, warden of Camden College, Sydney.

Mahomet, by D. S. Margoliouth, Laudian professor of Arabic, Oxford; Mahommedan Institutions and Mahommedan Laws, by D. S. Macdonald, professor of Semitic languages, Hartford Theological Seminary.

Bábiism, by E. G. Browne, professor of Arabic, Cambridge, and author of History of the Báb.

Greek Religion (Vol. 12, p. 527), by L. R. Farnell, fellow of Exeter College, Oxford, author of Cults of the Greek States; and such articles as Demeter, Hecate, Hera, Hermes, Hestia, Nike, Phoebus, Themis and Zeus.

Roman Religion (Vol. 23, p. 577), by Cyril Bailey, fellow of Balliol College, Oxford, and author of The Religion of Ancient Rome; and such articles as Anna Perenna, Arval Brothers, Bona Dea, Concordia, Fama, Faunus, Juno and Jupiter; and the valuable articles on Eastern cults in Rome, Great Mother of the Gods, Attis, Mithras, etc., by Professor Grant Showerman of the University of Wisconsin.

Christianity (Vol. 6, p. 280; equivalent to 35 pages of this Guide), by G. W. Knox, professor of philosophy and history of religion, Union Theological Seminary, New York; Jesus Christ (Vol. 15, p. 348; equivalent to 35 pages of this Guide), by the Very Rev. Joseph Armitage Robinson, Dean of Westminster; Gospel (Vol. 12, p. 265), by Rev. V. H. Stanton, Ely professor of divinity, Cambridge; articles on the separate gospels; Paul the Apostle (Vol. 20, p. 938), by the Rev. James Vernon Bartlett, professor of church history, Mansfield College, Oxford.

On Church History there is an excellent key article in volume 6 (p. 331; equivalent to 45 pages of this Guide). It begins with an outline of the work of the great church historians and divides the subject into three parts: first, up to 590 B.C.,—this part and the general introduction are by A. C. McGiffert, professor of church history in Union Theological Seminary, New York City; second, the Church in the Middle Ages, by Albert Hauck, professor of church history at Leipzig; and The Modern Church, by W. Alison Phillips, author of Modern Europe. This sketch may be filled in by reference to the following articles (among many):

A brief course in theology and dogma is contained in the following articles:

Theology (Vol. 26, p. 772; equivalent to 45 pages in this Guide), by the Rev. Dr. Robert Mackintosh of Lancashire Independent College, Manchester.

On Religious Orders:

and see also the names of different orders and hundreds of biographical articles on saints and heretics, preachers and theologians.

The following alphabetical list includes only a part of the articles in the Britannica on religious topics; but it will serve to show the value of the book to a clergyman in his own field:

CHAPTER XXV
FOR PHYSICIANS, SURGEONS AND DENTISTS

The Britannica adds so largely to medical literature that, in outlining the services which the work can render to those engaged in the prevention and treatment of disease, it is desirable to define the limits, rather than to insist upon the extent, of the plan adopted by the technical assistant editors to whom the Editor-in-chief entrusted the control of this important part of the undertaking. It is true that the 644 medical articles, many of which might be described as books in themselves, cover the whole field of anatomy, physiology, pathology, therapeutics, surgery, pharmacology, medical education, medical jurisprudence and medical biography. It is also true that the writers who sign these articles are specialists of world-wide authority, and that the total number of words and illustrations in these articles is as great as would be required for a complete encyclopaedic hand-book of medical science. But, notwithstanding all this wealth of matter and of international collaboration, the Britannica does not profess to take the place of the elementary working library in daily use by every professional man. “Working library” is, however, an elastic term, and it is used here to mean only the handbooks which constitute an irreducible minimum, the few without which no beginner would venture to establish 135himself in practice. Certain manuals are, to the practitioner, what mathematical tables are to the engineer; and it is not the function of the Britannica to duplicate what the practitioner already possesses, nor yet, for example, to include a pharmacopoeia in a book used by the general public.

The Encyclopaedic Method

On the other hand, no professional man restricts himself a day longer than he must to the bare modicum of medical literature with which he may have been forced, at first, to do his best; and when he can add anything to it, there is nothing he will use so often, or find so helpful, as the Britannica. It may be well to define in general, its professional uses, before dealing in detail with the articles included in this course of reading.

(1) The system of technical collaboration is, in the Britannica, organized and coördinated with a completeness which gives the medical articles an authority and impartiality often lacking in isolated treatises. The contributors were selected with a view to their recognized ability only, whereas the publication of medical works is too often an outcome of the writer’s ambitions, which, however legitimate they may be, are no proof of his capacity.

(2) The Britannica articles were written for the sole purpose of being used in their present form. A great part of current medical literature originates in lectures to students, and retains too much of its first form to be satisfactory to the professional man.

(3) The articles are all based upon an original and recent survey of knowledge, and thus contain information which cannot be found in reprints of standard medical works insufficiently brought up to date by additions to earlier editions.

(4) In relation to statistics, to administrative and legislative provisions regarding public health, to hospitals and other public institutions, the broadly international character of the Britannica, with its contributions from twenty different countries, gives a scope which the private writer cannot attain.

(5) The great number of biographies of physicians, surgeons and men who devote themselves exclusively to research, gives professional men access to information which they cannot elsewhere obtain.

(6) Chemistry, bacteriology, general biology, botany, psychology and other sciences allied to the more immediate field of medicine are fully treated by specialists of the highest authority.

(7) Apart from the definite occupational diseases (fully discussed in the Britannica), there is often a relation between the pathological results of overwork and the routine of the patient’s business life. Every branch of industry and commerce is treated in detail in the Britannica, and the insight which the physician may thus gain will often be of service to him.

(8) The Britannica not only enlarges the medical library of the practitioner, but gives him, and the members of his family, the use of the only complete library of general information.

Scope of the Medical Section

Specifically, the medical and surgical section of the Britannica comprises 3 general articles, constituting broad systematic surveys of the various provinces of the subject: 103 articles on anatomy and physiology, which are partly surgical; 265 articles on pathology; 75 on pharmacology; 21 on public health, in addition to the articles on dentistry and on veterinary science, and 170 biographies. But this comprehensive scheme does not by any means include all the material of value to the medical man. The sister sciences of chemistry, physics, biology, botany, zoology and psychology, have much to offer him. A consultation of the list appended 136to this section will show how the needs of the physician and surgeon are served by the Encyclopaedia. It must suffice here to call attention briefly to some of the more important contributions.

Taking up, first, the more general articles, there is Medicine (Vol. 18, p. 41) containing about 35,000 words. This deals with the history and development of the science. Dr. J. F. Payne of the Royal College of Physicians, London, traces its history from the earliest known times to the middle of the 19th century; and Sir T. C. Allbutt, professor of physic in Cambridge University, completes this review with a section on Modern Progress (p. 55). Of high practical value is Medical Jurisprudence or Forensic Medicine (Vol. 16, p. 25), by H. H. Littlejohn, professor of forensic medicine, University of Edinburgh, and T. A. Ingram. This deals solely with that branch of the science which has to do with the application of medical knowledge to certain questions of civil and criminal law. There are discussions of questions affecting the civil or social rights of individuals, and injuries to the person, the function of the physician in questions of mutilation, homicide, infanticide, poisoning, etc. Medical Education (Vol. 18, p. 23) is a useful reference article by Sir John Batty Tuke, Dr. W. H. Howell, dean of the medical faculty, Johns Hopkins University, and Dr. H. L. Hennessy, furnishing data on the educational qualifications necessary to the practice of medicine in Europe and America.

Anatomy, Embryology, and Physiology

Dr. Frederick G. Parsons, vice-president of the Anatomical Society of Great Britain and Ireland, lecturer on Anatomy at St. Thomas’s Hospital, London, contributes the general article Anatomy (Vol. 1, p. 920) which goes deeply into its history, and has further sections on Modern Human Anatomy (Anthropotomy) and Anatomy, Superficial and Artistic. This noted authority also writes detailed and fully illustrated articles on the anatomy and embryology of the Brain (Vol. 4, p. 392); Heart (Vol. 13, p. 129); Eye (Vol. 10, p. 91); Ear (Vol. 8, 791); Olfactory System (Vol. 20, p. 77); Lymphatic System (Vol. 17, p. 166); Vascular System (Vol. 27, p. 926); Nervous System (Vol. 19, p. 400); Muscular System (Vol. 19, p. 51); Reproductive System (Vol. 23, p. 129); and Respiratory System (Vol. 23, p. 184) and on the Skeleton (Vol. 25, p. 169); Skin and Exoskeleton (Vol. 25, p. 188); Skull (Vol. 25, p. 196); Joints (Vol. 15, p. 483); and Nerve (Vol. 19, p. 394). Another valuable anatomical article is Connective Tissues (Vol. 6, p. 958), by Dr. T. G. Brodie of the University of Toronto. Prof. Adam Sedgwick writes a most excellent general and historical account of Embryology (Vol. 9, p. 314); and Dr. Hans A. E. Driesch of Heidelberg University adds to it a section Physiology of Development (p. 329), treating of the laws that govern the development of the organism. The general article Physiology (Vol. 21, p. 554) is from the pen of the celebrated Prof. Max Verworn of the University of Bonn, and to this there are closely linked, according to the new plan of the Britannica, extensive and detailed accounts of the physiology of the Brain (Vol. 4, p. 403); Sympathetic System (Vol. 26, p. 287); Spinal Cord (Vol. 25, p. 672); Muscle and Nerve (Vol. 19, p. 44); Respiratory System (Vol. 23, p. 187); Vascular System (Vol. 27, p. 929); Alimentary Canal (Vol. 1, p. 663); Blood (Vol. 4, p. 77), etc., by noted specialists, including Dr. Charles S. Sherrington, professor of physiology in the University of Liverpool, Dr. J. S. Haldane of Oxford University, Dr. L. E. Hill, lecturer on physiology at the London Hospital, Dr. P. Chalmers Mitchell, and Dr. T. G. Brodie of the University of Toronto.

Articles on Pathology

Drs. D. J. Hamilton and Richard Muir 137are the authors of a brilliant summary of the whole subject of Pathology (Vol. 20, p. 913) with over 50 illustrations, including coloured plates. The whole story of the elevation of the science dealing with the theory and causation of disease from a mere philosophical abstraction to one of the natural sciences is admirably told. For the pathological details of various diseases and groups of diseases the reader is referred to Parasitic Diseases (Vol. 20, p. 770), fully illustrated, by Dr. G. Sims Woodhead, professor of pathology, Cambridge University, one of the notable contributions to the Britannica; Metabolic Diseases (Vol. 18, p. 195), by Prof. D. N. Paton of Edinburgh University; Digestive Organs, Pathology (Vol. 8, p. 262) by Dr. A. L. Gillespie of Edinburgh and M. Fisher; Kidney Diseases (Vol. 15, p. 784), by Dr. J. R. Bradford of University College Hospital, London, and Dr. Edmund Owen, the famous English surgeon; Bladder and Prostate Diseases (Vol. 4, p. 27); Venereal Diseases (Vol. 27, p. 983)—these two also by Dr. Owen; Skin Diseases (Vol. 25, p. 190); Insanity (Vol. 14, p. 597), by Sir John Batty Tuke, president of the Neurological Society of the United Kingdom, and medical director of the New Staughton Hall Asylum, Edinburgh, Dr. J. Macpherson, and Dr. L. C. Bruce, author of Studies in Clinical Psychiatry,—for this article the noted American specialist Dr. Frederick Peterson has written a section on Hospital Treatment of the insane; Neuropathology (Vol. 19, p. 429), fully illustrated, by Dr. F. W. Mott, the distinguished pathologist to the London County Asylums, and editor of the Archives of Neurology; Respiratory System, Pathology (Vol. 23, p. 195), by Dr. Thomas Harris, author of numerous articles on this subject, and Dr. H. L. Hennessy; Blood, Pathology (Vol. 4, p. 82), by Dr. G. L. Gulland of Edinburgh; Heart, Disease (Vol. 13, p. 132), by Sir J. F. H. Broadbent, author of Heart Disease and Aneurysm, etc.; Eye, Diseases (Vol. 10, p. 94), by Dr. George A. Berry, hon. surgeon oculist to his Majesty George V; Vision, Errors of Refraction and Accommodation (Vol. 28, p. 142), by Dr. Ernest Clark of the Central London Ophthalmic Hospital; Ear, Diseases of (Vol. 8, p. 794), by Dr. E. C. Baber, late senior surgeon, Brighton and Sussex Throat and Ear Hospital.

Dr. Harriet L. Hennessy is the author of Gynaecology (Vol. 12, p. 764).

For more specific details there is the complete list of articles on different diseases and ailments under their common names. This includes veterinary diseases, to which branch of medicine an admirable introduction is furnished by Veterinary Science (Vol. 28, p. 2), by Drs. George Fleming and James MacQueen. In the articles on diseases there will be found accounts of the latest methods of diagnosis and treatment, as, for example, the Calmette eye-test in tubercular diseases, serum treatment and its latest developments, vaccine therapy, etc.

Therapeutics

The general article Therapeutics (Vol. 26, p. 793), by Dr. Sir Lauder Brunton, consulting physician to St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, London, author of Modern Therapeutics, etc., not only discusses both rational and empirical therapeutics, but, taking up the different parts of the body considers in detail the therapeutic measures most commonly employed in the treatment of disease. The subjects of Electrotherapeutics (Vol. 9, p. 249); Baths (Vol. 3, p. 514); Balneotherapeutics (Vol. 3, p. 284); Hydropathy (Vol. 14, p. 165); Aerotherapeutics (Vol. 1, p. 270); Massage (Vol. 17, p. 863) and X-Ray Treatment (Vol. 28, p. 887) have separate articles devoted to them. The last is by Dr. H. L. Jones, clinical lecturer on medical electricity 138at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, London.

In connection with the subject of therapeutics, mention must be made of Pharmacology (Vol. 21, p. 347), by Professor Stockman of the University of Glasgow, in which will be found an interesting history of drugs, and a classification into 28 groups with a description of the effect of each remedy. To this valuable material Dr. H. L. Hennessy has added a section, Terminology in Therapeutics (p. 352)—a general explanation of the common names used in the classification of drugs. The list at the end of this chapter indicates the separate articles on drugs and on materials from which the principal drugs are obtained.

Surgery

Dr. Charles Creighton of King’s College, Cambridge, writes on the history of Surgery (Vol. 26, p. 125) and the famous English Surgeon, Dr. Edmund Owen the section Modern Practice of Surgery (p. 129) in which are discussed antiseptic and aseptic surgery, drainage tubes, bloodless operations, Röntgen rays, use of radium, etc. The article Surgical Instruments and Appliances (Vol. 26, p. 132) is fully illustrated. Dr. Owen also contributes articles on the surgery of the different organs, the article Bone, Diseases and Injuries (Vol. 4, p. 200) and many accounts of diseases and disorders that come within the province of the surgeon, such as Appendicitis (Vol. 2, p. 217); Peritonitis (Vol. 21, p. 171); Hernia (Vol. 13, p. 372); Fistula (Vol. 10, p. 438); Varicose Veins (Vol. 27, p. 920), and Haemorrhoids (Vol. 12, p. 805). Sir Alexander R. Simpson, emeritus professor of midwifery and the diseases of women and children, University of Edinburgh, writes on Obstetrics (Vol. 19, p. 962); Dr. Louis Courtauld, formerly research scholar, Middlesex Hospital Cancer Laboratories, on Tumour (Vol. 27, p. 370); Dr. Arthur Shadwell, of the Epidemiological Society, on Cancer, with a special account of cancer research; and H. C. Crouch, teacher of anaesthetics at St. Thomas’s Hospital, London, on Anaesthesia and Anaesthetics (Vol. 1, p. 907).

Medical Biographies

A most interesting, unusual and instructive course of reading on the history and development of medicine may be based on the biographical articles alone. In Aesculapius (Vol. 1, p. 276) we learn how the gods of Greece effected cures. The life story of Hippocrates (Vol. 13, p. 518) is worthy of note, for the “medical art as we now practice it, the character of the physician as we now understand it,” both date from him. For information about the theory that disease originated from an irregular or inharmonious motion of the body corpuscles we turn to Asclepiades (Vol. 2, p. 722). An account of the man “out of whom the greater part of medicine has flowed” is found in Galen (Vol. 11, p. 398). The biography of the great Arab physician and philosopher Avicenna (Vol. 3, p. 62) should not be overlooked, nor the story of the revolt of Paracelsus (Vol. 20, p. 749). Important and interesting, too, are the biographies of Harvey, William (Vol. 13, p. 42); Sydenham, Thomas (Vol. 26, p. 277), the father of English medicine, and Haller, A. von (Vol. 12, p. 855), whose work marks the beginning of modern physiology. The work of Morgagni (Vol. 18, p. 831) in pathological anatomy marks an epoch in medicine, and the description in Cullen, William (Vol. 7, p. 616) of his new doctrine of “irritability” possesses a distinct interest. The accounts of Jenner, Edward (Vol. 15, p. 319), Hunter, John (Vol. 13, p. 939) and Hahnemann, S.C.F. (Vol. 12, p. 819) describe momentous events in the history of medicine at the close of the 18th century, while among the great names of the 19th will be found the 139chemist Pasteur (Vol. 20, p. 892), Koch, Robert (Vol. 15, p. 885), Lister (Vol. 16, p. 777) and Virchow, Rudolf (Vol. 28, p. 110).

The Allied Sciences

It has already been noted that the Britannica will prove an invaluable help to medical specialists in fields of knowledge other than their own. The regret is often expressed by physicians that it is not easy for them to study subjects outside their profession, even when these are closely connected with their work. It is, unfortunately, only too true, that material for such study is not readily available. But with so complete a work of reference at his disposal, and with its highly authentic information skillfully compressed into reasonable space, the medical man now enjoys a magnificent opportunity to obtain a full acquaintance with many subjects that he knows will assist him in the work.

It would be impossible to name all the articles here, but the alphabetical list at the end of this chapter includes them, and the attention of the physician and surgeon is directed to Bacteriology (Vol. 3, p. 156), by the late Prof. H. M. Ward of Cambridge and Prof. V. H. Blackman of the University of Leeds, and especially the section Pathological Importance (p. 171), which Prof. Robert Muir of Glasgow University has written; Biology (Vol. 3, p. 954), a classic article by the late Professor Huxley, revised and brought up-to-date by Dr. P. Chalmers Mitchell; Heredity (Vol. 13, p. 350), also by Dr. Mitchell; Mendelism (Vol. 18, p. 115), a brilliant study of the foundations of an exact knowledge of the physiological process of heredity, by Prof. R. C. Punnett of Cambridge; Evolution (Vol. 10, p. 22) and Longevity (Vol. 16, p. 974), both by Dr. Mitchell; Nutrition (Vol. 19, p. 921), by Prof. D. N. Paton and Dr. E. P. Cathcart of Glasgow University; Dietetics (Vol. 8, p. 214), by the world-famous authority on this subject, the late Prof. W. O. Atwater, and R. D. Milner, formerly of the U. S. Dept, of Agriculture; Vegetarianism (Vol. 27, p. 967), by Dr. Josiah Oldfield, senior physician to the Lady Margaret Fruitarian Hospital, Bromley; Climate in the Treatment of Disease (Vol. 6, p. 526); Acclimatization (Vol. 1, p. 114), by the renowned scientist, Dr. A. Russel Wallace; a very complete and up-to-date article on Vivisection (Vol. 28, p. 153), by Dr. Stephen Paget; Psychology (Vol. 22, p. 547), by Prof. James Ward of Cambridge; Psychical Research (Vol. 22, p. 544), by Andrew Lang, which is the key to a series of 25 remarkably interesting articles covering the entire subject; Hypnotism (Vol. 14, p. 201); Faith Healing (Vol. 10, p. 135); Suggestion (Vol. 26, p. 48); Phrenology (Vol. 21, p. 534), by Professor Macalister of Cambridge; Temperance (Vol. 26, p. 578), by Dr. Arthur Shadwell; Microscope (Vol. 18, p. 392); Blindness, Causes and Prevention (Vol. 4, p. 60), by Sir Francis J. Cambell, principal Royal Normal College for the Blind, London; Deaf and Dumb (Vol. 7, p. 880), by Rev. A. H. Payne, formerly of the National Deaf Mute College, Washington.

The subject of Dentistry (Vol. 8, p. 50) is covered by the highest American authority, Dr. Edward C. Kirk, of the University of Pennsylvania, and a full account of the anatomy of the teeth will be found under Teeth (Vol. 26, p. 499), by Dr. F. G. Parsons. It is, however, in connection with bacteriology, chemistry, metallurgy, mechanics and other subjects with which the dentist is concerned, rather than in connection with the technics of his profession, that he will desire to make use of the Britannica.

140

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF SPECIAL INTEREST AND IMPORTANCE TO MEMBERS OF THE MEDICAL PROFESSION

CHAPTER XXVI
FOR LAWYERS

In the days when Marshall and Story, on the bench of the Supreme Court at Washington, were listening to Webster’s thunder; when Chancellor Kent was scrutinizing precedents in New York, and Rufus Choate quoting Justinian at Salem, success at the bar depended upon elaborate rhetoric and a close study of the Reports. To-day, sound advice is in greater demand than brilliant oratory, and questions of fact are, as a rule, more important and more perplexing than questions of law.

The Britannica is the one great Digest of Facts. Its articles cover all scientific, industrial, commercial and financial subjects. Fifteen hundred of the world’s foremost specialists, chosen from twenty different countries, deal not only with all knowledge, but with the practical application of knowledge in the laboratory, the machine shop, in the mine, on the ship’s deck and in the ship’s engine-room, in the railroad office and on the railroad line. Bankers and engineers, builders and contractors, physicians and surgeons and manufacturers of every kind describe the work which they have themselves successfully done. They explain to the lawyer the details of his client’s own business, which the client is almost always incapable of explaining. They enable the lawyer to test his client’s knowledge and his client’s good faith. They show the lawyer what he has to hope or to dread from expert evidence.

The Volumes as Used by Lawyers

In a mining town in Alaska, where the workmen were mostly Servians, a lawyer recently had an unusual case. The Servians had a church, which in the absence of the Servian priest, was in the charge of a father or “papa” of the Russian orthodox church, and he tried to exclude from their church the entire congregation because they disobeyed him. The lawyer brought into court the Encyclopaedia Britannica to prove the independence of the Servian Church from the authority of the Russian Church. The Britannica was recognized as an authority by the court, and the Servian congregation won its suit for the use of its church building.

A Buffalo lawyer in a recent letter to the publishers of the Britannica told of his being retained in a case involving the qualities of materials used in the construction of automatic car couplers. He 144read many technical works to get information on this subject, but “the article that to me was most instructive was that on Iron and Steel in the Encyclopaedia Britannica.” He adds, “In my opinion the work is invaluable to any person who desires the means of handy reference to, and accurate information on, any topic.” Similar testimony from lawyers all over the world to the usefulness of the Britannica could be adduced in great volume.

A brief reference to the different parts of this Guide will show in a general way the contents and value of the Britannica in the many fields in which an attorney may need, in connection with the preparation of a case, immediate and authoritative information on subjects not purely legal.

But on legal topics, also, the lawyer or the law student will find much valuable information.

American Law

He should read the stimulating and suggestive article on American Law (Vol. 1, p. 828), by Simeon E. Baldwin, governor of Connecticut, professor of constitutional and private international law at Yale, and formerly chief justice of the Supreme Court of Errors, Connecticut. Governor Baldwin’s article points out the general identity of origin of American and English law, with the important exception of territory formerly French or Spanish,—particularly Louisiana,—a point on which the reader will find fuller information in the articles Louisiana (Vol. 17, p. 57) and Edward Livingston (Vol. 16, p. 811). Besides he calls attention to the fact that the state and not the nation is for the most part the legislative unit and the legislative authority. And this leads to a consideration of the great part played in American jurisprudence by the Civil War and the consequent changes in the Federal Constitution, especially the Fourteenth Amendment, which has been the basis of so many recent cases in the Supreme Court and has “readjusted and reset the whole system of the American law of personal rights” by transferring final jurisdiction from state to Federal courts.

Within the Southern states the Reconstruction period affected local law in various ways: by putting political power into the hands of outsiders (“carpet baggers,” etc.), by the social revolution consequent on the abolition of slavery, and by the commercial assimilation of the South to the North.

Governor Baldwin points out that the judicial department has been made partly administrative by the artificial distribution under most state constitutions of governmental powers into executive, legislative and judicial, overlooking the administrative, and making the courts the interpreters of statutes and giving to them the power of deciding whether or not statutes are constitutional.

That the police powers of the states are more and more liberally interpreted by the Federal Supreme Court is an interesting tendency, especially when the student remembers that in the last year or so certain states (notably Washington, c. 74, Laws 1911, Compensation of Injured Workmen) have definitely stated the police power as the basis of acts which the state supreme court might otherwise have declared unconstitutional as depriving of property without due process of law.

The article on American law is supplemented:

(a) in a general way by the valuable contribution of James Bryce (author of The American Commonwealth, and late British ambassador to the United States) on the Constitution and Government of the United States and of the states (Vol. 27, p. 646—an article which would fill about 50 pages of this Guide).

State Statutes

(b) more particularly, under the articles on the separate states (as well as on Alaska, Hawaii, Philippines and Porto Rico), by the description of the state or local constitution with an outline of characteristic and peculiar statutes. For 145instance, in the article Alabama (Vol. 1, p. 459), the first in the Britannica on a separate state of the Union, there is a general sketch of the constitution and government with particular attention to these points: term of judiciary, 6 years; legislative sessions, quadrennial; law against lobbying; executive may not succeed himself; sheriffs whose prisoners are lynched may be impeached; grandfather clause, practically disfranchising the negro—with a summary of Giles v. Harris, 189 U. S. 474; Jim Crow law; disfranchisement for vote-buying or selling; Australian ballot law; anti-pass law; freight rebate law; homestead exemptions; wife’s earnings separate property; women and child labour laws; peonage; liquor laws.

(c) by special articles, such as Homestead and Exemption Laws (Vol. 13, p. 639), Original Package (Vol. 20, p. 273) and Interstate Commerce (Vol. 14, p. 711; equal to about 10 pages of this Guide), by Prof. Frank A. Fetter of Princeton (formerly Cornell), which deal with purely American legal topics.

(d) by legal sections in general economic articles, for instance: in Railways, the section on American Legislation, by Prof. F. H. Dixon of Dartmouth, author of State Railroad Control; in Trusts, by Prof. J. W. Jenks, the great American authority on the subject; in Employers’ Liability; in Trade Unions and in Strikes and Lockouts, both by Carroll D. Wright, late U. S. Commissioner of Labor; Bankruptcy, by Edward Manson, author of Law of Bankruptcy; and in Insurance (Vol. 14, especially p. 662 c).

(e) by general legal articles like: Common Law; Criminal Law, by W. F. Craies, editor of Archbold On Criminal Pleading; Liquor Laws, by Arthur Shadwell, author of Drink, Temperance and Legislation; Medical Jurisprudence, by H. H. Littlejohn, professor of forensic medicine in the University of Edinburgh; Military Law, by Sir John Scott, former deputy judge-advocate-general, British Army; Navigation Laws, by James Williams, of Lincoln College, Oxford; Press Laws; Seamen, Laws, relating to, etc.

and (f) by sections and paragraphs on American law in hundreds of articles on legal topics—for list see below.

Biographies of Lawyers

The following list of American jurists does not include all American lawyers about whom there are separate articles in the Britannica, but will serve to suggest a brief course of biographical readings which the lawyer could not duplicate even in a special and expensive work on the American bar:

Of great value to the student of law, as widening his scope, would be a course of more general reading. This should include:

(a) the articles Law, Jurisprudence and Comparative Jurisprudence, by Paul Vinogradoff, Corpus professor of jurisprudence at Oxford.

(b) articles on national and other legal systems, such as

English Law, History, by the late Frederick W. Maitland, Downing professor of English law at Cambridge.

Anglo-Saxon Law, by Paul Vinogradoff.

Germanic Laws, Early, by Professor Christian Pfister, of the Sorbonne.

Code Napoléon, by Jean Paul Esmein, professor of law in the University of Paris, and Roman Law, probably one of the most remarkable articles in the new edition and of the utmost importance (as in a less degree are the articles Code and Code Napoléon) to the student of civil law. It is based on the well-known article contributed to the Ninth Edition of the Britannica by James Muirhead, professor of civil law, Edinburgh; but the article is actually the work of the reviser, Henry Goudy, regius professor of civil law, Oxford, and it may well be called the best present treatment of the subject. The article is a brief text-book in itself, containing matter equivalent in length to nearly 200 pages of this Guide. The treatment is historical, beginning with the almost mythical regal period and throwing light on the laws before the XII Tables, but this does not mean that the later period, legally more important, is not treated with proper fullness so that the practical as well as the theoretical is considered.

Some Legal Systems

Slightly remoter systems are the subjects of separate articles: Salic Law, by Professor Pfister of the Sorbonne; Brehon Laws, by Lawrence Ginnell, M. P., author of a monograph on the subject; Welsh Laws; an elaborate article on the little-known subject Greek Law, by John Edwin Sandys of Cambridge, author of History of Classical Scholarship; Indian Law, by Sir William Markby, reader in Indian Law at Oxford, formerly judge of the High Court of Calcutta; Mahommedan Law (a subject no longer alien to the American because of the large number of Mahommedans in the Philippines), by D. B. Macdonald, professor in Hartford Theological Seminary, and author of Development of Muslim Theology; and Babylonian Law (by C. H. W. Johns, Master of St. Catharine’s, Cambridge, author of The Oldest Code of Laws, etc.), 147containing a summary of the famous code of King Khammurabi.

The following list does not include the biographies of lawyers and is not a complete list of all topics pertaining to law in the Encyclopaedia Britannica, but it will give some idea of the scope of the legal department of the work.

CHAPTER XXVII
FOR BANKERS AND FINANCIERS

Social History

Of all classes of business men, bankers and financiers study most closely the general tendencies of public opinion and the general course of industrial and commercial development. Each day’s financial news reports a position which has been reached in the path of a movement of which the origin and earlier course—and therefore the direction—must be sought in the record of past months and years, and sometimes in the record of a past century. But the banker who turns to the standard histories in his library with the desire to trace the course of any gradual and long-continued development is generally disappointed. It is only of late that historical investigation has been directed to social and commercial activities rather than to politics and wars. Yet the history of civilization may be said to lie in the course of finance and commerce much more than in party strife and in civil and international wars. For the latter always arrest for the moment, even if they ultimately further, the progress of civilization.

International Finance

The new Britannica has been called “the most comprehensive of all surveys of past and present civilization,” and its treatment of finance and commerce possesses a breadth and sweep directly due to the international character of the book. The American financier knows that under existing conditions he must take into account the laws and usages of foreign countries in regard to banking, currency, taxation, stock exchange transactions, corporations and all the other methods and appliances used in dealing with money and credit. The Britannica could not have covered this broad field authoritatively if its articles had all been written by Americans instead of being contributed, as they are, by specialists of twenty countries. And the very first step, in examining any question of American finance, may be to consider what has been done abroad. For example, there has been adopted in Louisiana a system of rural credit such as was strongly urged, for more general use, during President Taft’s administration. That would seem to be purely a matter of internal policy. But for a description of the actual working of such a system, the sources of information are in the Britannica article Raiffeisen (Vol. 22, p. 817), the German banker who perfected the system of agrarian credits, in the article Schulze-Delitzsch 152(Vol. 24, p. 383), the Saxon economist who founded the German central bureau of co-operative societies, and in the article Co-Operation (Vol. 7, p. 82), where the Danish system of financing farmers is described and compared with the German and French methods.

Systematic reading in the Britannica on financial subjects should begin with the article Finance (Vol. 10, p. 347, equivalent to 20 pages of this Guide), by C. F. Bastable, professor of political economy in the University of Dublin, whose books on economics have been largely read in the United States. This article deals with state revenue and expenditure, or public finance, after pointing out the prevailing looseness in the use of the word finance. It is interesting to know that “in the later middle ages, especially in Germany, the word finance acquired the sense of usurious or oppressive dealing with money and capital.” So long ago did an unpopular meaning attach to a term connected with “big business.” The same is true of the word usury, which originally meant use, or interest; and the Britannica in an article on Usury (Vol. 27, p. 811) says “usury, if used in the old sense of the term could embrace a multitude of modes of receiving interest upon capital to which not the slightest moral taint is attached.” In each case there may have been some reason besides chance for the development of the unpleasant meaning, and it has always been the custom of the spendthrift and the gambler to make the wrong use of words as well as of business methods. But what we call public finance was a century ago called political economy, “political” being used strictly to apply to the state, and “economy” in its original sense of housekeeping or house-rule. The word “economy” has thus become broader, as the word “usury” has become narrower, in significance.

Early Economics

It is curious to see how one page after another of the historical section of this article describes theories of finance which are to-day propounded by popular agitators as if they were absolutely new and not only describes them but shows how they were tried and how they failed. The eastern empires taxed land produce, usually to the extent of one fourth or one fifth (two tithes). In Athens, under a more elaborate system, the state owned and administered agricultural land and silver mines, and yet this state ownership, instead of making for democratic equality, resulted in too rigid a separation of classes; and the Athenian attempt to surtax the rich citizens in order to defray the cost of public games and theatrical performances and to equip ships (in this case a close parallel to certain recent German legislation) led, as class taxation always does, to ingenious evasions and, in the end, increased the power it sought to restrict.

In Rome, home taxes were suspended as soon as conquests brought tribute from Spain and Africa. But taxes were always the curse of the provinces, and the vexatious method of the tax “may be regarded as an additional tax.” “The defects of the financial organization were a serious influence in the complex of causes that brought about the fall of the Republic.” The early Empire took its revenues from public lands, from monopolies, from the land tax, from customs, and from taxes on inheritances (5%), sales (10%) and the purchase of slaves (40%). There was no just distribution of taxation among the territorial divisions, and the burden fell too much upon the actual workers and their employers. In the kingdoms which succeeded the Empire after its fall, Roman customs survived in finance, as in all departments of government; and there was a want of coherent policy until the time of Charlemagne, when centralization produced a better system. But scientific taxation did not really exist until, in the 15th century, under Charles VII, the first French standing army was 153created, and its needs led to a new and more intelligent system. In England, the co-ordination and control of public revenue and expenditure was similarly due to the growth of the navy. Since then the tendency has been to include taxes in general categories; the need for national credit has developed a system of national debts; and expenditures and receipts are now governed by legislative sanction. Local finance has been revolutionized by modern business methods, too slowly adopted it is true, and by the gradual change from private to public control of water supply, lighting and transportation.

Taxation and Tariff

The articles Taxation, National Debt and Tariff should be read after this article on public finance. Taxation (Vol. 26, p. 458; equivalent to 25 pages of this Guide), by Sir Robert Giffen, formerly Controller-General of the British Board of Trade, classifies taxes, points out that direct and indirect taxes are not intrinsically different and that such a classification is merely a matter of convenience, and the article proceeds to describe the principal taxes. It should be supplemented by reading the sections on finance in the articles on various countries and especially by the article English Finance (Vol. 9, p. 458; equivalent to 25 pages in this Guide), the section on Finance in the article United States (Vol. 27, p. 660) and similar sections in the articles on each of the states of the Union. These articles give definite information about public debts, national or state, but the student should read carefully the main treatment in the article National Debt (Vol. 19, p. 266). The articles Tariff (Vol. 26, p. 422), by Prof. F. W. Taussig of Harvard, author of The Tariff History of the United States; Protection (Vol. 22, p. 464), by Edmund Janes James, president of the University of Illinois and author of the well-known History of American Tariff Legislation; and Free Trade (Vol. 11, p. 88), by William Cunningham, author of Growth of English Industry and Commerce, will be of great interest. The student should read besides the sketches in the Britannica of Henry Clay (Vol. 6, p. 470), by Carl Schurz, of William McKinley (Vol. 17, p. 256), Roger Q. Mills (Vol. 18, p. 475), and of other American tariff-leaders, and, for the tariff reform movement in England, the articles on Joseph Chamberlain (Vol. 5, p. 813) and Arthur J. Balfour (Vol. 3, p. 250). Before turning from public to private finance the reader should study the articles Exchequer (Vol. 10, p. 54) and Treasury (Vol. 27, p. 228).

Private Finance

For what may be called private finance, the student should turn first to the article Banks and Banking (Vol. 3, p. 334; equivalent to nearly 60 pages in this Guide), by Sir R. H. I. Palgrave, director of Barclay & Co., Ltd., Bankers; Charles A. Conant, author of The Principles of Money and Banking; and Sir J. R. Paget, author of the Law of Banking. Further information on the early history of banking in the United States will be found in the historical section of the article United States (Vol. 27, especially p. 697), and in the article Andrew Jackson (Vol. 15, p. 107) by Prof. W. G. Sumner of Yale.

Currency

Next in his course of reading, he should study the article Money (Vol. 18, p. 694; equivalent to 45 pages in this Guide), by C. F. Bastable. This deals with: the functions and varieties of money, including coined money and all else that can take its place in facilitating exchange, in estimating comparative values, as a standard of value or of deferred payments, as a store of value; the determining causes of the value of money and of the quantity of money required by a country, the credit theory, early forms of currency—greenstones, ochre, shells, furs, oxen, grain; metals 154as money; coinage and state control; representative money, and credit as money; economic aspects of the production and consumption of precious metals; review of the history of some important currencies—Greek, Roman, medieval, English and French coinages are treated in the article Numismatics (Vol. 19, pp. 869–911, equivalent to 135 pages of this Guide, with 6 plates and 11 other text illustrations); which discusses such questions as the constitution of money; typical currency systems; statistics of production of gold and silver since the discovery of America, and coinage systems. Other relevant articles are Bimetallism, and Monetary Conferences for the relation of the metals; and the articles Gold, Silver, Seigniorage, Demonetization, Gresham’s Law, Token Money and Greenbacks. In the article on the George Junior Republic (Vol. 11, p. 749), the “children’s state” at Freeville, N. Y., the student will find an interesting proof of the relation of “token” to “real” money. “The government issued its own currency in tin and later in aluminium and ‘American’ money could not be passed within the 48 acres of the Republic until 1906, when depreciation forced the Republic’s coinage out of use and ‘American’ coin was made legal tender.”

Banking

For information as to the methods of financial business the reader should study the articles Savings Banks (Vol. 24, p. 243) by Sir G. C. T. Bartley, founder of the National Penny Bank, and Bradford Rhodes, founder of the 34th St. National Bank, N. Y. Friendly Societies (Vol. 11, p. 217); Trust Company (Vol. 27, p. 329), by Charles A. Conant, author of The Principles of Money and Banking; Clearing House (Vol. 6, p. 476); Letter of Credit (Vol. 16, p. 501); Stock Exchange (Vol. 25, p. 930); Bill of Exchange (Vol. 3, p. 940); Exchange (Vol. 10, p. 50); Futures (Vol. 11, p. 375); Time Bargains (Vol. 26, p. 988); Market (Vol. 17, p. 731), by Wynnard Hooper, financial editor of The Times, London, with sections on Movements of Prices, Cycles, Tendency to Equilibrium, Disturbance of Equilibrium, Future Delivery, Corners, Money Market, The Great Banks, Foreign Loans, and Discount Houses; Consols (Vol. 6, p. 979); Coupon (Vol. 7, p. 318); Dividend (Vol. 8, p. 331); and Premium (Vol. 22, p. 279).

Information on distinctive banking and business laws in the separate states will be found in the section on finance of the article on each state. For instance in the article Oklahoma (Vol. 20, p. 60) there is a summary of the bank deposit guaranty fund.

For insurance see the chapter in this Guide For Insurance Men.

Lives of Financiers

In financial biography, as in history, theory and practice, the Britannica is valuable because of its full, clear and authoritative treatment. The student will find articles on great financiers, such as the Astors, the Vanderbilts, the Barings, the Rothschilds, James Law, George Peabody, James Fisk, Jay Gould, E. H. Harriman, James J. Hill, J. P. Morgan; and on great authors on the subjects of economics and finance,—for instance, Malthus, Adam Smith, Walter Bagehot, Ricardo, Roscher, Boehm von Bawerk, Thorold Rogers, H. C. Carey, E. R. A. Seligman, F. A. Walker, J. W. Jenks, F. W. Taussig, Richmond Mayo-Smith and A. T. Hadley.

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA OF INTEREST TO BANKERS

CHAPTER XXVIII
FOR CIVIL SERVICE MEN AND WOMEN AND STUDENTS PREPARING FOR SERVICE EXAMINATIONS

Federal, state and municipal civil service includes so many specialized branches that a number of the chapters in Part 1 of this Guide, devoted to courses of reading adapted to various occupations (such as For Teachers, For Engineers, For Builders and Contractors) will supply useful indications. Part 2 of the Guide, containing classified courses of educational reading, will point to articles especially serviceable to those who are preparing for examinations and, for that reason, desire to review the ground they covered at school or college.

Part 4 of the Guide, with its special references to the subjects to which administration and legislation are chiefly directed, should be carefully examined. There the reader will find lists of articles dealing with schools and institutions; the defective classes; crime and alcohol; revenue and finance; ballot representation and suffrage; trusts, competition, co-operation and socialism; labour and immigration; legislation and the administration of justice; foreign relations and the expansion of the United States.

International Comparisons

The present chapter, in order that repetition may be avoided, deals only with the aspects of federal, state and municipal government which are most closely related to civil service organization. The article Civil Service (Vol. 6, p. 412) devotes nearly as much space to the British as to the American service, and its information as to British organization, examinations, salaries and pensions will greatly interest those to whom the details needed for an international comparison have not been elsewhere accessible. Until 1855 all British appointments were by nomination; and although the service was quite free from the abominable system of secretly taxing salaries in order to support party funds, that was about all that can be said for it. There was hardly a pretense of selection for merit. Influential families and the relatives and personal friends of ministers of state and of ladies whom kings delighted to honor monopolized the appointments. Many posts were pure sinecures, and in many others the work was done by a substitute to whom the nominee paid less than half the salary or fees he received. Under George III the system was at its worst, and the discontent that was aroused in the American colonies by the maladministration of colonial affairs was “one of the efficient causes of the American revolution.” 157The reforms begun in 1855 had by 1870 been so successful that since then open competition has been the general rule; and where nomination is still required, as in the Foreign Office and the Education Department, searching examinations must be passed. Women are employed in the post-office, board of agriculture, customs, India office, department of agriculture, local government board and home office (factory inspectors, etc.). The age for compulsory retirement is 65, but the commissioners may prolong this five years in exceptional cases. Subjects of examinations, salaries and pensions are described in the article. Since 1859 there has been a superannuation pension of ¹⁰⁄₆₀ of the annual salary and emoluments to any one serving 10 years and less than 11, and an additional sixtieth for each year’s service more than ten.

Civil Service in the United States

In the same article there is an historical treatment of civil service in the United States and of its gradual reform and extension since 1883. This may well be supplemented by a study of the American party system of government and of the “spoils system” under which party loyalty and personal service to a party machine became the test of a candidate’s fitness for office. For this the student should refer to the section (Vol. 27, p. 646) on Constitution and Government, of the article United States, written by James Bryce, author of The American Commonwealth and formerly British ambassador to the United States; see p. 658–659, especially. There is also much information in the section History of the same article, especially paragraphs 168, 169 (p. 697) on the beginnings of the spoils system in Jackson’s time, paragraph 333 (p. 722) on the beginnings of reform under Hayes, and paragraph 343 (p. 724) on Cleveland and civil service reform, etc.; and biographies of Andrew Jackson, W. L. Marcy and Martin Van Buren (for the spoils system) and of George William Curtis, E. L. Godkin, Carl Schurz, R. B. Hayes, Grover Cleveland, Benjamin Harrison, William McKinley and Theodore Roosevelt.

Information in regard to the civil service systems of states and cities may be found in separate state and city articles,—in addition to the material on state and city systems in the articles already mentioned.

“General Information” Papers

The wide-awake student who has read this far in this chapter and has referred to the articles mentioned in the Britannica, will now be saying to himself: “There is evidently much valuable information in the encyclopaedia about the history and status of civil service reform, and this seems as full and complete for the United States as for Great Britain. If other topics are as fully treated in the Britannica, it will be invaluable to me in preparation for general information papers for civil service examinations.” And he will be right. For instance, the government employe must know more about the government and its machinery and history than does the average “man in the street”,—and he can learn this from the Britannica.

As has already been pointed out, the main treatment of the government of the United States in the Britannica is by James Bryce. This means that it is authoritative and that it is interesting and that in both these qualities it is far superior to the usual text book of “civics” or “civil government.” It occupies pp. 646–661 of volume 27, and is equivalent to about 50 pages of this Guide—so that it is more than a bare outline. And it is followed by a valuable bibliography of the subject to guide the student to the best books on any special topic which he may wish to pursue further.

158But this is far from being all the information in the Britannica on the subject. The contribution of Mr. Bryce is only a part of the article United States. The entire article would take up nearly 400 pages if printed in the style of this Guide. It treats the physical geography, geology, climate, fauna and flora, population, industries and commerce, government, finance, army and history of the country—the equivalent of 225 pages of this Guide is devoted to History alone. All parts of this article contain valuable information about the country; and this article is supplemented by hundreds of others:—

(a) Articles on each of the states, arranged much as in the article United States with sections on history and government serving as an authoritative summary of the salient facts, and making up a complete course on state “civics,” government and history;

(b) Articles on cities and towns with similar treatment of the distinctive elements in the government of each, and of the main points in their history;

(c) Separate articles on the important rivers, lakes, mountains and other topics in physical geography;

(d) Separate articles on topics in American history and government: such as Nullification, State Rights, Fugitive Slave Laws, Electoral Commission; and

(e) Biographies of great Americans, famous in war, politics, administration, business, science, art, religion,—in short all fields of activity.

In brief, whether for an examination on general information, on civics, on history, or on the special branch of the civil service to which the student wishes to be appointed, no book will give as valuable and complete information as the Britannica.

CHAPTER XXIX
FOR ARMY OFFICERS

A New Departure

It is often said of an article in the Britannica that it is “the last word on the subject,” so thoroughly has the authority of the book been recognized. This is quite as true of military articles as of those in any other field; but of the military articles it may also be said that they are the first word. Of course, there have been, in previous editions of the Britannica and, to a less degree in minor works of general reference, articles on military history and biography. But in the new Britannica, for the first time, all branches of military knowledge are included, and the spirit of the entire treatment is comparative and critical. The military student will find a discussion not merely of Napoleon’s influence on army organization or Frederick’s influence on cavalry (in the articles on these two leaders), but also of the influence of army organization on Napoleon (in the articles on the French Revolutionary Wars and the Napoleonic Campaigns), and of cavalry drill on the peculiar generalship of Frederick (in such articles as Seven Years’ War, on Hohenfriedberg, and on Rossbach). Put more concretely, the novelty consists in the inclusion of articles on wars, campaigns and battles, chosen because of their importance in military as well as in political history, 159and treated from the point of view of the military critic and with particular attention to the lessons they contain for the modern army officer. The care with which the battles and campaigns of the American Civil War are analyzed and criticized will be of singularly great interest to the American soldier, who will immediately notice among the contributors to the military department of the Britannica such names as those of Capt. C. F. Atkinson, author of The Wilderness and Cold Harbour, Major G. W. Redway, author of Fredericksburg: A Study in War, Col. G. F. R. Henderson, author of Stonewall Jackson and the American Civil War, and Col. F. N. Maude, lecturer in military history, University of Manchester.

Army

The best starting point for a study of military affairs in the Britannica is the article Army (Vol. 2, p. 592; equivalent to more than 100 pages of this Guide). This “key” article may be outlined as follows:

General History

Early Armies—Egypt (chariots, infantry, archers). Babylon and Assyria (horsemen, charioteers, etc.). Persian, largely cavalry; the first “organized” army. Greece,—compulsory service; citizen militia; heavy infantry the strong arm; phalanx, the Greek formation. Sparta,—a nation in arms. Greek mercenaries. Epaminondas and Thebes—new phalanx tactics, “oblique order”; development of cavalry. Alexander and Macedon—a modified Theban system. Carthage—mercenary troops led by great generals, with modification of phalanx for greater elasticity. Rome—army under the Republic; its characteristics; under the Empire; see also separate article Roman Army (Vol. 23, p. 471), by Professor F. J. Haverfield of Oxford. The Dark Ages, the Byzantines, and the development of Feudalism. Medieval Mercenaries. Infantry in Feudal Times. The Crusades. The Period of Transition (1290–1490), development of English archers and of professional soldiery,—condottieri, Swiss, Landsknechts. The Spanish army: “at the disposal of its sovereign, trained to the due professional standard and organized in the best way found by experience.” The Sixteenth Century—rise of the heavy cavalry armed with pistols, and fall of the pikemen. Dutch System—attention to minute detail; William the Silent and Maurice of Nassau. Thirty Years’ War—the Werbe-system, small standing army to be increased by levy at time of need. The Swedish Army—conscription and feudal indelta; Gustavus. The English Civil War—real national armies; Cromwell and the “New Model” only an incident without influence on army organization. Standing Armies. French pre-eminence after Rocroi. Small field armies, well-fed and sheltered for economy’s sake. 18th Century organization: “linear” formation and its negative results. Frederick the Great: the art of war a formal science. The French Revolution: a “nation in arms,” a war-machine more powerful than Frederick’s. The conscription in France. Napoleon—his attempt to make a dynastic army out of the “nation in arms.” The Grande Armée of 1805–1806; development of artillery; the army corps. The Wars of Liberation: new Prussian army; excellent Austrian organization. Armies of 1815–1870. American Civil War,—its slow decision. Contrast between French and Prussian staff systems in 1870. Modern Developments: German model followed slavishly except in Great Britain and the United States.

Present Day Armies: The general accounts of existing armies, and of the past organizations of each country, are supplemented by detailed information in the articles on different countries. Especial attention should be given to the military information in the article on Japan. Army Systems: Compulsory Service; Conscription; Voluntary Service; Militia.

Army Organization

The three chief arms—their relative importance: proportion on peace footing—5 160or 6 guns per 1000 men, 16 cavalry soldiers to 1000 men of other arms; proportion in war—Russian (1905) 3½ guns per 1000 men of other arms, 60 cavalry to 1000 infantry; Japanese (1905), 2½ field guns per 1000 men, 37 cavalry to 1000 infantry. Command: Brigade; Division; Army Corps, its constitution; Army; Chief Command of group of armies; chief of general staff and his relations to commander-in-chief—for example, von Moltke and King William. Branches of Administration—war office and general staff.

Table: Comparative strength of Various Armies.

Bibliography (2000 words)

Theory and Practice

Next in order the student should turn to the article War (Vol. 28, p. 305; equivalent to 40 pages of this Guide), by Col. G. F. R. Henderson, well known for his books on the American Civil War (Fredericksburg, Stonewall Jackson, etc.), with a section on Laws of War, by Sir Thomas Barclay. Col. Henderson’s article lays down important general principles. An analysis of modern conditions shows that improved methods of communication have made war a much speedier process, in which the victorious general cannot make mistakes at the outset. That intellect and education count for more than stamina and courage was the lesson of the Franco-Prussian War—a lesson learned by the Prussians before that war. Modern war is a science and the amateur has little chance; in this respect things have changed. “It is impossible to doubt that had the Boers of 1899 possessed a staff of trained strategists, they would have shaken the British Empire to its foundations.” There must be a concert between diplomacy and strategy. Civilian war ministers cannot solve strategic problems. The greater deadliness of modern warfare, and the greater moral effect of being under fire call for better foresight, strategy and morale. The relation of army and navy is discussed and the new doctrine of “sea-power” explained. (See the chapter For Naval Officers in this Guide). The remaining topics in the article are: weakness of allied armies; railways and sea as lines of operation; amphibious power; value of unprofessional troops and the need of professional leaders.

Arms of Service

In the articles Infantry (Vol. 14, p. 517; 2 plates; equivalent to 35 pages of this Guide) and Artillery (Vol. 2, p. 685; 2 plates; equivalent to 30 pages of this Guide), both by Capt. Atkinson, and in the article Cavalry (Vol. 5, p. 563; illustrated with 2 plates and 1 cut; in length equivalent to 30 pages of this Guide), by Col. F. N. Maude, the student will find an elaborate treatment of the history, organization and tactics (especially since 1870) of each of these arms. For details of their organization and equipment he should read the articles Engineers, Staff, Mounted Infantry, Supply and Transport (Military), Officers, Ambulance, Fortification, Machine Guns, Coast Defence, Ordnance, Ballistics, Sights, Rifle, Gun, Pistol, Explosive, Gunpowder, Guncotton, Cordite and Nitro-glycerine. In many geographical articles there are descriptions of the world’s great fortifications, e. g., Paris, Antwerp, and Verdun. Other topics of a more miscellaneous character are covered by the articles Army Signalling, Pigeon Post, Signals, War Game, Manoeuvres, Kite, etc.

161The military use of aeroplanes and balloons is very fully shown in the articles Flight and Aeronautics.

Strategy and Tactics

Before taking up a systematic course in military history, there are two general articles that the military student should read: Tactics (Vol. 26, p. 347; equivalent in length to 20 pages of this Guide), by Maj. Neill Malcolm, editor of the Science of War; and Strategy (Vol. 25, p. 986; equivalent to 35 pages of this Guide), by Col. F. N. Maude. The former article should be compared with the sections on tactics in the articles Infantry, Cavalry and Artillery. Major Malcolm makes much of the continuity of military history, comparing Metaurus and Ramillies with the fighting in Manchuria, and Wellington at Maya with Oyama in his contest with Kuropatkin. The mistakes that have been made once should not be made again; at least the careful student of tactical history may see to it that if they are repeated, it is done by his opponent and not by himself. Modern tactics are different from ancient because of greater fire-power and improved methods of transportation. Cavalry tactics are in an uncertain condition; there is no recent practice to serve as a guide, since neither in South Africa in the Boer war nor in Manchuria during the Russo-Japanese conflict was cavalry much used. Infantry must co-operate to make artillery bombardment effective. An interesting discussion of offensive and defensive fighting is summed up in the words “To the true general the purely defensive battle is unknown” and as evidence are adduced Wellington at Salamanca and Oyama at Sha-ho. Oyama’s victory in the latter battle, it is pointed out, shows the increased ease of the process of envelopment, which has resulted in discarding corps artillery in favour of divisional artillery. The importance—and the possibility—of the counter stroke; the danger of using for the relief of one’s own troops forces which might better be launched at the enemy’s weakest spot; and the similar unwisdom of any negative tactics, adopted to avoid loss, as in “holding attacks”—are the other principal points made in the article.

The article Strategy should be read in conjunction with the articles Army and War. It is impossible to summarize or outline it here, but it is worth noting that the article closes with a definition and discussion of the following terms: Base; Line of Communication; Line of Operations; Exterior Lines; Obstacles.

Military History and Criticism

For a reasoned history of warfare in more detail than has been given in the general articles already alluded to, the reader will find some outline like the following valuable, the arrangement being roughly chronological and all words in Italics being titles of articles in the Britannica.

Marathon; Darius; Miltiades; Herodotus.

Thermopylae; Leonidas; Salamis.

Peloponnesian War; Pericles; Cleon; Pylos; Brasidas; Alcibiades; Critias; Thucydides; Xenophon.

Epaminondas; Mantineia.

Philip II of Macedon; Olynthus; Chaeroneia; Alexander the Great; Arrian.

Pyrrhus.

Roman Army; Caudine Forks; Punic Wars; Carthage; Hanno; Hannibal; Hasdrubal; Mago; Trasimene; Fabius (Cunctator); Cannae; Scipio Africanus; Scipio Aemilianus; Aemilius Paulus; Perseus; Marius; Jugurtha; Sulla; Sertorius; Pompey; Caesar; Antonius (Mark Antony).

Charles Martel.

Charlemagne.

William I (of England); Hastings; Standard, Battle of.

Crusades (equivalent to 90 pages of this Guide); Godfrey of Bouillon; Raymund of Toulouse; Richard I (of 162England); Philip II (of France); Saladin; Henry VI (Roman Emperor); Baldwin I; Frederick II; Louis IX (of France).

Bouvines.

Bannockburn; Robert Bruce.

Hundred Years’ War; Philip VI; Edward III; Crécy; John of Bohemia; Edward (the Black Prince); Calais; Poitiers; John II (of France); Lancaster, House of (for John of Gaunt); Bertrand Du Guesclin; Henry V (of England); Agincourt; Joan of Arc; 1st Duke of Bedford (John Plantagenet); Count of Dunois.

Wars of the Roses; St. Albans; Towton; Earl of Warwick (Richard Neville); Edward IV.

Ravenna, battle of; Bayard (the chevalier); Gaston de Foix; Pescara; Navarro; Marignan; Francis I (of France).

Flodden; James IV (of Scotland); Norfolk, 3rd Duke.

St. Quentin (1557); Coligny; Montmorency (constable); Emmanuel Philibert.

Alva; William the Silent (Vol. 28, p. 672); Maurice of Nassau; Farnese (duke of Parma).

Thirty Years’ War; Maximilian I (of Bavaria); Frederick V (elector palatinate; Vol. 11, p. 59); Mansfeld; Tilly; Wallenstein; Gustavus Adolphus; Breitenfeld; Lützen; Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar; duc de Rohan; Frederick Henry; Gallas; Banér; Piccolomini; Turenne; Torstensson; Condé; Freiburg; Mercy; Nördlingen; Wrangel (1613–1676); Fronde.

Great Rebellion (English Civil Wars of 1642–52); Charles I (of England); Prince Rupert; Essex (2nd Earl, Vol. 9, p. 782); Edgehill; John Hotham; Baron Hopton; Sir William Waller; Duke of Newcastle (1592–1676); Fairfax of Cameron (2nd and 3rd Barons); Sir Bevil Grenville; Oliver Cromwell; Manchester, 2nd Earl of (Vol. 17, p. 543); Marston Moor; Leven; Skippon; Argyll, 8th Earl; Montrose; Lord Newark; Goring; Naseby; John Lambert; Charles Fleetwood; Dunbar; Thomas Harrison.

Dutch Wars; Louis XIV; Condé; Frederick William of Brandenburg; Turenne; Montecucculi; William III (of England); Duke of Luxembourg; Charles of Lorraine (Vol. 17, p. 11).

Vauban.

Grand Alliance, War of; Catinat; Luxembourg; Vauban; Fleurus; Louvois; Duc de Boufflers; Coehoorn; William III of England; Steenkirk; Neerwinden; Villeroi.

Spanish Succession; Marlborough; Eugene of Savoy; Villars; Peterborough; Ruvigny; Catinat; Vendôme; Blenheim; Ramillies; Oudenarde; Malplaquet; Berwick.

Polish Succession War.

Austrian Succession; Frederick the Great; Count von Schwerin; L. A. Khevenhüller; Duc de Broglie; Traun; Charles (of Lorraine; Vol. 5, p. 936); Seckendorf; George II (of England); Noailles; Conti (Vol. 7, p. 28); Hohenfriedberg; Fontenoy; comte de Saxe (marshal); Duke of Cumberland; Ligonier; Belle-Isle.

Seven Years’ War (with 5 diagrams): Frederick the Great; Clive; Amherst; Wolfe; comte de Lally; Montcalm; Count von Browne; Ferdinand (of Brunswick); Daun; Zieten; F. E. J. Keith; Seydlitz; Rossbach; Soubise (1715–1787); Leuthen; Loudon; Kunersdorf; Finck; Minden; Sackville, 1st Viscount; Granby.

American War of Independence; Lexington; Concord; Bunker Hill; Joseph Warren; Israel Putnam; Thomas Gage; William Howe; Ethan Allen; Ticonderoga; George Washington; Benedict Arnold; Richard Montgomery; Long Island; Rufus Putnam; William Alexander; Trenton and Princeton; Henry Knox; Brandywine; Germantown; Burgoyne; Bennington; John Stark; Saratoga; George Rogers Clark; Sir Henry Clinton; Monmouth; John Sullivan; Anthony Wayne; William Moultrie; Charleston (S. C.); Francis Marion; Thomas Sumter; Andrew Pickens; Horatio Gates; Nathanael Greene; Cornwallis; Kalb; Camden; King’s Mountain; Daniel Morgan; 163Henry Lee; Tarleton; Eutawville; Lafayette; Yorktown.

French Revolutionary Wars (with 6 diagrams); Dumouriez; Kellerman (1735–1820); Custine; Jemappes; Gribeauval; Neerwinden (1793); Clerfayt; Vendée; L. N. M. Carnot; Jourdan; Wattignies; Joubert; Frederick Augustus, Duke of York; Souham; Moreau; Kray von Krajova; Vandamme; Pichegru; Marceau; Charles, archduke of Austria (Vol. 5, p. 935); Masséna; Napoleon; Augereau; Serurier; Joubert; Sir W. Sidney Smith; Kléber; Alexandria; Oudinot; Suvarov; Borodino; Macdonald; Marengo; Murat; Lannes; Berthier; Bautzen.

Napoleonic Campaigns (9 diagrams; and see, on p. 233 of Vol. 19, “The Military Character of Napoleon”); Napoleon; Wrede; Murat; Charles XIV (Bernadotte); Marmont; Davout; Ney; Lannes; Soult; Berthier; Angereau; Dupont de l’Etang; Austerlitz; Kutusov; Hohenlohe (Vol. 13, p. 572); Blücher; Lasalle; Massenbach; Kalckreuth; Scharnhorst; Lefebvre-Desnoëttes; Count von Bennigsen; Eylau; Friedland; Grouchy; Mortier; Senarmont; Oudinot; Massena; Aspern-Essling; Charles, archduke of Austria; Bellegarde; Wagram; Beauharnais; Macdonald; Jerome Bonaparte (Vol. 4, p. 195); Barclay de Tolly; Bagration; Victor-Perrin; Yorck von Wartenburg; Lauriston; Wittgenstein; Bautzen; Schwarzenberg; Gouvion St. Cyr; Dresden (battle).

Peninsular War; Junot; Murat; Dupont de l’Etang; Moncey; Palafox y Melzi; Wellington; Sir John Moore; Sir David Baird; Talavera; Suchet; Sebastiani; Foy; Lord Hill; Lord Lynedoch; W. C. Beresford; Salamanca; Clausel; O’Donnell; Vitoria; Sir William Napier.

American War of 1812; Isaac Brock; Dearborn; Baltimore; Washington; New Orleans; Andrew Jackson; Jacob Brown; James Wilkinson; and for sea-fighting the titles in the chapter of this Guide: For Naval Officers.

Waterloo Campaign (with 3 maps); Napoleon; Murat; Schwarzenberg; Barclay de Tolly; Wellington; Blücher; Lord Hill; Anglesey; D’Erlon; Gneisenau; Gérard; Grouchy; Vandamme; Thielmann; Bülow (1755–1816); Ney; Exelmans; Pajol; Picton.

Greek Independence; Ypsilanti; Mavrocordato; Coraës; Dundonald; Sir Richard Church.

Russo-Turkish Wars (1828–29); Paskevich; Diebitsch (1877–78); Osman; Skobelev; Plevna (with diagram); Todleben; Shipka Pass.

Crimean War (with 2 diagrams): Gorchakov; Hess; Raglan; Saint Arnaud; Canrobert; Pelissier; Menshikov (1787–1869); Bosquet; Todleben; Alma; Balaklava; Scarlett; Cardigan; Inkerman; Sir George Brown; Sir George Cathcart; Kinglake.

Italian Wars (1848–1870); Radetzky; Charles Albert of Sardinia (Vol. 5, p. 938); Durando; Pepe; Victor Emmanuel; Pelissier; Canrobert; La Marmora; Napoleon III; Forey; MacMahon; Bazaine; Wimpffen; Benedek; Niel; Custozza; Cialdini.

American Civil War; Bull Run; McDowell; Beauregard; J. E. Johnston; R. E. Lee; Rosecrans; Lexington, Mo.; Fremont; Nathaniel Lyon; F. P. Blair, Jr.; Pope; Burnside; B. F. Butler; McClellan; A. S. Johnston; G. H. Thomas; U. S. Grant; C. F. Smith; Lew Wallace; McClernand; Halleck; O. M. Mitchel; Shiloh; N. P. Banks; T. J. (Stonewall) Jackson; Shenandoah; Fair Oaks; Seven Days; A. P. Hill; D. H. Hill; J. E. B. Stuart; Braxton Bragg; Longstreet; Bull Run (second battle); Ewell; Sigel; Hooker; Kearny; Fitz-John Porter; Antietam; E. V. Sumner; Hood; Burnside; Van Dorn; Fredericksburg; W. B. Franklin; John F. Reynolds; D. N. Couch; Stone River; Hardee; A. McD. McCook; T. L. Crittenden; G. H. Thomas; J. C. Breckinridge; McPherson; Chancellorsville; T. F. Meagher; Meade; Gettysburg; O. O. Howard; Doubleday; Early; Hancock; Sickles; Vicksburg; J. H. Morgan; Chickamauga; N. B. Forrest; Chattanooga; Sheridan; Wilderness (4 diagrams); Fitz-Hugh 164Lee; J. H. Wilson; G. K. Warren; John Sedgwick; Merritt; R. H. Anderson; Spottsylvania; Cold Harbor; Petersburg; Shenandoah Valley; Cedar Creek; W. T. Sherman; Marietta; Atlanta; Slocum; Schofield; Joseph Wheeler; J. A. Logan; Nashville; Richmond; Appomatox Court-House; Durham, N. C.

Seven Weeks’ War (with 2 diagrams): William I (of Germany); Moltke; Benedek; Frederick III (of Germany); Frederick Charles (of Prussia; Vol. 11, p. 61); Steinmetz; Blumenthal; Hohenlohe-Ingelfingen (Vol. 13, p. 573b); Goeben; and see Italian Wars above.

Franco-German War; Napoleon III; Niel; Moltke; William I (of Germany); Steinmetz; Frossard; MacMahon; Wörth (with plan); Bazaine; Metz (2 plans); Alvensleben; Canrobert; Bourbaki; Leboeuf; Manteuffel; Caprivi; Prince Frederick Charles; Sedan (with plan); Vinoy; Wimpffen; Gallifet; Werder; Gambetta; Freycinet; Aurelle de Paladines; Orleans; Bourbaki; Le Mans; Chanzy; Faidherbe; Belfort; Clinchant; Paris.

Servo-Bulgarian War; Alexander of Bulgaria (Vol. 1, p. 544); Milan of Servia.

Greco-Turkish War; Edhem Pasha.

Spanish-American War; Joseph Wheeler; F. V. Greene; Roosevelt; Miles.

Transvaal (Vol. 27, pp. 203 sqq. for Boer War of 1899–1902); Kruger; Cronje; P. J. Joubert; Sir George White; Buller; Lord Roberts; Lord Kitchener; J. H. De la Rey; Christian DeWet; Louis Botha.

Russo-Japanese War (with 4 diagrams); Kuroki; Kuropatkin; Inouye; Oku; Nozu; Oyama.

A Military Encyclopaedia

The military student will see from what has already been said that the Britannica is not merely a general work of reference but a valuable aid in the study of military history, biography, theory, practice and phraseology. The following alphabetical list names only the chief of the articles in the Britannica which make it a military cyclopaedia. As has been noticed above, many articles are special treatises in themselves dealing with many related topics, and—for instance—articles on wars or campaigns contain elaborate descriptions of separate battles. Many topics are treated in the Britannica, even if they are not in the following list, and their whereabouts may be readily learned by turning to the Index volume.

CHAPTER XXX
FOR NAVAL OFFICERS

The scope of a naval officer’s professional interests is so broad that the present chapter of this Guide could not, without duplicating other chapters, indicate all the aspects of the Britannica with which he is directly concerned. And he will find that his use of the Britannica is simplified by the subdivisions about to be specified, which virtually present his subjects under four different heads. Of course he may be called upon, in the exercise of his duties, simultaneously to think and to act in all his capacities, to concentrate upon the swift solution of one problem his knowledge of warfare, of shipbuilding, of navigation and of mechanical engineering; but his reading upon these topics naturally divides itself into these four parts.

Three Other Relevant Chapters

Inasmuch as army officers, even when they are at sea, are passengers, and, save in relation to the discipline of their troops, have nothing to do with the ship’s management, it could not be assumed that the present chapter would appeal to them. But naval officers, when co-operating in a land expedition, need to employ every kind of knowledge that is of use to army officers, and as the chapter For Army Officers in this Guide would therefore in any case be read by them, it has seemed convenient to include in it the description of those articles in the Britannica which deal with war in general.

The chapter For Marine Transportation Men in this Guide is also one to which the naval officer should refer, as it deals with ships and navigation in general. The articles Ship and Shipbuilding mentioned in that chapter are (except for the historical section of the former) by Sir Philip Watts, designer of the British “Dreadnoughts” and “Super-Dreadnoughts;” and the article Shipping is by Douglas Owen, of the Royal Naval War College at Portsmouth. Obviously these and many other articles described in that chapter are of the greatest importance to naval officers.

The chapter For Engineers in this Guide describes the articles dealing with steam engines, internal combustion engines, electrical machinery and fuels of all kinds; and it would be a waste of space to repeat in this chapter a summary of the Britannica treatment of these subjects.

All three of the chapters mentioned should therefore be treated as forming constituent parts of the general plan of this present chapter, in which the naval officer will find no repetition of their contents.

The Key Article

The article to which he will naturally first turn is Navy and Navies (Vol. 19, p. 299), by David Hannay, author of A Short History of the Royal Navy. This article is equivalent to 60 pages of this Guide in length. It contains:

169Naval Personnel.

Sketches of the Administrative History of navies: Athenian; Roman; Byzantine; Medieval; British, with special attention to the period since the Restoration, and the reforms under James II when Samuel Pepys was secretary;

French—modern navy dating from the time of Richelieu;

Spanish—a great navy without an organization before the 18th century;

Dutch—good seamen and well-fed, led by able admirals, but unorganized, and unimportant after the 17th century;

United States—the first great extra-European power on the sea;

Russian—dating from the reign of Peter the Great, when it was organized and led by foreigners.

The Balance of Navies in History: influence of sea-power—“when Napoleon fell, the navy of Great Britain was not merely the first in the world; it was the only powerful navy in existence.” Modern Rivalry between Italy and Germany (1871), United States (1890), Japan; England and the Dual Alliance—“naval scares” since 1874; British Naval Defence Act of 1889; Russia’s navy crushed (1904); new navies rivalling Great Britain and France,—Italy, Germany, United States, Japan.

Latest developments: “Dreadnoughts”; Building Programmes.

Bibliography (about 1800 words).

Naval Strategy and Tactics.

Historical evolution: inter-relation of the ship’s capacity and armament.

Early history: ramming demanded oars for propulsion; small warships, large fighting crews,—no blockade, short cruises;

Greek and Roman methods: boarding introduced by Romans; “bearding,” that is, fortifying with iron bands across the bows, an early form of armor plate.

Sailing ships: ramming discarded; “line ahead” formation displaces “line abreast”; principles of fighting tactics—order at beginning to be kept throughout, thus no advantage taken of enemy’s disorder; Clerk’s theories (1790–97)—not maximum safety but immediate mêlée the desideratum; Suffren, Rodney and Howe and their disregard of accepted tactics.

Improved shipbuilding and modern times: New problems—steam propulsion, its gain in speed, but its dependence on fuel; fleet in being; risk of transporting troops while enemy is unbeaten; ramming and pell-mell battles forbidden by torpedoes; searchlight as check to torpedoes; failure of attempts to “bottle up” harbours; gun-fire still the great factor; position; speed; submarines still an unknown factor.

Bibliography.

Naval Administration

The first part of this article Navy and Navies should be supplemented by the article Admiralty Administration (Vol. 1, p. 195), by Admiral Sir R. Vesey Hamilton, and, for the United States, the late Admiral W. T. Sampson. The American part of this article describes the divisions and the working of the Navy Department, its bureaus, judge advocate-general, office of naval intelligence, boards etc.; and there is additional information on the subject in such articles as Dockyards, and United States Naval Academy.

For the legal side of naval administration the reader should study the article Admiralty Jurisdiction (Vol. 1, p. 205), by Sir Walter Phillimore, former president of the International Law Association (and author of the Britannica article Admiralty, High Court of), and, for the United States, by J. Arthur Barrett; and also the general articles International Law (Vol. 14, p. 694), by Sir Thomas Barclay, author of Problems of International Practice and Diplomacy, and International Law, Private (Vol. 14, p. 701), by Dr. John Westlake, formerly professor of international law, Cambridge University, and member for the United Kingdom 170of the International (Hague) Court of Arbitration; as well as such special articles as Search (Vol. 24, p. 560), by Sir Thomas Barclay, and Sea Laws (Vol. 24, p. 535), by Sir Travers Twiss.

Policy, Strategy, Tactics

It has already been noticed that the closing part of the article Navy and Navies dealt with strategy and tactics in a general way. This subject is treated in fuller detail by Admiral Sir Cyprian Bridge, G.C.B. (former Director of Naval Intelligence, British Navy, author of Sea-Power and other Studies) in two articles Sea-Power (Vol. 24, p. 548) and Sea, Command of the (Vol. 24, p. 529). Each of these articles will be of great value and interest to the naval officer as a summary and criticism of the theories of Captain A. T. Mahan and Vice-Admiral P. H. Colomb; and this will be made evident by the brief outline of the two articles which follows.

Article, Sea-Power—Use of the term to mean (1) a state pre-eminently strong at sea; and (2)—as in this article—the various factors in a state’s naval strength. Thucydides as a forerunner of Mahan; he makes Pericles in comparing Athenian resources with those of her enemies comment on the importance of “sea-power.”

The meaning of sea-power can only be learned historically. Although there have been more land-wars, “the course of history has been profoundly changed more often by contests on the water.” Salamis saved Greece and held back Oriental invasion. The loss of the Peloponnesian War by Athens was due to her weakening sea-power. The First Punic War, Roman rather than Carthaginian control of the Mediterranean, was won by Roman naval predominance. Mahommedan conquest spread west in Africa only with the creation of a navy. The crusades could not have continued had not Mahommedan naval power sunk as the Venetian, Pisan, and Genoese grew. The defeat of Genoa by Venice gave the latter a right to perform the ceremony of “wedding the sea” with a ring as token of “perpetual sway.” Lepanto (1571) the end of Turkish sea-power.

Spanish and Portuguese sea-power crushed by English growth and the loss of the Armada. Early English naval history: the importance of the battle of Dover in 1217. Appearance of standing navies. The New World and its influence on sea-power. The sea-power of the Dutch; its sudden rise; its basis in foreign trade; the Dutch wars with England resulted in England’s becoming the first great naval power, but did not crush the United Provinces because of their sea-power. Torrington and the “Fleet in Being” in 1690. Change in naval operations in 17th century—the scene thereafter in the enemy’s waters, not near the coast of England.

The 18th century. Rise of Russia’s sea-power—an artificial creation. Seven Years’ War and its gains to Great Britain. War of American Independence: British mistakes—the enemy’s coast not considered the frontier. Wars of the French Revolution and Empire: Great Britain’s advantage not in organization, discipline or “science,” but in sea-experience.

The War of 1812. “The British had now to meet the élite of one of the finest communities of seamen ever known.... In any future war British sea-power, great as it may be, should not receive shocks like those that it unquestionably did suffer in 1812.”

Later Manifestations of Sea-Power. American Civil War—“By dominating the rivers the Federals cut the Confederacy asunder; and, by the power they possessed of moving troops by sea at will, perplexed and harassed the defence, and facilitated the occupation of important points.” Russo-Turkish War of 1877–78—Turkish control of Black Sea forced Russians to invade by land through the difficult Balkans. Chilean Civil War of 1891—an army defeated by a navy. Chino-Japanese War of 1894–95—Japanese navy in transport work and in crushing last resistance. Spanish-American War: “Spaniards 171were defeated by the superiority of the American sea-power.”

Article, Sea, Command of the—Sketch of Sovereignty of the Sea; Command different from Sovereignty or Dominion.

Attempts to gain Command: Dutch Wars.

Strategic Command or Control—largely the power of carrying out considerable over-sea expeditions at will. Seeking the enemy’s fleet. Temporary command in smaller operations.

Special Historical Articles

As for the army officer, so the Britannica has for the naval officer many separate articles on wars, campaigns, battles, generals, commanders. The following list of articles will serve as a guide to a course of reading constituting a history of naval warfare, furnishing the concrete separate facts on which are based the articles already described.

Ancient History.

Greece: articles Salamis, Themistocles, Xerxes I, Peloponnesian War, Pericles.

Rome: articles Punic Wars, Carthage, Pompey, Actium.

Medieval History.

Crusades; Swold; Dover, Battle of; Sluys, Battle of; Espagnols sur Mer (and article Edward III), Chioggia (and articles Venice and Genoa).

16th Century.

Lepanto (and article Don John of Austria).

Armada (and articles on Howard, Hawkins, Drake, Frobisher, Raleigh, Richard Grenville, and the other heroes of this first bright glow of England’s naval glory).

The Era of Sailing Vessels.

Dutch Wars (and articles Tromp, Robert Blake, Ayscue, De Ruyter, Cornelius De Witt, William Penn, George Monk, Sir John Lawson, James II, Prince Rupert, First Earl of Sandwich, Abraham Duquesne).

Grand Alliance, Naval Operations (and articles Earl of Torrington, and Beachy Head, Battle of; La Hogue, Earl of Oxford [Edward Russell] and Tourville).

Spanish Succession, Naval Operations (and Château-Renault, Benbow, Rooke, Cloudesley Shovel, Duguay-Trouin, Forbin).

Austrian Succession, Naval Operations (and the articles Edward Vernon, Lord Anson, Toulon, Battle of, and Thomas Mathews, marking the official sanction in England of an absurd formal system of tactics).

Seven Years’ War, Naval Operations (and Boscawen, Byng, Hawke, Pocock, Quiberon).

American War of Independence, Naval Operations (and Esek Hopkins, John Paul Jones, Comte d’Estaing, Suffren St. Tropez, Thomas Truxtun, Lord Howe, John Byron, Hotham, Hyde Parker, Rodney, Guichen, Comte de Grasse).

French Revolutionary Wars, Naval Operations (and First of June, Battle of, Howe, Villaret de Joyeuse, Lord Bridport, Lord Hood, Earl of St. Vincent [John Jervis], St. Vincent, Battle of, Lord Keith, Lord Duncan, Nile, Nelson, Sir Thomas Troubridge).

Napoleonic Campaigns, Naval Operations (and Baron de Saumarez, Copenhagen, Battle of, Sir Hyde Parker, Sir Robert Calder, Villeneuve, Trafalgar, Lord Collingwood).

American War of 1812 (and John Rodgers, Isaac Hull, William Bainbridge, Stephen Decatur, David Porter, Oliver Hazard Perry, Sir Philip Broke, Thomas Macdonough).

And Lissa (1811), closely resembling Trafalgar, and Navarino, decisive for Greek Independence.

The Era of Steam.

American Civil War (and Hampton Roads, Andrew Hull Foote, New Madrid, D. G. Farragut, D. D. Porter, W. B. Cushing).

172Chile-Peruvian War.

Chilean Civil War.

Chino-Japanese War (and see Ito).

Spanish-American War (and see the articles W. T. Sampson, W. S. Schley, George Dewey, Pascual Cervera y Topete Cervera).

Russo-Japanese War (and Togo, Dogger Bank, Tsushima).

Armaments

The subject of armaments is treated in the articles Ship and Shipbuilding (see chapter For Marine Transportation Men), Armour Plates, with illustrations, by Major William Egerton Edwards, late lecturer at the Royal Naval War College, Greenwich, Ordnance, Ammunition, Torpedo, etc.

The following is an alphabetical list of articles in the Britannica of especial interest to naval officers or other students of naval warfare.

173

Part II
Courses of Educational Reading to Supplement Or Take the Place of School or University Studies

175

CHAPTER XXXI
MUSIC

The general articles on music in the Encyclopaedia Britannica provide an illuminative discussion of broad artistic principles which cannot fail to stimulate the musical sense and perception of the professional or the amateur. The technical and critical treatment of the subject was directed by Donald F. Tovey, composer, pianist, and author of Essays in Musical Analysis; and no one could be better fitted for the work of organizing this department of the Britannica. He was assisted by W. H. Hadow, the well-known musical writer and composer, J. A. Fuller Maitland, musical critic of The Times (London), E. J. Dent, author of Alessandro Scarlatti and His Works, R. H. Legge, principal musical critic on the Daily Telegraph (London), and others; and the section treating of musical instruments was organized and contributed by Miss Kathleen Schlesinger, the greatest living authority on the subject.

In mapping out courses of reading the subject is divided into sections as follows: (1) Evolution, (2) Theory, (3) Musical Forms, (4) Musical Instruments.

The article Music (Vol. 19, p. 72), by Donald Tovey, which contains a masterly account of the development of the art from the earliest time down to the present day, provides the reader with just that general survey which enables him to see the whole picture in perspective. This he will naturally turn to first, but to fill out the picture there are a number of other articles which he will wish to read. In the following scheme the evolution of the art has been sketched in skeleton, so that the student may have before him a guide to the study of any period in which he is specially interested. This outline serves to show how very thoroughly the ground is covered in the new Encyclopaedia Britannica.

(1) EVOLUTION OF MUSIC

Subject for Reading Article
PRE-HARMONIC STAGE
Primitive Music. Music (Vol. 19, p. 72).
  Song (Vol. 25, p. 406).
Musical sense first awakened by the rhythm of the dance. Dance (Vol. 7, p. 795); see also Rhythm (Vol. 23, p. 278).
Legendary account of the invention of music by a Judean. David (Vol. 7, p. 859).
Hebrew music: setting of the Psalms. Psalms, Book of (Vol. 22, p. 539 and p. 536).
Suggested Jewish origin of some Gregorian Tunes. Plain Song (Vol. 21, p. 706).
176Dawn of modern music in Greece. Connection of music with lyric poetry. Terpander of Lesbos (660 B.C.) adds 3 strings to the 4–stringed lyre, giving compass of octave. Greek Literature (Vol. 12, p. 509).
Characteristics of Greek music. Pythagoras (6th century, B.C.) fixes the intervals of the harmonic series and of the diatonic scale. Music (Vol. 19, p. 73); see also Pythagoras (Vol. 22, p. 699).
The Greek scale shows a latent harmonic sense, though octaves only allowed. Lyre (Vol. 17, p. 178); see also Orchestra (Vol. 20, p. 168); Aulos (Vol. 2, p. 917); Cithara (Vol. 6, p. 395).
  Harmony (Vol. 13, p. 1).
Pitch in Greek music. Pitch, Musical (Vol. 21, p. 661).
Other primitive systems without influence on modern music. China, Literature (Vol. 6, p. 228 and p. 215).
Chinese adopted Pythagorean system; a lost art recovered in 3rd century, A.D.  
Indian music—Scale of 22 intervals. Sanskrit (Vol. 24, p. 181).
Siamese music: 7 tone scale; orchestras perform in unison. Siam (Vol. 25, p. 5).
The music of the North American Indian. Indians, North American (Vol. 14, p. 470).

Biographies of musicians of the primitive, non-harmonic, period in the Britannica are: Terpander, 7th century B.C.; Pythagoras, 6th century B.C.; Aristoxenus, 4th century; Alypius, 3rd century B.C.; Aristides, Quintilianus, 3rd century.

HARMONIC ORIGINS

The Greeks found that by doubling the melody at the octave a greater sonority resulted. It was a great step from this to the discovery that two separate tunes could be combined which should be satisfying to the ear. With this discovery modern harmony may be said to have begun.

Subject Article
Awakening of the harmonic sense. Music (Vol. 19, p. 74); Harmony (Vol. 13, p. 1).
The Grecian modes modified into the ecclesiastical by Ambrose in the 4th century. Plain Song (Vol. 21, p. 705); see also Ambrose (Vol. 1, p. 798), and Gregory (Vol. 12, p. 567).
Following Hucbald, “beatus Guido inventor musicae” in the 11th century, invents names for the notes and improves system of notation. Guido of Arezzo (Vol. 12, p. 687); see also Hucbald (Vol. 13, p. 847).
177The Troubadour becomes a learned musician in the 13th century. Adam de la Hale, 13th century (Vol. 1, p. 171); Machaut (Vol. 17, p. 233).
After Dunstable of England and Dufay of the Netherlands had invented counterpoint comes the first great composer, heralding the advent of the “Golden Age.” Des Prés, Josquin (Vol. 8, p. 103); see also Binchois, Egidius (Vol. 3, p. 948).

THE GOLDEN AGE

The First Great Climax

Composers were not long content with the simple combination of two tunes. They soon found that three tunes so treated afforded a yet richer texture, and the extension to the elaborate polyphony of 16th century choral music was an inevitable step. An elaborate system of prohibitions, based on the limitations of the human voice, and the difficulty of attacking certain intervals, shackled the composer at every turn and formed the basis of theories of counterpoint which endured almost to our time. Despite the restrictions imposed by their rules, the structure raised by the great composers of the first half of the 16th century was of amazing richness and complexity.

Subject of Reading Article
The Riot of Choral Polyphony in the 16th century. Music, The Golden Age (Vol. 19, p. 75); see also Harmony (Vol. 13, p. 2); Instrumentation, Vocal Styles of 16th Century (Vol. 14, p. 651).
Musical forms brought to great perfection in this period those in which texture holds first place. Contrapuntal Forms, Canonic Forms and Devices, Counterpoint on a Canto Fermo (Vol. 7, p. 42); see also Mass, Polyphonic Masses (Vol. 17, p. 849); Madrigal (Vol. 17, p. 295); Motet (Vol. 18, p. 905).
Leaders of musical thought in the “Golden Age.” Lasso, Orlando (Vol. 16, p. 237); Tallis, T. (Vol. 26, p. 377); Palestrina (Vol. 20, p. 627).
Composer of the Golden Age

Composers of the “Golden Age,” following the polyphonic tradition of the early 16th century, biographies of whom appear in the Britannica, are: Netherlandish: Arcadelt, Jacob, 1514–1556; Lasso, Orlando, c. 1530–1594; German: Finck, Hermann, 1527–1558; Eccard, Johann, 1553–1611; Aichinger, Gregor, leader of Reformation church music, c. 1565–1628; French: Goudimel, C., c. 1510–1572; English: Wilbye, John, 16th century, famous for his madrigals; Merbeck, John, d. 1585; Bennett, John, d.c. 1614; Bateson, T., d. 1630, a composer of madrigals; Tallis, T., c. 1515–1585, “father of English cathedral music”; Farrant, R., c. 1530–1581; Byrd, Wm., 1543–1623; Morley, T., 1557–1603; Gibbons, Orlando, 1583–1625; Italian: Animuccia, Giovanni, c. 1490–1571; Zarlino, Gioseffo, 1517–1590, fixed the diatonic scale as now accepted; Palestrina, Giovanni Pierluigi da, 1526–1594; Banchiere, Adriano, c. 1557–1634, fought against monodist revolt—see below; Anerio (brothers), c. 1560–1620; Artusi, G. M., 16th century, opposed Monteverdi’s innovations—see below; Spanish: Victoria, Tommasso L. da, c. 1540–1613.

178

THE FIRST ROMANTIC MOVEMENT

The last word in polyphony seemed to have been said by such masters as Orlando Lasso, and Palestrina, and a change into new paths was inevitable. Moreover, men’s minds were craving something more directly stimulating than the passionless web of ecclesiastical polyphony, which was the glory of the 16th century. Freedom was sought from the conventions of modal counterpoint. The monodist revolt was the result.

Subject Article
Revolt against the overelaboration of texture. Music, The Monodic Revolution (Vol. 19, p. 76); Harmony, Modern Harmony (Vol. 13, p. 4).
Prominence given to solo part rather than to choral effect leads to development of the aria. Song (Vol. 25, p. 406); Aria (Vol. 2, p. 489).
The leader in the new paths, the pioneer of modern harmony. Monteverde, Claudio (Vol. 18, p. 778).
The first oratorio (1600). Oratorio (Vol. 20, p. 161); see also Cavaliere, Emilio del (Vol. 5, p. 563).
The first opera (1600). Opera (Vol. 20, p. 121); see also Peri, Jacopo (Vol. 21, p. 144).
The monodic impulse synchronizes with the startling development of the violin family by the Cremona makers. Violin (Vol. 28, p. 103); see also Amati (Vol. 1, p. 783); Guarnieri (Vol. 12, p. 660); Stradivari (Vol. 25, p. 977).
Famous Monodists

Among distinguished composers of this period and school are: English: Bull, John, c. 1562–1628; Ford, Thomas, b. 1580; Lawes, Henry, 1595–1662; Italian: Cavaliere, E. del, c. 1550–1602; Peri, Jacopo, b. 1561; Gabriele, Giovanni, 1557–c. 1612, early experimenter in chromatic harmony; Caccini, Giulio, 1558–1615; Monteverde, Claudio, 1567–1643; Allegri, Gregorio, c. 1570–1652; Frescobaldi, Girolamo, 1583–1644, famous also as a teacher; Agostino, P., 1593–1639; Cavalli, F., 1596–1676, popularized opera; Carissimi, G., c. 1604–1674, popularized oratorio; Rossi, Luigi de. All the above have separate articles assigned to them in the Britannica.

THE 17th CENTURY AND AFTER

The Second Great Climax

Those who revolted from the traditions of the polyphonic school went, as was inevitable, too far. A reaction was equally inevitable, for the language of the new music was unformed and was in danger of being stereotyped into the emptiest of formulas. The welding of the old and new ideas was all that was needed to prepare the way for the colossal achievement of a Bach or a Beethoven. It was a busy period when the rules of counterpoint were reviewed and revised, when theories of harmony as a distinct science took shape. But, save for the work of such men as Purcell, the Englishman (Vol. 22, p. 658), born 100 years before his time, the 17th century was mainly one of preparation. The next great climax came in the first half of the 18th century.

179
Subject Article
The renascence of texture, the welding of polyphony and monody. Music (Vol. 19, p. 77); Harmony (Vol. 13, p. 4).
Publication in 1715 of the famous Gradus ad Parnassum, the first complete theory of counterpoint. Fux, Johann Joseph (Vol. 11, p. 375).
The first systematic theory of harmony published in 1722. Rameau, J. P. (Vol. 22, p. 874).
The second great climax in music. Music, Bach and Handel (Vol. 19, p. 78).
The achievement of Johann Sebastian Bach. Bach, J. S. (Vol. 3, p. 124); see also Contrapuntal Forms (Vol. 7, p. 41); Concerto (Vol. 6, p. 825); Overture (Vol. 20, p. 384); Suite (Vol. 26, p. 51); Oratorio (Vol. 20, p. 161); Cantata (Vol. 5, p. 209); Mass, Lutheran Masses (Vol. 17, p. 850); Variations (Vol. 27, p. 912); Instrumentation, Decoration and Orchestral Schemes (Vol. 14, p. 651 and p. 655).
17th and 18th Century Composers

Composers of the period who have separate notices in the Britannica are: Italian: Cesti, M. A., c. 1620–1669; Colonna, Giovanni P., c. 1637–1695; Pasquini, B., 1637–1710; Stradella, Alessandro, 1645–1682; Corelli, Arcangelo, 1653–1713, first classic of the violin; Steffani, A., 1653–1728; Scarlatti, Alessandro, 1659–1725, largely created language of modern music; Pitoni, G. O., 1657–1743; Lotti, Antonio, c. 1667–1740; Clari, G. C. M., c. 1669–1745; Bononcini, G. B., c. 1672–1750; Albinoni, T., c. 1674–1745; Astorga, Emanuele d’, 1681–1736; Durante, Francesco, 1684–1755; Marcello, B., 1686–1739; Vinci, Leonardo, 1690–1730; Leo, Leonardo, 1694–1744; Logroscino, Nicola, c. 1700–1763; Pergolesi, Giovanni Battista, 1710–1736; Alberti, Domenico, c. 1710–1740; French: Cambert, R., 1628–1677; Lully, Jean-Baptiste, c. 1623–1687, inventor of the classical French opera style; English: Locke, Matthew, c. 1630–1677; Blow, John, 1648–1708; Purcell, Henry, 1658–1695; Croft, William, 1678–1727; Handel, George Frederick, 1685–1759; Greene, Maurice, 1695–1755; German: Bach, Johann Sebastian, 1685–1750; Hasse, Johann A., 1699–1783; Eberlin, J. E., 1702–1762.

THE RISE OF THE SONATA

The Third Great Climax

Bach, like Palestrina, seemed to have closed a period; and for nearly a hundred years after his death his influence on the course of musical development was astonishingly small. Again men sought new channels of expression and found them in instrumental music. But a structure less loosely knit than the suite form was needed if the new ideas were to be adequately stated, and the sonata grew into being, a form which has sufficed to this day as a medium for the noblest thoughts of the great composers. The 18th century saw, too, the reform of the opera by Gluck, a great development of orchestral resources, and the rise of the string quartette in chamber music.

180
Subject Article
The new language: evolution of the sonata from the suite. Music (Vol. 19, p. 79); Sonata, Sonata Style (Vol. 25, p. 394); see also Scarletti, Dominico (Vol. 24, p. 302); and Bach, K. P. E. (Vol. 3, p. 130).
Reform of the opera. Opera (Vol. 20, p. 123); see also Gluck (Vol. 12, p. 138); Piccinni (Vol. 21, p. 579); Mozart (Vol. 18, p. 951).
The rise of the symphony and the string quartette, development of the sonata. Music, The Symphonic Classes (Vol. 19, p. 78); Sonata Forms (Vol. 25, p. 395); Symphony (Vol. 26, p. 290); see also Haydn (Vol. 13, p. 110).
The growth of the orchestra. Instrumentation, Symphonic (Vol. 14, p. 652); see also Haydn (Vol. 13, p. 110).
The third great climax. The perfection of the sonata form. Beethoven, L. von (Vol. 3, p. 644); see also Sonata Forms (Vol. 25, p. 397); Instrumentation (Vol. 14, p. 653); Variations (Vol. 27, p. 913); Mass (Vol. 17, p. 850).

Biographies of the following composers of the period appear in the Britannica: German and Austrian: Bach, Karl Philipp Emanuel, 1714–1788; Gluck, C. W., 1714–1787; Hiller, J. A., 1728–1804; Haydn, Franz Joseph, 1732–1809; Dittersdorf, Karl Ditters von, 1739–1799; Winter, P., c. 1755–1825; Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, 1756–1791; Himmel, F. H., 1765–1814; Beethoven, Ludwig van, 1770–1827; French: Gossec, F. J., 1734–1829; Gretry, A. E. M., 1741–1813; Mehul, Etienne H., 1763–1817; Lesueur, Jean François, c. 1763–1837; Boieldieu, F. A., 1775–1834; English: Arne, T. A., 1710–1778, preserved English tradition in face of Handelian obsession; Boyce, William, 1710–1779; Jackson, W., 1730–1803; Battishill, J., 1738–1801; Arnold, S., 1740–1802; Dibdin, C., 1745–1814; Shield, W., 1748–1829; Storace, S., 1763–1796; Attwood, T., 1765–1838; Wesley, Samuel, 1766–1837, father of modern organ playing; Italian: Scarlatti, Domenico, 1685–1757; Martini, G. B., 1706–1784; Galuppi, Baldassare, 1706–1785; Jommelli, N., 1714–1774; Guglielmi, P., 1727–1804; Piccinni, N., 1728–1800; Sarti, Giuseppe, 1729–1802; Sacchini, A. M. G., 1734–1786; Paisiello, G., 1741–1816; Boccherini, Luigi, 1743–1805, last real master of suite form; Cimarosa, D., 1749–1801; Salieri, A., 1750–1825; Cherubini, 1760–1842; Paer, F., 1771–1839.

NEW PATHS

Early in the 19th century the wave of romanticism broke over Europe. The effect on music was not nearly so violent as was the monodic revolt of the 16th–17th centuries, since the resources and technique of the art had now been developed; but it was nevertheless striking and showed itself in several directions, but mainly in two: lyrical and dramatic. The short compositions of Field, Schumann, and Chopin, and the development of the art song are instances of the former; the whole range of programme music, of which the symphonic poem is the prototype, is evidence of the latter; while in opera the reforms started by Gluck were carried to their logical conclusion by Wagner. Two other movements are also significant; the return to Bach and a recognition of his amazing modernity, and the pronounced revival of national characteristics in music, as shown particularly in the new English, Russian, and Bohemian Schools.

181
Subject Article
The Romantic Period. Music, From Beethoven to Wagner (Vol. 19, p. 79).
The Romantic in opera. Weber, Carl Maria F. E. von (Vol. 28, p. 455); Song (Vol. 25, p. 409).
The first great lyrical song writer. Schubert, Franz Peter (Vol. 24, p. 379); Song (Vol. 25, p. 409).
The Romantic in the symphony. Programme Music (Vol. 22, p. 424); see also Berlioz, Hector (Vol. 3, p. 791).
The rediscovery of Bach. Bach, J. S. (Vol. 2, p. 124); Mendelssohn (Vol. 18, pp. 121–124).
Development of song forms. Song (Vol. 25, p. 410); see also Schumann, Robert (Vol. 24, p. 384); Wolf, Hugo (Vol. 28, p. 771); Brahms, J. (Vol. 4, p. 390).
Discontent with the sonata form. Symphonic Poem (Vol. 26, p. 289); Liszt, F. (Vol. 16, p. 780).
Gluck’s idea realised; union of music Music (Vol. 19, p. 80); Operas, Leit-Motif with drama. (Vol. 20, p. 125); Wagner, W. Richard (Vol. 28, p. 236).
The last of the royal line of German composers shows vitality of the sonata form. Brahms, Johannes (Vol. 4, p. 389); Sonata Forms, Sonata since Beethoven (Vol. 25, p. 398).
Modern Tendencies. Music (Vol. 19, p. 82); see also Strauss, Richard (Vol. 25, p. 1003); Debussy, Achille (Vol. 7, p. 906).

Composers of this period, who have had separate articles assigned to them in the Britannica, follow: the growth of national schools will be noted.

19th Century Composers

German and Austrian: Gansbacher, J. B., 1778–1844; Kreutzer, K., 1780–1849; Spohr, Ludwig, 1784–1859; Weber, Carl Maria F. E. von, 1786–1886; Meyerbeer, G., 1791–1863; Hauptmann, M., 1792–1868; Löwe, J. K. G., 1796–1869; Schubert, Franz Peter, 1797–1828; Lortzing, G. A., 1801–1851; Strauss, Johann, 1804–1849, king of valse composers; Mendelssohn-Bartholdy, J. L. F., 1809–1847; Nicolai, Otto, 1810–1849; Schumann, Robert Alexander, 1810–1856; Hiller, F., 1811–1885; Wagner, Richard, 1813–1883; Heller, Stephen, 1815–1888; Franz, Robert, 1815–1892, song composer; Abt, Franz, 1819–1885, art folk-song; Suppe, F. von, 1820–1895; Raff, J. J., 1822–1882; Cornelius, Carl August Peter, 1824–1874, song writer; Bruckner, Anton, 1824–1896, Wagnerian symphonist; Reinecke, C. H. C., 1824–1910; Lassen, Eduard, 1830–1904; Joachim, Joseph, 1831–1907; Brahms, Johannes, 1833–1897; Bruch, Max, b. 1838; Rheinberger, J. G., 1839–1901; Goetz, Hermann, 1840–1876; Neszler, V., 1841–1890: Humperdinck, E., b. 1854; Wolf, Hugo, 1860–1903; Strauss, Richard, b. 1864.

French: Auber, D. F. E., 1782–1871; Herold, L. J. F., 1791–1833; Halevy, J. F. F. E., 1799–1862; Berlioz, Hector, 1803–1869; David, F., 1810–1876; Thomas, C. L. Ambroise, 1811–1896; Gounod, C. F., 1818–1893; Offenbach, J., 1819–1880; Franck, Cesar, 1822–1890, founder of Modern French School; Lalo, E., 1823–1892; Reyer, E., b. 1823; Lecocq, A. C., b. 1832; Benoit, P. L. L., 1834–1901; Saint-Saëns, Charles Camille, b. 1835; Dubois, F. C. T., b. 1837; Bizet, Georges, 1838–1875; Joncieres, V., 1839–1903; Chabrier, A. E., 1841–1894; Audran, E., 1842–1901; Massenet, J. E. F., 1842–1912; Faure, Gabriel, b., 1845; Widor, Charles Marie, b. 1845; Godard, Benjamin L. P., 1849–1895; Planquette, 182R., b. 1850; D’Indy,. P. M. T. V., b. 1851; Messager, A. C. P., b. 1853; Bruneau, Alfred, b. 1857; Chaminade, Cécile, b. 1861; Bemberg, Herman, b. 1861; Debussy, Claude Achilles, b. 1862.

Belgian: The violinist Ysaye, b. 1858.

Italian: Spontani, G. L. P., 1774–1851; Rossini, G. A., 1792–1868; Donizetti, G., 1798–1848; Bellini, V., 1801–1835; Verdi, Giuseppe, 1813–1901; Ponchielli, Amilcare, 1834–1886, on whom have modelled themselves, Mascagni, Leoncavallo, etc.; Boito, Arrigo, b. 1842; Sgambati, G., b. 1843; Leoncavallo, R., b. 1858; Puccini, G., b. 1858; Mascagni, P., b. 1863.

British: Horsley, Wm., 1774–1858; Smart, Sir George T., 1776–1867; Bishop, Sir H. R., 1786–1855; Pearsall, R. L. de, 1795–1856; Field, John, 1782–1837, inventor of the nocturne; Goss, Sir John, 1800–1880; Hatton, J. L., 1800–1886; Barnett, J., 1802–1890; Benedict, Sir Julius, 1804–1885; Balfe, M. W., 1808–1870; Wesley, S. S., 1810–1876; Hullah, John P., 1812–1884; Macfarren, Sir G. A., 1813–1887; Wallace, Wm. V., 1814–1865; Pierson, H. H., 1815–1873; Bennett, Sir Wm. Sterndale, 1816–1875; Ouseley, Sir F. A. G., 1825–1889; Bache, F. E., 1833–1858; Clay, F., 1838–1889; Barnby, Sir J., 1838–1896; Stainer, Sir John, 1840–1901; Sullivan, Sir Arthur S., 1842–1900; Cellier, Alfred, 1844–1891; Mackenzie, Sir A. C., b. 1847; Parry, Sir C. Hubert H., b. 1848, on whom fell the mantle of Purcell; Thomas, Arthur Goring, 1850–1892; Cowen, F. J., b. 1852; Stanford, Sir Charles Villiers, b. 1852; Elgar, Sir Edward, b. 1857; MacCunn, Hamish, b. 1868.

Bohemian: Smetana, F., 1824–1884, founder of modern Bohemian School; Dvořák, Anton, 1841–1904.

Hungarian: Gung’l, Josef, 1810–1889; Liszt, Franz, 1811–1886; Goldmark, Karl, b. 1832; Paderewski, I. J., b. 1860.

Polish: Chopin, Frederic François, 1810–1849; Moszkowski, Moritz, b. 1854.

Russian: Glinka, M. Ivanovich, 1803–1857, founder of national school; Dargomijsky, A. Sergeivich, 1813–1869; Rubinstein, Anton, 1829–1894; Borodin, A. Porfyrievich, 1834–1887; Moussorgsky, M. Petrovich, 1835–1881; Balakirev, M. Alexeivich, b. 1836; Tschaikovsky, Peter Ilich, 1840–1893; Rimsky-Korsakov, N. Andreievich, 1844–1908; Glazunov, A. Constantinovich, b. 1865.

Norwegian: The violinist Bull, Ole, 1810–1880; Kjerulf, Halfdan, 1815–1868; Svendsen, J. S., b. 1840; Grieg, Edvard Hagerup, 1843–1907.

Danish: Gade, Niels W., 1817–1890.

Sweden: Wennerbert, G., 1817–1901, song writer.

American: Emmett, D. D., started “negro minstrels,” 1815–1904; Foster, Stephen C., 1826–1864, song writer; Eichberg, Julius, 1824–1893, founded Boston Conservatory of Music; Buck, Dudley, 1839–1909; MacDowell, Edward Alexander, 1861–1908. For notices of other modern composers and their tendencies—see Music, Recent Music (Vol. 19, p. 82).

Musical Historians

Famous musical historians and writers on music, whose biographies are in the Encyclopaedia Britannica, are: Aristoxenus, 4th century B.C.; Praetorius, M., 1571–1621; Perusch, J. C., 1667–1752; Barnard, John, 17th century; Hawkins, Sir John, 1710–1789; Gerbert, M., 1720–1793; Burney, Ch., 1726–1814; Gerber, 1746–1819; Forkel, J. N., 1749–1818; Baini, G., 1775–1844; Novello, V., 1781–1861; Callcott, J. W., 1766–1821; Fetis, F. J., 1784–1871; Chorley, H. F., 1808–1872; Chappell, Wm., 1809–1888; Dwight, John S., 1813–1893; Ambros, A. W., 1816–1876; Grove, Sir George, 1820–1900.

183

(2) THEORETICAL ARTICLES

“In the beginning,” said Hans von Bülow, “was rhythm,” and as Rhythm (Vol. 23, p. 277) is the skeleton of every musical phrase and formula, the interesting article by Donald Tovey on rhythm in music may well serve as an introduction to the other subjects in this section. Passing to the elements, the articles Sound, Diatonic Scale (Vol. 25, p. 448) and Plain Song (Vol. 21, p. 705) should be read. In the former article the physical basis of the modern scale is determined, while in the latter an account is given of the modes which for centuries were the vehicles of musical expression. In the article Musical Notation (Vol. 19, p. 86) the steps by which the present system of recording music was reached are noted, and in Pitch, Musical (Vol. 21, p. 660), the whole of this interesting and vexed subject is reviewed by Alfred J. Hipkins, a high authority, formerly hon. curator of the Royal College of Music. The article Melody (Vol. 18, p. 96) contains in addition to a discussion of the terms a series of useful definitions (e.g., conjunct and disjunct motion) and several musical examples. This brings us to the main articles of this section—Counterpoint (Vol. 7, p. 315), Harmony (Vol. 13, p. 1) and Instrumentation (Vol. 14, p. 651). All are by Donald Tovey and all are brilliant. In particular the article Harmony deserves the most careful study, especially interesting being the sections Tonality and Key-relationship. The article on counterpoint is mainly a definition of the principles involved and is introductory both to Harmony and to Contrapuntal Forms. In Instrumentation the question of colour is discussed from the historical and aesthetic aspects, accompanied by valuable analysis of the colour schemes of various composers from the choral writers of the “Golden Age” down to Wagner and Richard Strauss.

Theorists

Famous theorists who have helped to establish the grammar of music are the following: Terpander, 7th century B.C., founder of Greek music (Vol. 26, p. 647); Pythagoras, 6th century, B.C., said to have discovered numerical relation governing the harmonic series (Vol. 22, p. 699); Alypius, 3rd century B.C. (Vol. 1, p. 776); Aristides, Quintilianus, 3rd century A.D.; Hucbald, c. 840–930, inventor of new notation (Vol. 13, p. 847); Guido of Arezzo, c. 995–1050, “Beatus Guido, inventor musicae,” (Vol. 12, p. 687); Agricola, Martin, c. 1500–1556; Zarlino, G., 1517–1590, fixed the diatonic scale; Artusi, G. M., 16th century, opposed monodist revolt; Fux, J. J., wrote the famous Gradus ad Parnassum, Rameau, J. P., 1683–1764, to whom the first systematic theory of harmony is due; Albrechtsberger, J. G., 1736–1809, the teacher of Beethoven; Reicha, A. J., 1770–1836; Richter, E. F. E., 1808–1879; Curwen, J., 1817–1880, inventor of tonic sol-fa system; Berlioz Hector, whose text book on instrumentation is classic. On all these separate articles will be found in the Britannica.

(3) MUSICAL FORMS

Contrapuntal Forms

In making a detailed study of any particular form, reference should be made to the critical sections of the biographies of those masters who have done most towards its development. As has been seen in the historical section of this chapter, the Contrapuntal Forms (Vol. 7, p. 41) were the first to attain to a high standard of organization in the hands of such masters as Orlando Lasso (Vol. 16, p. 237) and Palestrina (Vol. 20, p. 627). The articles Mass 184(Vol. 17, p. 849), Motet (Vol. 18, p. 905), Madrigal (Vol. 17, p. 295), Canon (Vol. 5, p. 190), Chorale (Vol. 6, p. 269), cover the ground of early choral music. In tracing their development reference should be made to the articles on Bach, J. S. (Vol. 3, p. 127), Beethoven (Vol. 3, p. 649), Brahms (Vol. 4, p. 390). Oratorio (Vol. 20, p. 161) and Cantata (Vol. 5, p. 209) had their beginning in the work of the followers of Monteverde in the early 17th century, and their development may be traced in the work of Cavaliere (Vol. 5, p. 563), Carissimi (Vol. 5, p. 338), Purcell (Vol. 22, p. 658), Bach (Vol. 3, p. 127), Handel (Vol. 2, p. 912), Brahms (Vol. 4 p. 390), César Franck (Vol. 11, p. 3), and Sir C. Hubert Parry (Vol. 20, p. 865).

Suite and Sonata

In instrumental music, the Suite (Vol. 26, p. 51), of which Boccherini (Vol. 4, p. 105) was the last master, most nearly foreshadowed the Sonata (Sonata Forms, Vol. 25, p. 394), and together they tell the tale of the development of absolute music up to modern experiments in the more elastic Symphonic Poem (Vol. 26, p. 289) of which Liszt (Vol. 16, p. 780) was the first to see the possibilities. In addition to the articles Sonata and Sonata Forms the reader should carefully study that part of the article Beethoven beginning on page 647 of Vol. 3; also the article Harmony, Key Relationships (Vol. 13, p. 5) which contains analyses of several striking key systems, and further reference should also be made to the articles Variations (Vol. 27, p. 912), Symphony (Vol. 26, p. 290).

Programme Music

To the Romantic movement of the early part of the 19th century may be traced the attempt to escape from the apparent restrictions of the Sonata Form, and Schumann’s (Vol. 24, p. 384) many Fantasie-Stücke and Chopin’s lyrical compositions (Vol. 6, p. 268) are prototypes in little of the tendencies of the time. On a larger canvas are the Ton-dramen of Liszt and the symphonic poems and the elaborate programme music of modern composers such as Richard Strauss (Vol. 25, p. 1003); and though Brahms (Vol. 4, p. 389) showed clearly enough that the classical sonata form was a framework sufficiently elastic to hold the most elaborate and modern ideas, the direction in which music has tended is towards the Symphonic Poem in which, by such devices as the transformation of themes and the Leitmotif (Opera, Vol. 20, p. 125) a still greater elasticity is sought in form with a greater continuity of idea in substance. See Programme Music (Vol. 22, p. 424).

Opera

Supplementing the article Opera (Vol. 20, p. 121) are several which should be consulted. Aria (Vol. 2, p. 489), Overture (Vol. 20, p. 384), and especially Gluck (Vol. 12, p. 139), Mozart (Vol. 18, p. 951), Weber (Vol. 28, p. 457), and Wagner (Vol. 28, p. 237). These, with the biographical notices of operatic composers, which include almost every Italian composer from the days of Peri (Vol. 21, p. 144), and French composers from Lully (Vol. 17, p. 121), give a mass of information bearing on the development of this popular form.

Song

Song (Vol. 25, p. 400), the oldest of art forms, and almost the last to be rescued from the too narrow formalism of which the classical Aria (Vol. 2, p. 489) is the beautiful example, is so much the most generally popular that the article on it in the Britannica will probably be more widely read than any other on musical subjects. Written by W. A. J. Ford, a scholarly musician and teacher of singing at the Royal College of Music (London), it provides a brilliant survey of the evolution of the song from its earliest beginnings. In connection with 185it the reader will find much to interest him in the biographical notices of two famous troubadours of the 13th and 14th centuries, Adam de la Hale (Vol. 1, p. 171) and Machaut, G. De (Vol. 17, p. 233); of Monteverde (Vol. 18, p. 778), the pioneer of the monodist revolt at the end of the 16th century, of Scarlatti, Alessandro (Vol. 24, p. 302), 17th century, who perfected the aria form, of Purcell, Henry (Vol. 22, p. 658), the great English composer of the 17th century, of Johann Sebastian Bach (Vol. 3, p. 126) 18th century, of Schubert (Vol. 24, p. 380), the creator of the modern song, of Schumann (Vol. 24, p. 384) who brought a yet greater intimacy into the form, of Hugo Wolf (Vol. 28, p. 771), the most clairvoyant of song writers, of Sir Hubert Parry (Vol. 20, p. 865), and Sir Charles Villiers Stanford (Vol. 25, p. 773), who have respectively done the best modern work in the English and Irish tradition, and of the American MacDowell (Vol. 17, p. 214). Reference should also be made to the articles Melody (Vol. 18, p. 96), Accompaniment (Vol. 1, p. 122), Rhythm (Vol. 23, p. 277). Suggestive also are the articles Ballads (Vol. 3, p. 264), Poetry (Vol. 21, p. 889). On the technique of singing the article Voice (Vol. 28, p. 172) by Dr. J. G. McKendrick, will be found very helpful, especially the section on the Physiology of Voice Production.

(4) MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS

One branch of the subject yet remains, that of musical instruments. Here the editor of the Britannica had the advantage of the assistance of Miss Kathleen Schlesinger (author of The Instruments of the Orchestra, and the greatest authority on the subject), who contributed practically all of the articles in the book on musical instruments. A list of them is given below, classified under their most convenient groupings. From these articles in the Encyclopaedia Britannica the reader will get a full account of every known musical instrument whether modern or ancient, with its compass, and scale, and of its connection with other instruments of the same class; so that the evolution of every type is clearly brought out. As a preliminary to a general study of the subject, the articles Orchestra (Vol. 20, p. 168), and Instrumentation (Vol. 14, p. 651) may conveniently be read. In the former Miss Schlesinger gives a summary of the development of the various classes of instruments and of their concerted use. In the article Instrumentation, on the other hand, Donald Tovey illustrates the principles which govern their use. This article closes with an interesting survey of the orchestral schemes at different periods in the history of the art. The following classified list of separate articles on musical instruments in the Britannica, shows how very completely this work covers the field:

Stringed Instruments (Vol. 25, p. 1038).

Strings Plucked by Fingers or Plectrum: Asor; Balalaika; Banjo; Barbiton; Chelys; Cithara; Citole; Cittern; Epigonion; Guitar; Harp; Harp-Lute; Kinnor; Kissar; Lute; Lyre; Mandoline; Nanga; Pandura; Psaltery; Rebab; Rotta; Sambuca; Theorbo; Trigonon; Zither. Strings Set in Vibration by Friction of the Bow: Crowd; Double Bass; Fiddle; Geige; Guitar-Fiddle; Gusla; Nail Violin; Philomel; Ravanastron; Rebab; Rebec; Tromba Marina; Vielle; Viol; Viola; Violin; Violoncello. Strings Struck by Hammers or Tangents: Clavecin; Clavicembalo; Clavichord; Clavicytherium; Dulcimer; Harmonichord; Harpsichord; Pianoforte; Spinet; Virginal. Strings Set in Vibration by Friction of a Wheel: Hurdy-Gurdy; Organistrum. 186Strings Set in Vibration by the Wind: Aeolian Harp. Appliances: Bow; Monochord; Mute; Mouthpiece; Keyboard; Sordino.

Wind Instruments (mouth blown) (Vol. 28, p. 709.)

Wood Wind.

The Pipe Class: Eunuch Flute; Fife; Flageolet; Flute; Nay; Piccolo; Pipe and Tabor; Recorder; Syrinx. Single Reed Class (cylindrical bore): Reed Instruments; Arghoul; Aulos; Bass Clarinet; Basset Horn; Batyphone; Clarinet; Pedal Clarinet. Double Reed Class (conical bore): Reed Instruments; Aulos; Bassoon; Bombard; Contrafagotto; Cor Anglais; Oboe; Pommer; Shawm; Clarina; Holztrompete; Cromorne; Rackett; Saxophone; Sordino; Tibia. To reed instruments also belong the Bagpipe Class: Askaules; Bagpipe; Biniou; Chorus; Drone; Platerspiel; Symphonia.

Brass Wind.

Bombardon; Buccina; Bugle; Cornet; Euphonium; Helicon; Horn; Lituus; Ophicleide; Sackbut; Saxhorn; Serpent; Trombone; Trumpet; Tuba; to which may be added, though not of brass or metal: Alpenhorn; Oliphant; Shofar; see also Mouthpiece; Mute; Valves.

Wind Instruments (mechanically blown).

Accordion; Barrel-Organ; Concertina; Harmonium; Orchestrion; Organ; Physharmonica; Portative Organ; Positive Organ; Regal; to which, though mouth blown, may be added Cheng. See also Free Reed Vibration; Keyboard.

Instruments of Percussion.

Sounding a Sensible Note: Bell; Bumbulum; Carillon; Glockenspiel; Gong; Harmonica; Jews’ Harp; Musical Box; Parsifal Bell-Instrument; Xylophone. Not Sounding a Sensible Note: Castanets; Cymbals; Chinese Pavillon; Drum; Kettle Drum; Nacaire; Sistrum; Tambourine; Timbrel; Tom-Tom; Triangle; Tympanon.

187

CHAPTER XXXII
THE FINE ARTS: GENERAL AND INTRODUCTORY

The art-student and every other reader interested in the fine arts will find in the Britannica the material for courses of reading of very great range and of the utmost interest and value—whether he wishes to study theory, practice or history.

Theory of Art

Of course no adequate treatment of the arts, or of any one of them, could logically, much less advantageously, separate theory, practice and history. But the theory of art, though it may be inferred or deduced from many other articles in the book, including those the most devoted to the practical or historical, may best and most directly be studied in three articles, Aesthetics, Art, and Fine Arts. Of these, the first, Aesthetics (Vol. 1, p. 277), equivalent to nearly 40 pages of this Guide, is written by Professor James Sully, late of University College, London, and author of The Human Mind and other psychological studies. It discusses the meaning of beauty and the problem of the nature of pleasure, especially “higher” pleasure, its relation to play, etc. And the article closes with a history of Aesthetic Theories, including those of the following philosophers, on all of whom the student will find separate and elaborate critical biographies in the Britannica: Plato, who set beauty high, but thought art a mere trick of imitation and wished it be censored rather than encouraged in his model republic; Aristotle, who sets beauty above the useful and necessary, but whose aesthetic seems to be applied to poetry rather than to any other art; the German philosophers, Kant, Schelling, Hegel, Schopenhauer, who so deeply impressed their theories on the literature of their times, etc. The articles Art (Vol. 2, p. 657) and Fine Arts are both by Sir Sidney Colvin, formerly keeper of prints and drawings, British Museum. The former begins with a contrast between art and nature—the contrast made famous by Pope, by Chaucer, repeatedly by Shakespeare and by Dr. Johnson in his definition of Art as “the power of doing something which is not taught by Nature or by instinct.” This definition is in itself an excellent text for a discourse on the importance in the study of the fine arts of the best literature on the subject. But Sir Sidney Colvin points out that the definition is incomplete, since Art

is a name not only for the power of doing something, but for the exercise of the power; and not only for the exercise of the power, but for the rules according to which it is exercised; and not only for the rules, but for the result. Painting, for instance, is an art, and th